Geometric Modeling

CHAPTER
1
Introduction to
Geometry
Modeling
2
Accessing,
Importing &
Exporting
Geometry
3
Coordinate
Frames
C O N T E N T S
MSC.Patran Reference Manual
Part 2: Geometry Modeling
■ Overview of Capabilities, 2
■ Concepts and Definitions, 4
❑ Parameterization, 5
❑ Topology, 10
- Topological Congruency and Meshing, 12
❑ Connectivity, 15
❑ Effects of Parameterization, Connectivity and Topology in MSC.Patran, 17
❑ Global Model Tolerance & Geometry, 18
■ Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran, 19
❑ Trimmed Surfaces, 20
❑ Solids, 24
❑ Parametric Cubic Geometry, 25
- Limitations on Parametric Cubic Geometry, 25
❑ Matrix of Geometry Types Created, 27
■ Building An Optimal Geometry Model, 30
❑ Building a Congruent Model, 31
❑ Building Optimal Surfaces, 33
❑ Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces, 37
❑ Building B-rep Solids, 40
❑ Building Degenerate Surfaces and Solids, 41
■ Overview, 46
■ Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry, 47
❑ Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran Unigraphics, 47
❑ Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran ProENGINEER, 55
■ PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry, 57
■ Coordinate Frame Definitions, 60
■ Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames, 63
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 2: Geometry Modeling
■ Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames, 66

4
Create Actions ■ Overview of Geometry Create Action, 70
■ Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 74
❑ Create Points at XYZ Coordinates or Point Locations (XYZ Method), 74
❑ Create Point ArcCenter, 79
❑ Extracting Points, 81
- Extracting Points from Curves and Edges, 81
- Extracting Single Points from Surfaces or Faces, 84
- Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces, 86
- Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces, 88
- Parametric Bounds for Extracting Points from a Surface, 90
❑ Interpolating Points, 91
- Between Two Points, 91
- Interpolating Points on a Curve, 94
❑ Intersecting Two Entities to Create Points, 97
❑ Creating Points by Offsetting a Specified Distance, 107
❑ Piercing Curves Through Surfaces to Create Points, 109
❑ Projecting Points Onto Surfaces or Faces, 112
❑ Creating Curves Between Points, 117
- Creating Curves Through 2 Points, 117
- Creating Curves Through 3 Points, 119
- Creating Curves Through 4 Points, 123
❑ Creating Arced Curves (Arc3Point Method), 128
❑ Creating Chained Curves, 131
❑ Creating Conic Curves, 133
❑ Extracting Curves From Surfaces, 137
- Extracting Curves from Surfaces Using the Parametric Option, 137
- Extracting Curves From Surfaces Using the Edge Option, 142
❑ Creating Fillet Curves, 144
❑ Fitting Curves Through a Set of Points, 148
❑ Creating Curves at Intersections, 150
- Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Surfaces, 150
- Creating Curves at the Intersection of a Plane and a Surface, 154
- Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form, 157
- Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Planes, 158
❑ Manifold Curves Onto a Surface, 160
- Manifold Curves onto a Surface with the 2 Point Option, 160
- Manifold Curves onto a Surface With the N-Points Option, 164
- Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form, 167
❑ Creating Curves Normally Between a Point and a Curve (Normal
Method), 168
❑ Creating Offset Curves, 171
- Creating Constant Offset Curve, 171
- Creating Variable Offset Curve, 173
- Parameterization Control for Variable Offset Curve, 174
❑ Projecting Curves Onto Surfaces, 176
- Project Parameters Subordinate Form, 182
❑ Creating Piecewise Linear Curves, 183
❑ Creating Spline Curves, 185
- Creating Spline Curves with the Loft Spline Option, 185
- Creating Spline Curves with the B-Spline Option, 189
❑ Creating Curves Tangent Between Two Curves (TanCurve Method), 193

❑ Creating Curves Tangent Between Curves and Points
(TanPoint Method), 195
❑ Creating Curves, Surfaces and Solids Through a Vector Length (XYZ
Method), 199
❑ Creating Involute Curves, 203
- Creating Involute Curves with the Angles Option, 203
- Creating Involute Curves with the Radii Option, 206
❑ Revolving Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 208
❑ Creating Orthogonal Curves (2D Normal Method), 214
- Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Input Length Option, 214
- Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Calculate Length Option, 218
❑ Creating 2D Circle Curves, 222
❑ Creating 2D ArcAngle Curves, 226
❑ Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc2Point Method), 229
- Creating Arced Curves with the Center Option, 229
- Creating Arced Curves with the Radius Option, 233
- Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form, 236
❑ Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc3Point Method), 237
❑ Creating Surfaces from Curves, 240
- Creating Surfaces Between 2 Curves, 240
- Creating Surfaces Through 3 Curves (Curve Method), 243
- Creating Surfaces Through 4 Curves (Curve Method), 246
- Creating Surfaces from N Curves (Curve Method), 248
❑ Creating Composite Surfaces, 250
❑ Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces, 255
❑ Creating Surfaces from Edges (Edge Method), 257
❑ Extracting Surfaces, 260
- Extracting Surfaces with the Parametric Option, 260
- Extracting Surfaces with the Face Option, 264
❑ Creating Fillet Surfaces, 266
❑ Matching Adjacent Surfaces, 270
❑ Creating Constant Offset Surface, 272
❑ Creating Ruled Surfaces, 274
❑ Creating Trimmed Surfaces, 278
- Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Surface Option, 280
- Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Planar Option, 281
- Auto Chain Subordinate Form, 282
- Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Composite Option, 284
❑ Creating Surfaces From Vertices (Vertex Method), 287
❑ Extruding Surfaces and Solids, 289
❑ Gliding Surfaces, 294
- Gliding Surfaces with the 1 Director Curve Option, 294
- Gliding Surfaces with the 2 Director Curve Option, 296
❑ Creating Surfaces and Solids Using the Normal Method, 298
❑ Creating Surfaces from a Surface Mesh (Mesh Method), 305
- Created Tessellated Surface from Geometry Form, 306
❑ Creating Midsurfaces, 307
- Creating Midsurfaces with the Automatic Option, 307
- Creating Midsurfaces with the Manual Option, 309
❑ Creating Solid Primitives, 311
- Creating a Solid Block, 311
- Creating Solid Cylinder, 314
- Creating Solid Sphere, 317
- Creating Solid Cone, 320

- Creating Solid Torus, 323
- Solid Boolean operation during primitive creation, 326
❑ Creating Solids from Surfaces (Surface Method), 327
- Creating Solids from Two Surfaces, 327
- Creating Solids from Three Surfaces (Surface Method), 330
- Creating Solids from Four Surfaces (Surface Method), 333
- Creating Solids with the N Surface Option, 336
❑ Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid, 338
❑ Creating a Decomposed Solid, 340
❑ Creating Solids from Faces, 343
❑ Creating Solids from Vertices (Vertex Method), 346
❑ Gliding Solids, 348
■ Creating Coordinate Frames, 350
❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 3Point Method, 350
❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Axis Method, 353
❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Euler Method, 355
❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Normal Method, 358
❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 2 Vector Method, 361
❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the View Vector Method, 362
■ Creating Planes, 363
❑ Creating Planes with the Point-Vector Method, 363
❑ Creating Planes with the Vector Normal Method, 365
❑ Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method, 367
- Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method - Point Option, 367
- Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method-Parametric
Option, 369
❑ Creating Planes with the Plane Normal Method, 371
❑ Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method, 372
- Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Uniform Option, 372
- Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Nonuniform Option, 374
❑ Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method, 375
- Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Point Option, 375
- Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Curve Option, 377
- Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Surface Option, 379
❑ Creating Planes with the Offset Method, 381
❑ Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method, 383
- Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Point Option, 383
- Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Parametric
Option, 385
❑ Creating Planes with the 3 Points Method, 387
■ Creating Vectors, 389
❑ Creating Vectors with the Magnitude Method, 389
❑ Creating Vectors with the Interpolate Method, 391
- Between Two Points, 391
❑ Creating Vectors with the Intersect Method, 393
❑ Creating Vectors with the Normal Method, 395
- Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Plane Option, 395
- Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Surface Option, 397
- Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Element Face Option, 399
❑ Creating Vectors with the Product Method, 402
❑ Creating Vectors with the 2 Point Method, 404

5
Delete Actions ■ Overview of the Geometry Delete Action, 408
■ Deleting Any Geometric Entity, 409
■ Deleting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes or Vectors, 410
■ Deleting Coordinate Frames, 411
6
Edit Actions ■ Overview of the Edit Action Methods, 414
■ Editing Points, 416
❑ Equivalencing Points, 416
■ Editing Curves, 418
❑ Breaking Curves, 418
- Breaking a Curve at a Point, 418
- Breaking a Curve at a Parametric Location, 422
- Breaking a Curve at a Plane Location, 425
❑ Blending a Curve, 426
❑ Disassembling a Chained Curve, 429
❑ Extending Curves, 431
- Extending a Curve With the 1 Curve Option, 431
- Extending a Curve Using the Through Points Type, 436
- Extending a Curve Using the Full Circle Type, 438
- Extending a Curve With the 2 Curve Option, 440
❑ Merging Existing Curves, 443
❑ Refitting Existing Curves, 447
❑ Reversing a Curve, 448
❑ Trimming Curves, 451
- Trimming a Curve With the Point Option, 451
- Trimming a Curve Using the Parametric Option, 454
■ Editing Surfaces, 457
❑ Surface Break Options, 457
- Breaking a Surface With the Curve Option, 457
- Breaking a Surface With the Surface Option, 461
- Breaking a Surface With the Plane Option, 463
- Breaking a Surface With the Point Option, 465
- Breaking a Surface Using the 2 Point Option, 469
- Breaking a Surface With the Parametric Option, 471
❑ Blending Surfaces, 475
❑ Disassembling Trimmed Surfaces, 478
❑ Matching Surface Edges, 481
- Matching Surface Edges with the 2 Surface Option, 481
- Matching Surface Edges with the Surface-Point Option, 484
❑ Extending Surfaces, 486
- Extending Surfaces with the 2 Surface Option, 486
- Extending Surfaces to a Curve, 488
- Extending Surfaces to a Plane, 490
- Extending Surfaces to a Point, 492
- Extending Surfaces to a Surface, 494
- Extending Surfaces with the Percentage Option, 496

- Extending Surfaces with the Fixed Length Option, 498
❑ Refitting Surfaces, 500
❑ Reversing Surfaces, 501
❑ Sewing Surfaces, 503
❑ Trimming Surfaces to an Edge, 505
❑ Adding a Fillet to a Surface, 507
❑ Removing Edges from Surfaces, 508
- Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Option, 508
- Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Length Option, 509
❑ Adding a Hole to Surfaces, 510
- Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Center Point Option, 510
- Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Project Vector Option, 512
- Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Inner Loop Option, 514
❑ Removing a Hole from Trimmed Surfaces, 516
❑ Adding a Vertex to Surfaces, 518
❑ Removing a Vertex from Trimmed Surfaces, 520
■ Editing Solids, 522
❑ Breaking Solids, 522
- Breaking Solids with the Point Option, 522
- Breaking Solids with the Parametric Option, 526
- Breaking Solids with the Curve Option, 531
- Breaking Solids with the Plane Option, 533
- Breaking Solids with the Surface Option, 535
❑ Blending Solids, 538
❑ Disassembling B-rep Solids, 541
❑ Refitting Solids, 543
- Refitting Solids with the To TriCubicNet Option, 543
- Refitting Solids with the To TriParametric Option, 544
- Refitting Solids with the To Parasolid Option, 545
❑ Reversing Solids, 546
❑ Solid Boolean Operation Add, 548
❑ Solid Boolean Operation Subtract, 550
❑ Solid Boolean Operation Intersect, 552
❑ Creating Solid Edge Blends, 554
- Creating Constant Radius Edge Blends from Solid Edges, 554
- Creating Chamfer Edge Blend from Solid Edges, 556
❑ Imprinting Solid on Solid, 558
❑ Solid Shell Operation, 560
■ Editing Features, 562
❑ Suppressing a Feature, 562
❑ Unsuppressing a Feature, 563
❑ Editing Feature Parameters, 564
❑ Feature Parameter Definition, 565
7
Show Actions ■ Overview of the Geometry Show Action Methods, 568
❑ The Show Action Information Form, 569
■ Showing Points, 570
❑ Showing Point Locations, 570
❑ Showing Point Distance, 571

- Showing Point Distance with the Point Option, 571
- Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option, 573
- Showing Point Distance with the Surface Option, 575
- Showing Point Distance with the Plane Option, 577
- Showing Point Distance with the Vector Option, 579
❑ Showing the Nodes on a Point, 581
■ Showing Curves, 582
❑ Showing Curve Attributes, 582
❑ Showing Curve Arc, 583
❑ Showing Curve Angle, 584
❑ Showing Curve Length Range, 586
❑ Showing the Nodes on a Curve, 587
■ Showing Surfaces, 588
❑ Showing Surface Attributes, 588
❑ Showing Surface Area Range, 589
❑ Showing the Nodes on a Surface, 590
❑ Showing Surface Normals, 591
■ Showing Solids, 593
❑ Showing Solid Attributes, 593
■ Showing Coordinate Frames, 594
❑ Showing Coordinate Frame Attributes, 594
■ Showing Planes, 595
❑ Showing Plane Attributes, 595
❑ Showing Plane Angle, 596
❑ Showing Plane Distance, 598
■ Showing Vectors, 599
❑ Showing Vector Attributes, 599
8
Transform Actions ■ Overview of the Transform Methods, 602
■ Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 605
❑ Translating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 605
❑ Rotating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 619
❑ Scaling Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids and Vectors, 629
❑ Mirroring Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 640
❑ Moving Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors by Coordinate
Frame Reference (MCoord Method), 648
❑ Pivoting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 656
❑ Positioning Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 665
❑ Vector Summing (VSum) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 674
❑ Moving and Scaling (MScale) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 683
■ Transforming Coordinate Frames, 690
❑ Translating Coordinate Frames, 690
❑ Rotating Coordinate Frames, 693

9
Verify Actions ■ Verify Action, 698
❑ Verifying Surface Boundaries, 698
❑ Verifying Surfaces for B-reps, 700
- Update Graphics Subordinate Form, 701
❑ Verify - Surface (Duplicates), 702
10
Associate Actions ■ Overview of the Associate Action, 704
❑ Associating Point Object, 705
❑ Associating Curve Object, 707
11
Disassociate
Actions
12
The Renumber
Action...
Renumbering Geo
metry
■ Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods, 710
❑ Disassociating Points, 711
❑ Disassociating Curves, 712
❑ Disassociating Surfaces, 713
■ Introduction, 716
■ Renumber Forms, 717
❑ Renumber Geometry, 718
INDEX ■ MSC.Patran Reference Manual, 719
Part 2: Geometry Modeling

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
■ Overview of Capabilities
■ Concepts and Definitions
■ Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran
■ Building An Optimal Geometry Model

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
1.1 Overview of Capabilities
A powerful and important feature of MSC.Patran is its geometry capabilities. Geometry can be:
• Created.
Directly accessed from an external CAD part file.
Imported from an IGES file or a PATRAN 2 Neutral file.
Complete Accuracy of Original Geometry. MSC.Patran maintains complete accuracy of the
original geometry, regardless of where it came from. The exact mathematical representation of
the geometry (e.g., Arc, Rational B-Spline, B-rep, Parametric Cubic, etc.) is consistently
maintained throughout the modeling process, without any approximations or conversions.
This means different versions of the geometry model are avoided. Only one copy of the
geometry design needs to be maintained by the engineer, whether the geometry is in a separate
CAD part file or IGES file or the geometry is part of the MSC.Patran database.
Below are highlights of the geometry capabilities:
Direct Application of Loads/BCs and Element Properties to Geometry. All loads,
boundary conditions (BC) and element property assignments can be applied directly to the
geometry. When the geometry is meshed with a set of nodes and elements, MSC.Patran will
automatically assign the loads/BC or element property to the appropriate nodes or elements.
Although you can apply the loads/BCs or element properties directly to the finite element mesh,
the advantage of applying them to the geometry is if you remesh the geometry, they remain
associated with the model. Once a new mesh is created, the loads/BC and element properties
are automatically reassigned.
For more information, see Introduction to Functional Assignment Tasks (Ch. 1) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.
Direct Geometry Access. Direct Geometry Access (DGA) is the capability to directly access
(or read) geometry information from an external CAD user file, without the use of an
intermediate translator. Currently, DGA supports the following CAD systems:
EDS/Unigraphics
Pro/ENGINEER by Parametric Technology
CATIA by Dassault Systemes
EUCLID 3 by Matra Datavision
CADDS 5 by Computervision
With DGA, the CAD geometry and its topology that are contained in the CAD user file can be
accessed. Once the geometry is accessed, you can build upon or modify the accessed geometry
in MSC.Patran, mesh the geometry, and assign the loads/BC and the element properties directly
to the geometry.
For more detailed information on DGA, see Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry
(p. 47).
Import and Export of Geometry. There are three file formats available to import or export
geometry:
IGES

PATRAN 2 Neutral File
Express Neutral File
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
In using any of the file formats, MSC.Patran maintains the original mathematical form of the
geometry. (That is, the geometry is not approximated into the parametric cubic form.) This
means the accuracy of the geometry in all three files is maintained.
For more information on the import and export capabilities for IGES, PATRAN 2 Neutral File,
and the Express Neutral File, see Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry (Ch. 2).
MSC.Patran Native Geometry. You can also create geometry in MSC.Patran (“native”
geometry). A large number of methods are available to create, translate, and edit geometry, as
well as methods to verify, delete and show information.
MSC.Patran’s native geometry consists of:
Points
Parametric curves
Bi-parametric surfaces
Tri-parametric solids
Boundary represented (B-rep) solids
All native geometry is fully parameterized both on the outer boundaries and within the interior
(except for B-rep solids which are parameterized only on the outer surfaces).
Fully parameterized geometry means that you can apply varying loads or element properties
directly to the geometric entity. MSC.Patran evaluates the variation at all exterior and interior
locations on the geometric entity.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
1.2 Concepts and Definitions
There are many functions in MSC.Patran that rely on the mathematical representation of the
geometry. These functions are:
Applying a pressure load to a curve, surface or solid.
Creating a field function in parametric space.
Meshing a curve, surface or solid.
Referencing a vertex, edge or face of a curve, surface or solid.
For every curve, surface or solid in a user database, information is stored on its
Parameterization, Topology and Connectivity which is used in various MSC.Patran functions.
The concepts of parameterization, connectivity and topology are easy to understand and they
are important to know when building a geometry and an analysis model.
The following sections will describe each of these concepts and how you can build an optimal
geometry model for analysis.

Parameterization
All MSC.Patran geometry are labeled one of the following:
Point (0-Dimensions)
Curve (1-Dimension)
Surface (2-Dimensions)
Solid (3-Dimensions)
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
Depending on the order of the entity - whether it is a one-dimensional curve, a two-dimensional
surface, or a three-dimensional solid - there is one, two or three parameters labeled ξ1 , ξ2 ,
that are associated with the entity. This concept is called “parameterization”.
ξ 3
Parameterization means the X,Y,Z coordinates of a curve, surface or solid are represented as
functions of variables or parameters. Depending on the dimension of the entity, the X,Y,Z
locations are functions of the parameters ξ1 , ξ2 , and ξ3 .
An analogy to the parameterization of geometry is describing an XY , location as a function of
time, tt. If X = X() t and Y = Y() t , as t changes, X and Y will define a path. Parameterization
of geometry does the same thing - as the parameters ξ1 , ξ2 , and ξ3 change, it defines various
points on the curve, surface and solid.
The following describes how a point, curve, surface and solid are parameterized in MSC.Patran.
Point. A Point in MSC.Patran is a point coordinate location in three-dimensional global XYZ
space.
Since a point has zero-dimensions, it has no associated parameters, therefore, it is not
parameterized.
z
x y
Figure 1-1 Point in MSC.Patran
Curve. A Curve in MSC.Patran is a one-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global XYZ
space. A curve can also be described as a particle moving along a defined path in space.
Another way of defining a curve is, a curve is a mapping function, Φξ ( 1)
, from one-dimensional
parametric space into three-dimensional global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-3.
P
(X,Y,Z)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
A curve has one parametric variable, ξ1 , which is used to describe the location of any given
point, P , along a curve, as shown in Figure 1-2.
V1
Figure 1-2 Curve in MSC.Patran
The parameter, ξ1 , has a range of 0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 , where at ξ1= 0 , P is at endpoint V1and
at
= 1 , P is at endpoint V2.
ξ 1
A straight curve can be defined as:
z
x y
Figure 1-3 Mapping Function Phi for a Curve
Eq. 1-1 of our straight curve can be represented as:
ξ 1
0 ξ1 1
0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1
P
P = ( 1.0 – ξ1 )V1+ ξ1V2 Φ(ξ 1 )
ξ1 V1
Eq. 1-1
Eq. 1-2
The derivative of Φξ ( 1)
in Eq. 1-2, would give us Eq. 1-3 which is the tangent of the straight
curve.
Eq. 1-3
Because the curve is straight, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ1 is a constant value. The tangent, ∂Φ⁄ ∂ξ1, also defines a
vector for the curve, which is the positive direction of .
z
x y
Φξ1 = ( 1.0 – ξ1 )V1+ ξ1V2 ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ1 = V2 – V1
ξ 1
V2
V2

CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
For any given curve, the tangent and positive direction of at any point along the curve can be
found. (The vector, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ1 , usually will not have a length of one.)
Surface. A surface in MSC.Patran is a two-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global
XYZ space.
A surface has two parameters, ξ1 and ξ2 , where at any given point, P, on the surface, P can be
located by and , as shown in Figure 1-4.
ξ 1
ξ 2
V1
z
x y
ξ 1
ξ 2
Figure 1-4 Surface in MSC.Patran
A surface generally has three or four edges. Trimmed surfaces can have more than four edges.
For more information, see Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20).
Similar to a curve, ξ1 and ξ2 for a surface have ranges of 0 ≤ ξ1 ≤1and 0 ≤ ξ2 ≤ 1 . Thus, at
= 0 , ξ2 = 0 , P is at V1and at ξ1 = 1 , ξ2 = 1 , P is at V3.
ξ 1
A surface is represented by a mapping function, Φξ ( 1, ξ2)
, which maps the parametric space into
the global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-5.
(0,1)
ξ 2
ξ 1
(0,0) (1,0)
0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1
0 ≤ ξ2 ≤ 1
(1,1)
Figure 1-5 Mapping Function Phi for a Surface
The first order derivatives of Φξ ( 1, ξ2)
results in two partial derivatives, ∂Φ⁄ ∂ξ1and ∂Φ ⁄
∂ξ2: V4
Φ(ξ 1 ,ξ 2 )
V1
V2
z
x y
ξ 1
P
ξ 1
ξ 2
V4
V2
V3
V3

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ1 = Tξ1 and ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ2 = Tξ2 where Tξ1 is the tangent vector in the ξ1 direction and Tξ2 is the tangent vector in the ξ2 direction.
Eq. 1-4
At any point for a given surface, Tξ1 and Tξ2 which define the tangents and the positive ξ1 and
directions can be determined.
ξ 2
Usually Tξ1 and Tξ2 are not orthonormal, which means they do not have a length of one and
they are not perpendicular to each other.
Solid. A solid in MSC.Patran is a three-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global XYZ
space.
A solid has three parameters, ξ1 , ξ2 , and ξ3 , where at any given point, P, within the solid, P
can be located by ξ1 , ξ2 , and ξ3 , as shown in Figure 1-6.
Note: The above definition applies to tri-parametric solids only. MSC.Patran can also create
or import a B-rep solid, which is parameterized on the outer surface only, and not
within the interior. See B-rep Solid (p. 24) for more information.
z
x y
ξ 3
V5
V1
ξ 1
Figure 1-6 Solid in MSC.Patran
A solid generally has five or six sides or faces. (A B-rep solid can have more than six faces.)
The parameters ξ1 , ξ2 and ξ3 have ranges of 0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 , 0 ≤ ξ2 ≤ 1 , and 0 ≤ ξ3 ≤1. At (0,0,0) P
is at V1 and at (1,1,1), P is at V7.
ξ 2
V6
V2
P
V4
V7
V3

CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
A solid can be represented by a mapping function, Φξ ( 1, ξ2,
ξ3) , which maps the parametric
space into the global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-7.
(0,0,1)
ξ 3
(0,0,0)
ξ 2
(0,1,1)
ξ 1
(1,0,1)
(1,0,0)
0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1
0 ≤ ξ2 ≤ 1
0 ≤ ξ3 ≤ 1
Φ(ξ 1 ,ξ 2 ,ξ 3 )
(1,1,1)
(1,1,0)
Figure 1-7 Mapping Function Phi for a Solid
If we take the first order derivatives of Φξ ( 1, ξ2,
ξ3) , we get three partial derivatives, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ1, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ2 and ∂Φ⁄ ∂ξ3, shown in Eq. 1-5:
∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ1 = Tξ1 , ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ2 = Tξ2 , ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ3 = Tξ3 Eq. 1-5
Where Tξ1 is the tangent vector in the ξ1 direction, Tξ2 is the tangent vector in the ξ2 direction,
and is the tangent vector in the direction.
At any point within a given solid, Tξ1 , Tξ2 and Tξ3 , which define the tangents and positive ξ1 ,
and directions can be determined.
ξ 2
T ξ3
ξ 3
ξ 3
V5
ξ 3
V1
z
x y
ξ 1
ξ 2
V6
V4
V7
V3

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Topology
Topology identifies the kinds of items used to define adjacency relationships between geometric
entities.
Every curve, surface and solid in MSC.Patran has a defined set of topologic entities. You can
reference these entities when you build the geometry or analysis model. Examples of this
include:
Creating a surface between edges of two surfaces.
Meshing an edge or a face of a solid.
Referencing a vertex of a curve, surface or solid to apply a loads/BC.
Topology is invariant through a one-to-one bicontinuous mapping transformation. This means
you can have two curves, surfaces or solids that have different parameterizations, but
topologically, they can be identical.
To illustrate this concept, Figure 1-8 shows three groups of surfaces A-D. Geometrically, they
are different, but topologically they are the same.
Figure 1-8 Topologically Equivalent Surfaces
Topologic Entities: Vertex, Edge, Face, Body. The types of topologic entities found in
MSC.Patran are the following:
Vertex Defines the topologic endpoint of a curve, or a corner of a surface or a solid. A
vertex is separate from a geometric point, although a point can exist on a vertex.
Edge
A
B
C
D
Defines the topologic curve on a surface or a solid. An edge is separate from a
geometric curve, although a curve can exist on an edge.
A
B
D* C
A* B
* Surface A is not connected to Surface D
C
D

ξ 2
V2
V1
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
Vertex, Edge and Face ID Assignments in MSC.Patran. The connectivity for a curve,
surface and solid determines the order in which the internal vertex, edge and face IDs will be
assigned. The location of a geometric entity’s parametric axes defines the point where
assignment of the IDs for the entity’s vertices, edges and faces will begin.
Figure 1-9 and Figure 1-10 show a four sided surface and a six sided solid with the internal
vertex, edge and face IDs displayed. If the connectivity changes, then the IDs of the vertices,
edges and faces will also change.
ED1
Face
Body
Defines the topologic surface of a solid. A face is separate from a geometric surface,
although a surface can exist on a face.
A group of surfaces that forms a closed volume. A body is usually referenced as a Brep
solid or a Volume solid, where only its exterior surfaces are parameterized. See
Solids (p. 24) for more information.
Important: Generally, when modeling in MSC.Patran, you do not need to know the topologic
entities’ internal IDs. When you cursor select a topologic entity, such as an edge of
a surface, the ID will be displayed in the appropriate listbox on the form.
ξ 1
ED2
11
ED4
Figure 1-9 Vertex & Edge Numbering
for a Surface
For example, in Figure 1-9, the edge, ED3, of Surface 11 would be displayed as:
Surface 11.3
The vertex, V4, in Figure 1-9 would be displayed as:
Surface 11.3.1
V4 has a vertex ID of 1 that belongs to edge 3 on surface 11.
The face, F1, of Solid 100 in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as:
Solid 100.1
The edge, ED10, in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as:
Solid 100.1.3
ED3
V3
V4
V6
ED10
V2
ED6
ED2
F4
F1
ED1
ED5
V7
ξ 2
ED11
F6
V3
F5
100
F2
ED3
V5 F3
ED9
V1
ξ 3
ED7
ξ 1
ED8
ED4
Figure 1-10 Face Numbering for a Solid
V8
ED12
V4

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
ED10 has an edge ID of 3 that belongs to face 1 on solid 100.
The vertex, V6, in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as:
Solid 100.1.2.2
V6 has a vertex ID of 2 that belongs to edge 2 on face 1 on solid 100.
Topological Congruency and Meshing
When meshing adjacent surfaces or solids, MSC.Patran requires the geometry be topologically
congruent so that coincident nodes will be created along the common boundaries.
Figure 1-11 shows an example where surfaces 1 through 3 are topologically incongruent and
surfaces 2 through 5 are topologically congruent. The outer vertices are shared for surfaces 1
through 3, but the inside edges are not. Surfaces 2 through 5 all have common edges, as well as
common vertices.
There are several ways to correct surfaces 1 through 3 to make them congruent. See Building a
Congruent Model (p. 31) for more information.
1
3
2
Topologically Incongruent Topologically Congruent
Figure 1-11 Topologically Incongruent and Congruent Surfaces
For a group of surfaces or solids to be congruent, the adjacent surfaces or solids must share
common edges, as well as common vertices.
(MSC.Software Corporation’s MSC.Patran software product required adjacent surfaces or solids
to share only the common vertices to be considered topologically congruent for meshing.)
4
5
3
2

CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
Gaps Between Adjacent Surfaces. Another type of topological incongruence is shown in
Figure 1-12. It shows a gap between two pairs of surfaces that is greater than the Global Model
Tolerance. This means when you mesh the surface pairs, coincident nodes will not be created
along both sides of the gap.
Incongruent Surfaces
Figure 1-12 Topologically Incongruent Surfaces with a Gap
MSC recommends two methods for closing surface gaps:
Gap > Global Model
Tolerance
Vertices are Shared, Edges are Not
Use the Create/Surface/Match form. See Matching Adjacent Surfaces (p. 270).
Use the Edit/Surface/Edge Match form. See Matching Surface Edges (p. 481).
For more information on meshing, see Introduction to Functional Assignment Tasks (Ch. 1)
in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.
Non-manifold Topology. Non-manifold topology can be simply defined as a geometry that is
non-manufacturable. However, in analysis, non-manifold topology is sometimes either
necessary or desirable. Figure 1-13 shows a surface model with a non-manifold edge.
Figure 1-13 Non-manifold Topology at an Edge

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
This case may be perfectly fine. A non-manifold edge has more than two surfaces or solid faces
connected to it. Therefore, two solids which share a common face also give non-manifold
geometry (both the common face and its edges are non-manifold).
In general, non-manifold topology is acceptable in MSC.Patran. The exception is in the creation
of a B-rep solid where a non-manifold edge is not allowed. The Verifying Surface Boundaries
(p. 698) option detects non-manifold edges as well as free edges.

Connectivity
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
In Figure 1-2, Figure 1-4, and Figure 1-6 in Parameterization (p. 5), the axes for the
parameters, ξ1 , ξ2 , and ξ3 , have a unique orientation and location on the curve, surface and
solid.
Depending on the orientation and location of the ξ1 , ξ2 , and ξ3 axes, this defines a unique
connectivity for the curve, surface or solid.
For example, although the following two curves are identical, the connectivity is different for
each curve (note that the vertex IDs are reversed):
V1
Figure 1-14 Connectivity Possibilities for a Curve
For a four sided surface, there are a total of eight possible connectivity definitions. Two possible
connectivities are shown in Figure 1-15. (Again, notice that the vertex and edge IDs are different
for each surface.)
V1
ξ 1
ED4
ED1
ξ 1
ξ 2
V4
V2
ED3
ED2
V3
V2
Figure 1-15 Two Possible Connectivities for a Surface
V2
V2
ED2
ED1
V1
V3
ξ 2 ξ 1
ED4
ED3
V4
V1
ξ 1

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
For a tri-parametric solid with six faces, there are a total of 24 possible connectivity definitions
in MSC.Patran - three orientations at each of the eight vertices. Two possible connectivities are
shown in Figure 1-16.
ξ 3
V5
V1
ξ 1
ξ 2
V6
V2
V8
V4
V7
V3
Figure 1-16 Two Possible Connectivities for a Solid
Plotting the Parametric Axes. MSC.Patran can plot the location and orientation of the
parametric axes for the geometric entities by turning on the Parametric Direction toggle on the
Geometric Properties form, under the Display/Display Properties/Geometric menu. See
Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions for
more information.
Modifying the Connectivity. For most geometric entities, you can modify the connectivity by
altering the orientation and/or location of the parametric axes by using the Geometry
application’s Edit action’s Reverse method. See Overview of the Edit Action Methods (p. 414).
For solids, you can also control the location of the parametric origin under the
Preferences/Geometry menu and choose either the MSC.Patran Convention button or the
PATRAN 2.5 Convention button for the Solid Origin Location.
V5
V1
V6
V2
V8
V4
ξ 1
ξ 2
ξ 3
V3

Effects of Parameterization, Connectivity and Topology in
MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
The geometry’s parameterization and connectivity affect the geometry and finite element
analysis model in the following ways:
Defines Order of Internal Topologic IDs. The parameterization and connectivity for a curve,
surface or solid define the order of the internal IDs of their topologic entities. MSC.Patran stores
these IDs internally and displays them when you cursor select a vertex, edge or face. See Vertex,
Edge and Face ID Assignments in MSC.Patran (p. 11) for more information.
Defines Positive Surface Normals. Using right hand rule by crossing a surface’s ξ1 direction
with its ξ2 direction, it defines the surface’s positive normal direction ( ξ3 direction). This affects
many areas of geometry and finite element creation, including creating B-rep solids. See
Building An Optimal Geometry Model (p. 30) for more information.
Defines Positive Pressure Load Directions. The parameterization and connectivity of a
curve, surface or solid define the positive direction for a pressure load, and it defines the
surface’s top and bottom locations for an element variable pressure load. See Create Structural
LBCs Sets (p. 19) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments for more
information.
Helps Define Parametric Field Functions. If you reference a field function that was defined
in parametric space, when creating a varying loads/BC or a varying element or material
property, the loads/BC values or the property values will depend on the geometry’s
parameterization and the orientation of the parametric axes. See Fields Forms (p. 144) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments for more information.
Defines Node and Element ID Order For IsoMesh. The MSC.Patran mapped mesher,
IsoMesh, will use the geometric entity’s parameterization and connectivity to define the order of
the node and element IDs and the element connectivity. (The parameterization and connectivity
will not be used if the mesh will have a transition or change in the number of elements within
the surface or solid.) See IsoMesh (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite
Element Modeling for more information.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry
MSC.Patran uses the Global Model Tolerance when it imports or accesses geometry, when it
creates geometry, or when it modifies existing geometry.
The Global Model Tolerance is found under the Preferences/Global menu. The default value is
0.005.
When creating geometry, if two points are within a distance of the Global Model Tolerance, then
MSC.Patran will only create the first point and not the second.
This rule also applies to curves, surfaces and solids. If the points that describe two curves,
surfaces or solids are within a distance of the Global Model Tolerance, then only the first curve,
surface or solid will be created, and not the second.
Important: For models with dimensions which vary significantly from 10 units, MSC
recommends you set the Global Model Tolerance to .05% of the maximum model
dimension.
For more information on the Global Model Tolerance, see (p. 57) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1.3 Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran
Generally, there are four types of geometry objects in MSC.Patran: 1
Point (default color is cyan)
Parametric Curve (default color is yellow)
Bi-Parametric Surface (default color is green)
Tri-Parametric Solid (default color is dark blue)
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
MSC.Patran also can access, import, and create Trimmed Surfaces, B-rep Solids and Volume
Solids. See Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20) and Solids (p. 24) for more information.
You also can create parametric cubic curves, surfaces and solids, which are recognized by the
PATRAN 2 neutral file. See Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) for more information.
For more information on the types of geometry that can be created, see Matrix of Geometry
Types Created (p. 27).
1 The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on
the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Trimmed Surfaces
Trimmed surfaces are a special class of bi-parametric surfaces. Trimmed surfaces can be
accessed from an external CAD user file; they can be imported from an IGES or Express Neutral
file; and they can be created in MSC.Patran.
Unlike other types of bi-parametric surfaces, trimmed surfaces can have more than four edges,
and they can have one or more interior holes or cutouts.
Also, trimmed surfaces have an associated parent surface that is not displayed. A trimmed
surface is defined by identifying the closed active and inactive regions of the parent surface. This
parent surface defines the parameterization and curvature of the trimmed surface.
You can create three types of trimmed surfaces in MSC.Patran: 1
General Trimmed Surface (default color is magenta)
Simply Trimmed Surface (default color is green)
Composite Trimmed Surface (default is magenta)
Ordinary Composite Trimmed Surface (default color is green)
(Green is the default color for both a simply trimmed surface and a general, bi-parametric
surface.)
Important: Simply trimmed surfaces and ordinary composite trimmed surfaces can be
meshed with IsoMesh or Paver. General trimmed surfaces and composite
trimmed surfaces can only be meshed with Paver. See Meshing Surfaces with
IsoMesh or Paver (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite
Element Modeling for more information. Also note that some geometric operations
are not currently possible with a general trimmed surface, e.g., a general trimmed
surface can not be used to create a triparametric solid.
General Trimmed Surface. A general trimmed surface can have any number of outer edges
and any number of inner edges which describe holes or cutouts. These outer and inner edges are
defined by a closed loop of chained curves. (Chained curves can be created with the
Create/Curve/Chain form. See Creating Chained Curves (p. 131).) An example is shown in
Figure 1-17.
All general trimmed surfaces, whether they are accessed, imported or created, have a default
color of magenta. 2
1The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on
the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.
2The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on
the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

Inner Edges or
Holes
Outer Surface Edges
Figure 1-17 General Trimmed Surface
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
Simply Trimmed Surface. A simply trimmed surface can only have four outer edges. It cannot
have any inner edges, or holes or cutouts. A simply trimmed surface reparametrizes the
bounded region of the parent and is called an overparametrization. An example is shown in
Figure 1-18. (A simply trimmed surface can have three sides, with one of the four edges
degenerating to a zero length edge.)
Like a general trimmed surface, a simply trimmed surface’s outer edges are defined by a closed
loop of chained curves. See Creating Chained Curves (p. 131).
All simply trimmed surfaces, whether they are accessed, imported or created, have a default
color of green. 1
1 The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on
the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Four Outer Edges
Underlying Invisible Parent Surface
Figure 1-18 Simply Trimmed Surface
Sometimes a three of four sided region which define a trimmed surface will be created as a
general trimmed surface instead. This occurs when the overparametrization distorts the
bounded region of the parent to such an extent that it would be difficult to mesh and use for
analysis.
Composite Trimmed Surface. The composite trimmed surface is a kind of supervisor surface
that allows a collection of surfaces to be considered as one surface defined within a specific
boundary. This surface can also have holes in it. Evaluations on the composite trimmed surface
is similar to evaluations on the MSC.Patran trim surface (General Trimmed Surface). The big
difference is that it is three to five times slower than ordinary surfaces.
The composite trimmed surface should be considered a tool. Once the surface is built, it is a
single entity, yet processes on multiple surfaces, relieving the applications of the task of
determining where and when to move from one surface to another.
APPLICATION: The composite trimmed surface supervisor is a bounded PLANAR trim surface.
It acquires its name from the type of service it performs. Let us, for a moment, consider the
composite trimmed surface to be a cloud in the sky. The sun, being the light source behind the
cloud, creating a shadow on planet earth only in the area blocked by the cloud. The same is true
with the composite trimmed surface, except a view vector is given to determine the light
direction. “Under Surfaces” replace planet earth. The valid region on the “Under Surfaces” is
defined by where the outline of the composite trimmed surface appears.

CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
STEPS_BUILDING: There are three basic steps in building a composite trimmed surface.
Step 1 Creating the outer perimeter curve. In most cases this is a MSC.Patran curve
chain entity.
Step 2 Selecting an acceptable view direction for the view vector and planar
Composite trimmed surface entity. The view vector is the most important
aspect of building a composite trimmed surface. The resulting view vector
must yield only one intersection solution at any position on the “Under
Surfaces”. The user must select the proper view for the location of the
composite trimmed surface with some forethought and eliminate the
possibility of any of the underlying surfaces wrapping around in back of one
another. In some cases this may not be possible! The user must then create
more than one composite trimmed surface.
Additionally, since the composite trimmed surface supervisor is PLANAR, it
cannot encompass more than a 180 degree field of view. An example of this
would be a cylindrically shaped group of surfaces. It would probably take
three properly placed composite trimmed surface to represent it; one for every
120 degrees of rotation.
Step 3 Determines which currently displayed surfaces will be become part of the
composite trimmed surface domain (“Under Surfaces”). The user may
individually select the correct underlying surfaces or, if wanting to select all
visible surfaces, the user must place into “ERASE” all surfaces which might
cause multiple intersections and then select the remaining visible surfaces.
RULES:
1. The composite trimmed surface domain must not encompass any dead space. If any
portion has a vacancy (no “Under Surface” under it), unpredictable results will occur.
2. Processing along the view vector must yield a single intersection solution at any
position on the underlying surfaces within the composite trimmed surface’s domain.
Ordinary Composite Trimmed Surface. The only difference between an Ordinary Composite
Trimmed Surface and the Composite Trimmed Surface is that this type will have only four edges
comprising the outer loop and no inner loops.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solids
There are three types of solids that can be accessed or imported, or created in MSC.Patran: 1
Tri-Parametric Solid (default color is dark blue)
B-rep Solid (default color is white)
Volume Solid (default color is pink or light red)
on (p. 2) lists the types of solids created with each Geometry Application method.
Tri-Parametric Solid. All solids in MSC.Patran, except for B-rep solids and volume solids, are
tri-parametric solids. Tri-parametric solids are parameterized on the surface, as well as inside
the solid. Tri-parametric solids can only have four to six faces with no interior voids or holes.
Tri-parametric solids can be meshed with IsoMesh or TetMesh.
Important: IsoMesh will create hexagonal elements if the solid has five or six faces, but some
wedge elements will be created for the five faced solid. IsoMesh will create a
tetrahedron mesh for a four faced solid. See Meshing Solids (p. 17) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling.
B-rep Solid. A B-rep solid is formed from a group of topologically congruent surfaces that
define a completely closed volume. Only its outer surfaces or faces are parameterized and not
the interior. An example is shown in Figure 1-19.
The group of surfaces that define the B-rep solid are its shell. A B-rep shell defines the exterior
of the solid, as well as any interior voids or holes. Shells can be composed of bi-parametric
surfaces and/or trimmed surfaces.
B-rep solids can be created with the Create/Solid/B-rep form. See Creating a Boundary
Representation (B-rep) Solid (p. 338) on using the form.
Figure 1-19 B-rep Solid in MSC.Patran
B-rep solids are meshed with TetMesh. See Meshing Solids (p. 17) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling for more information.
1 The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on
the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

Parametric Cubic Geometry
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
Parametric cubic geometry is a special class of parameterized geometry. Parametric cubic
geometry is supported in MSC.Patran by the PATRAN 2 neutral file and the IGES file for import
and export.
You have the option to create parametric cubic curves, bi-parametric cubic surfaces and triparametric
cubic solids, by pressing the PATRAN 2 Convention button found on most
Geometry application forms.
Important: Unless you intend to export the geometry using the PATRAN 2 neutral file, in
most situations, you do not need to press the PATRAN 2 Convention button to
create parametric cubic geometry.
Parametric cubic geometry can also be created in MSC.Patran, which are referred to as “grids”,
“lines”, “patches” and “hyperpatches.”
Parametric cubic geometry is defined by a parametric cubic equation. For example, a parametric
cubic curve is represented by the following cubic equation:
Z( ξ1 ) = S1ξ 1 + S2ξ 1 + S3ξ 1 +
Eq. 1-6
where Z( ξ1) represents the general coordinate of the global coordinates X,Y, and Z; S1 , S2 , S3 ,
and S4 are arbitrary constants; and ξ1 is a parameter in the range of 0 ≤ ξ1 ≤1.
For more information on parametric cubic geometry, see MSC.Patran Reference Manual.
Limitations on Parametric Cubic Geometry
There are some limitations on parametric cubic geometry.
Limits on Types of Curvature. There are limits to the types of curvature or shapes that are
allowed for a parametric cubic curve, surface or solid (see Figure 1-20).
Eq. 1-7 and Eq. 1-8 below represent the first and second derivatives of Eq. 1-6:
3
Z′ ( ξ1) = 3S1 ξ1 + 2S 2ξ1 + S3 Z″ ( ξ1) = 6S1 ξ1 + 2S2 2
Eq. 1-7
Eq. 1-8
Eq. 1-7 shows that a parametric cubic curve can only have two points with zero slope and Eq. 1-
8 shows that it can only have one point of inflection, as shown in Figure 1-20.
YES YES YES YES
YES
NO NO
Figure 1-20 Limitations of the Parametric Cubic Curvature
2
S 4
NO

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Limits on Accuracy of Subtended Arcs. When you subtend an arc using a parametric cubic
curve, surface or solid, the difference between the true arc radius and the arc radius calculated
by the parametric cubic equation will increase. That is, as the angle of a subtended arc for a
parametric cubic entity increases, the accuracy of the entity from the true representation of the
arc decreases.
Figure 1-21 shows that as the subtended angle of a parametric cubic entity increases, the percent
error also increases substantially beyond 75 degrees.
When creating arcs with parametric cubic geometry, MSC recommends using Figure 1-21 to
determine the maximum arc length and its percent error that is acceptable to you.
For example, if you create an arc length of 90 degrees, it will have an error of 0.0275% from the
true arc length.
For most geometry models, MSC recommends arc lengths represented by parametric cubic
geometry should be 90 degrees or less. For a more accurate model, the parametric cubic arc
lengths should be 30 degrees or less.
Percent Error = 100*(Computed Radius - Actual Arc Radius) / Actual Radius
3.0
Percent Error in the Radius (x 10 -2 )
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0 15 30 45 60 75 90
Total Subtended Angle in Degrees
Figure 1-21 Maximum Percent Error for Parametric Cubic Arc

Matrix of Geometry Types Created
All Geometry Application forms use the following Object menu terms:
Point
Curve
Surface
Solid
Plane
Vector
Coordinate Frame
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
MSC.Patran will create a specific geometric type of the parametric curve, bi-parametric surface
and tri-parametric solid based on the method used for the Create action or Edit action.
Table 1-1, and list the types of geometry created for each Create or Edit action method. The
tables also list if each method can create parametric cubic curves, surfaces or solids by pressing
the PATRAN 2 Convention button on the application form. (Parametric cubic geometry is
recognized by the PATRAN 2 neutral file for export.)
For more information on each Create or Edit action method, see Overview of Geometry Create
Action (p. 70) and/or Overview of the Edit Action Methods (p. 414).
Table 1-1 Types of Curves Created in MSC.Patran
Create or Edit Method Type of Curve
PATRAN 2
Convention?
(Parametric Cubic)
XYZ Parametric Cubic Not Applicable
Arc3Point Arc Yes
2D Arc2Point Arc Yes
2D Arc3Point Arc Yes
2D Circle Circle Yes
Conic Parametric Cubic N/A
Extract Curve On Surface Yes
Fillet Parametric Cubic N/A
Fit Parametric Cubic N/A
Intersect PieceWise Cubic Polynomial Yes
Involute Parametric Cubic N/A
Normal Parametric Cubic N/A
2D Normal Parametric Cubic N/A
2D ArcAngles Arc Yes
Point Parametric Cubic N/A

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Table 1-1 Types of Curves Created in MSC.Patran (continued)
Create or Edit Method Type of Curve
Project Curve On Surface Yes
PWL Parametric Cubic N/A
Revolve Arc Yes
Spline, Loft Spline option PieceWise Cubic Polynomial Yes
Spline, B-Spline option PieceWise Rational Polynomial Yes
Spline, B-Spline option NURB* Yes
TanCurve Parametric Cubic N/A
TanPoint Parametric Cubic N/A
Chain Composite Curve No
Manifold Curve On Surface Yes
* NURB splines are created if the NURBS Accelerator toggle is pressed OFF (default is
ON) on the Geometry Preferences form, found under the Preferences/Geometry menu.
This is true whether you create the spline in MSC.Patran or if you import the spline from
an IGES file. See Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 2: Basic Functions for more information. If the NURBS Accelerator is ON, PieceWise
Rational Polynomial splines will be created instead.
Table 1-2 Types of Surfaces Created in MSC.Patran
Create or Edit Method Type of Surface
PATRAN 2
Convention?
(Parametric Cubic)
XYZ Parametric Bi-Cubic Not Applicable
Curve Curve Interpolating Surface Yes
Decompose Trimmed Surface Yes
Edge Generalized Coons Surface Yes
Extract Surface On Solid Yes
Extrude Extruded Surface Yes
Fillet Parametric Bi-Cubic N/A
Glide Parametric Bi-Cubic N/A
Match Parametric Bi-Cubic N/A
Normal Sweep Normal Surface N/A
Revolve Surface of Revolution Yes
PATRAN 2
Convention?
(Parametric Cubic)

Table 1-2 Types of Surfaces Created in MSC.Patran (continued)
Create or Edit Method Type of Surface
Ruled Ruled Surface No
Vertex Curve Interpolating Surface Yes
Trimmed (Surface Option) Trimmed Surface No
Trimmed (Planar Option) Trimmed Surface No
Trimmed (Composite
Option)
Composite Trimmed Surface No
Table 1-3 Types of Solids Created in MSC.Patran
Create or Edit Method Type of Solid
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
PATRAN 2
Convention?
(Parametric Cubic)
XYZ Parametric Tri-Cubic Not Applicable
Extrude Extruded Solid Yes
Face Solid 5Face, Solid 6Face Yes
Glide Glide Solid Yes
Normal Sweep Normal Solid Yes
Revolve Solid of Revolution Yes
Surface Surface Interpolating Solid Yes
Vertex Parametric Tri-Cubic N/A
B-rep Ordinary Body No
Decompose Tri-Parametric Yes
PATRAN 2
Convention?
(Parametric Cubic)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
1.4 Building An Optimal Geometry Model
A well defined geometry model simplifies the building of the optimal finite element analysis
model. A poorly defined geometry model complicates, or in some situations, makes it
impossible to build or complete the analysis model.
In computer aided engineering (CAE) analysis, most geometry models do not consist of neatly
trimmed, planar surfaces or solids. In some situations, you may need to modify the geometry to
build a congruent model, create a set of degenerate surfaces or solids, or decompose a trimmed
surface or B-rep solid.
The following sections will explain how to:
Build a congruent model.
Verify and align surface normals.
Build trimmed surfaces.
Decompose trimmed surfaces into three- or four-sided surfaces.
Build a B-rep solid.
Build degenerate surfaces or solids.

Building a Congruent Model
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
MSC.Patran requires adjacent surfaces or solids be topologically congruent so that the nodes will
be coincident at the common boundaries. See Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12)
for more information.
For example, Figure 1-22 shows surfaces 1, 2 and 3 which are incongruent. When meshing with
Isomesh or Paver, MSC.Patran cannot guarantee the nodes will coincide at the edges shared by
surfaces 1, 2 and 3.
Figure 1-22 Incongruent Set of Surfaces
To make the surfaces in Figure 1-22 congruent, you can:
1
Use the Edit/Surface/Edge Match form with the Surface-Point option. See Matching
Surface Edges (p. 481) on using the form.
Or, break surface 1 with the Edit/Surface/Break form. See Surface Break Options
(p. 457) on using the form.
The following describes the method of using the Edit/Surface/Break form.
To make surfaces 1 through 3 congruent, we will break surface 1 into surfaces 4 and 5, as shown
in Figure 1-23:
4
5
3
3
2
2

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Figure 1-23 Congruent Set of Surfaces
The entries for the Edit/Surface/Break form are shown below:
◆ Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Break
Option: Point
Delete Original Surfaces
Since Auto Execute is ON, we do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Figure 1-24 Cursor Locations for Surface Break
Pressing this button will delete surface 1,
after the break.
Surface List: Surface 1 Cursor select or enter the ID for surface 1.
Break Point List Point 10 Cursor select or enter the ID for point 10,
as shown in Figure 1-24.
Cursor select
Surface 1 for the
Surface List on
the form.
1
10
3
2
Cursor select Point
10 for the Point List
on the form.

Building Optimal Surfaces
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
Building optimal surfaces will save time and it will result in a better idealized finite element
analysis model of the design or mechanical part.
Optimal surfaces consist of a good overall shape with no sharp corners, and whose normal is
aligned in the same direction with the other surfaces in the model.
Avoid ing Sharp Corners. In general, MSC.Software Corporation (MSC) recommends that
you avoid sharp inside corners when creating surfaces. That is, you should generally try to keep
the inside corners of the surfaces to 45 degrees or more.
The reason is that when you mesh surfaces with quadrilateral elements, the shapes of the
elements are determined by the overall shape of the surface, see Figure 1-25. The more skewed
the quadrilateral elements are, the less reasonable your analysis results might be.
Note: You can use the surface display lines to predict what the surface element shapes will
look like before meshing. You can increase or decrease the number of display lines
under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric. See Geometric Attributes
(p. 257) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
For further recommendations, please consult the vendor documentation for your finite element
analysis code.
4
1
Surfaces With Sharp Corners
3
2
Figure 1-25 Surfaces With and Without Sharp Corners
4
1
3
2
Optimal Surface Shapes

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Verifying and Aligning Surface Normals Using Edit/Surface/Reverse. MSC.Patran can
determine the positive normal direction for each surface by using right hand rule and crossing
the parametric ξ1 and ξ2 axes of a surface. Depending on the surface’s connectivity, each
surface could have different normal directions, as shown in Figure 1-26.
ξ 1
ξ 2
Figure 1-26 Opposing Normals for Two Surfaces
Important: In general, you should try to maintain the same normal direction for all surfaces
in a model.
The normal direction of a surface affects finite element applications, such defining the positive
pressure load direction, the top and bottom surface locations for a variable pressure load, and
the element connectivity.
Use the Edit/Surface/Reverse form to display the surface normal vectors, and to reverse or align
the normals for a group of surfaces. See Reversing Surfaces (p. 501) on using the form.
ξ 2
ξ 1

CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
Example of Verifying and Aligning Surface Normals. For example, Figure 1-27 shows a
group of eight surfaces that we want to display the normal vectors, and if necessary, reverse or
align the normals. To display the surface normals without reversing, do the following:
◆ Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Reverse
Surface List Surface 1:8 Make sure you turn Auto Execute OFF
Draw Normal Vectors
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Figure 1-27 Group of Surfaces to Verify Normals
You should see red arrows drawn on each surface which represent the surface normal vectors,
as shown in Figure 1-28.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Figure 1-28 Surface Normal Vectors
before cursor selecting surfaces 1-8.
And do not press Apply. Apply will
reverse the normals.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Align the normals by reversing the normals for surfaces 1 through 4:
Surface List Surface 1:4
-Apply-
Draw Normal Vectors
Figure 1-29 shows the updated normal directions which are now aligned.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Figure 1-29 Aligned Surface Normal Vectors
This will plot the updated normal vector
directions.

Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
Trimmed surfaces are preferred for modeling a complex part with many sides. However, there
may be areas in your model where you may want to decompose, or break, a trimmed surface
into a series of three or four sided surfaces.
One reason is that you want to mesh the surface area with IsoMesh instead of Paver. (IsoMesh
can only mesh surfaces that have three or four edges.) Another reason is that you want to create
tri-parametric solids from the decomposed three or four sided surfaces and mesh with IsoMesh.
To decompose a trimmed surface, use the Geometry application’s Create/Surface/Decompose
form. See Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces (p. 255) on using the form.
When entered in the Create/Surface/Decompose form, the select menu that appears at the
bottom of the screen will show the following icons:
Point/Vertex/Edge Point/Interior Point. This will select a point for decomposing in
the order listed. If not point or vertex is found, the point closest to edge will be used
or a point will be projected onto the surface.
Use cursor select or directly input an existing point on the surface. If point is not on
the surface, it will be projected onto the surface.
Use to cursor select a point location on an edge of a trimmed surface.
Use to cursor select a point location inside a trimmed surface.
Use to cursor select a vertex of a trimmed surface.
Example. Figure 1-30 shows trimmed surface 4 with seven edges. We will decompose surface
4 into four four-sided surfaces.
24
23
26
20
25
Figure 1-30 Trimmed Surface to be Decomposed
3
22
21

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Our first decomposed surface will be surface 3, as shown in Figure 1-31. The figure shows
surface 3 cursor defined by three vertex locations and one point location along an edge. The
point locations can be selected in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.
Use
to cursor select
these three
vertices.
Figure 1-31 Point Locations for Decomposed Surface 4
Figure 1-32 shows the remaining decomposed surfaces 5, 6 and 7 and the select menu icons
used to cursor define the surfaces. Again, the point locations can be selected in a clockwise or
counterclockwise direction.
Use
to cursor select these
three vertices for
Surface 5.
Use
to cursor select these
three vertices for
Surface 6.
6
4
5
4
7
Use
to cursor select this
point along the edge
for Surface 6.
Use
to cursor select
this point
location along
the edge.
Use
to cursor select this
point along the edge
for Surface 5.
Use
to cursor select these
four vertices for
Surface 7.

Figure 1-32 Point Locations for Decomposed Surfaces 5, 6 and 7
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
Use Surface Display Lines as a Guide. Generally, the surface display lines are a good guide
to where the trimmed surface can be decomposed. MSC recommends increasing the display
lines to four or more. The display lines are controlled under the menus Display/Display
Properties/Geometric. See Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 2: Basic Functions for more information.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Building B-rep Solids
Boundary represented (B-rep) solids are created by using the Geometry application’s
Create/Solid/B-rep form. See Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid (p. 338) for
more information on the form.
There are three rules to follow when you create a B-rep solid in MSC.Patran:
1. The group of surfaces that will define the B-rep solid must fully enclose a volume.
2. The surfaces must be topologically congruent. That is, the adjacent surfaces must share
a common edge.
3. The normal surface directions for the exterior shell must all point outward, as shown
in Figure 1-33. That is, the normals must point away from the material of the body.
This will be done automatically during creation as long as rules 1 and 26 are satisfied.
B-rep solids created in MSC.Patran can only be meshed with TetMesh.
Important: At this time, MSC.Patran can only create a B-rep solid with an exterior shell, and
no interior shells.
3
Y Z
X
2
4
8
7
1
Figure 1-33 Surface Normals for B-rep Solid
1
5
9
6
10

Building Degenerate Surfaces and Solids
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
A bi-parametric surface can degenerate from four edges to three edges. A tri-parametric solid
can degenerate from six faces to four or five faces (a tetrahedron or a wedge, respectively).
The following describes the best procedures for creating a degenerate triangular surface and a
degenerate tetrahedron and a wedge shaped solid.
Important: IsoMesh will create hexahedron elements only, if the solid has six faces. Some
wedge elements will be created for a solid with five faces. IsoMesh will create
tetrahedron elements only, for a solid with four faces. TetMesh will create
tetrahedron elements only, for all shaped solids.
Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle). There are two ways you can create a degenerate,
three-sided surface:
Use the Create/Surface/Edge form with the 3 Edge option. See Creating Surfaces
from Edges (Edge Method) (p. 257) on using the form.
Or, use the Create/Surface/Curve form with the 2 Curve option. See Creating
Surfaces Between 2 Curves (p. 240) on using the form.
Figure 1-34 illustrates the method of using the Create/Surface/Curve form with the 2 Curve
option. Notice that the apex of the surface is defined by a zero length curve by using the Curve
select menu icon shown in Figure 1-34.
Cursor select this
edge or curve for the
Starting or Ending
Curve List.
Figure 1-34 Creating a Degenerate Surface Using Create/Surface/Curve
Building a Degenerate Solid
Cursor select this point twice
using this icon:
in the Curve select menu for the
Starting or Ending Curve List.
Four Sided Solid (Tetrahedron). A four sided (tetrahedron) solid can be created by using the
Create/Solid/Surface form with the 2 Surface option, where the starting surface is defined by a
point for the apex of the tetrahedron, and the ending surface is an opposing surface or face, as
shown in Figure 1-35.
Five Sided Solid (Pentahedron). A five sided (pentahedron) solid can be created by using:

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
The Create/ Solid/Face form with the 5 Face option. See Creating Solids from Faces
(p. 343) on using the form.
The Create/Solid/Surface form with the 2 Surface option. See Creating Solids from
Surfaces (Surface Method) (p. 327) on using the form.
Figure 1-36 and Figure 1-37 illustrate using the Create/Solid/Surface form to create the
pentahedron and a wedge.
Cursor select this surface or face for the
Ending Surface List.
For the Starting Surface List,
highlight
and
in the select menu, and cursor
select this point twice for the
first edge of the surface.
Highlight again,
then, cursor select this same
point twice again.
Figure 1-35 Creating a Tetrahedron Using Create/Solid/Surface
Cursor select this surface or face for the
Ending Surface List.
For the Starting Surface List,
highlight
and
in the select menu, and cursor
select this point twice for the
first edge of the surface.
Highlight again,
then, cursor select this same
point twice again.
Figure 1-36 Creating a Pentahedron Using Create/Solid/Surface

Cursor select this surface or face for the
Ending Surface List.
highlight
Figure 1-37 Creating a Wedge Using Create/Solid/Surface
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
For the Starting Surface List,
in the select menu, and cursor
select this curve twice.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
2
Accessing, Importing & Exporting
Geometry
■ Overview
■ Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry
■ PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
2.1 Overview
MSC.Patran can access geometry from an external CAD system user file. Geometry can also be
imported (or read) from a PATRAN 2 Neutral file or from an IGES file. MSC.Patran can export
(or write) some or all geometry to an external PATRAN 2 Neutral file or IGES file.
Geometry can be accessed or imported into the user database either by using the File/Import
menus or by using the File/CAD Model Access menus on the MSC.Patran main form. Geometry
can be exported from the database using the File/Export menus.
For more information on executing the File/Import and File/Export forms, see Importing
Models (p. 26) and Export (p. 110) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
For more information on accessing CAD models, see Direct Geometry Access of CAD
Geometry (p. 47).
For more information on import and export support of geometry for the PATRAN 2 Neutral file,
see PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57).
For more information on which IGES entities are supported by MSC.Patran for importing and
exporting, see Supported IGES Entity Types - Import (p. 51) and Supported IGES Entity
Types -Export (p. 116) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.

2.2 Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry
CHAPTER 2
Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry
MSC.Patran can directly access geometry from an external CAD file for the following CAD
systems that are listed in Table 2-1.
This unique Direct Geometry Access (DGA) feature allows you to access the CAD geometry and
its topology that are contained in the CAD file. Once the geometry is accessed, you can build
upon or modify the accessed geometry in MSC.Patran, mesh the geometry, and assign the loads
and boundary conditions as well as the element properties directly to the geometry.
You can execute a specific MSC.Patran CAD Access module by using the File/Importing Models
menus on the main form. See Importing Models (p. 26) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 2: Basic Functions for more information.
For more information on using MSC.Patran ProENGINEER, see Importing Pro/ENGINEER
Files (p. 118) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
For more information on using MSC.Patran Unigraphics, see Importing Unigraphics Files
(p. 128) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Table 2-1 Supported CAD Systems and Their MSC.Patran CAD Access Modules
Supported CAD System
Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran Unigraphics
If MSC.Patran Unigraphics is licensed at your site, you can access the geometric entities from an
external EDS/Unigraphics part file.
Features of MSC.Patran Unigraphics
MSC.Patran CAD Access
Module *
EDS/Unigraphics MSC.Patran Unigraphics
Pro/ENGINEER by Parametric Technology MSC.Patran ProENGINEER
CATIA by Dassault Systemes MSC.Patran CATIA
EUCLID 3 by Matra Datavision MSC.Patran EUCLID 3
CADDS 5 by Computervision MSC.Patran CADDS 5
* Each MSC.Patran CAD Access module must be licensed before you can access the appropriate
external CAD file. You can find out which MSC.Patran products are currently licensed
by pressing the MSC.Software Corporation (MSC) icon on the main form, and
then pressing the License button on the form that appears.
Unigraphics part file can be accessed in MSC.Patran using one of two methods. The
first method is express file based import. The second method is direct parasolid
transmit file based import. In both cases, Unigraphics geometry is imported and stored
in a MSC.Patran database.
MSC.Patran uses the original geometry definitions of the accessed entities, without any
approximations. Parasolid evaluators are directly used for entities imported via the
direct parasolid method.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
CAD Access filters are provided that can be selected based on the defined
EDS/Unigraphics entity types, levels, and layers.
You can automatically create MSC.Patran groups when accessing the geometry based
on the defined entity types, levels, or layers.
For more information on using MSC.Patran Unigraphics, see Importing Unigraphics Files
(p. 128) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Tips For Accessing EDS/Unigraphics Geometry for Express File Based Import
1. When you execute EDS/Unigraphics, make sure the solid to be accessed is
topologically congruent with no gaps (see Figure 2-1). For more information, see
Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12).
Verify that the edges of the solid’s adjacent faces share the same end points or vertices,
and that there are no gaps between the faces.
2. You can improve MSC.Patran Unigraphics’ performance by reducing the number of
entities to be processed by using the Entity Type filter on the MSC.Patran Import form
and unselect or un-highlight all entities of a particular type that you do not want, before
you access the part file. For example, you can unselect the entity type, “Bounded-
Plane”, to eliminate all bounded plane entities. For the direct parasolid import option,
the entity type filter can be used for wire body/sheet body/solid body only.
3. Put those entities in EDS/Unigraphics that you want to access into specific layers. Then
select to only those layers in the MSC.Patran Import form before importing the part.
4. Make sure the MSC.Patran Global Model Tolerance is reset to an appropriate value if
you will be accessing long thin surfaces and solids with small dimensions (default is
0.005). For example, set the tolerance value so that it is smaller than the smallest edge
length (greater than 10.0E-6) in the model. This will improve model usability on some
models.
Face 1 Gap
Face 1
Face 2
NOT Topologically Valid
(lacking congruent edge)
Face 2
Topologically Valid
(with congruent edge)
Zero Gap
Figure 2-1 Topologically Congruent Surfaces for MSC.Patran Unigraphics

CHAPTER 2
Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry
Tips For Accessing Parasolid Geometry. This section provides helpful hints and
recommendations regarding the usage of MSC.Patran as it pertains to Parasolid integration.
Disassembling
Solids
Solid Geometry Guidelines
The Edit/Solid/Disassemble function in the Geometry Application can
be used to create simply trimmed surfaces (green 4-sided) with one
command. This can be a big timesaver if the B-rep Solid is being
disassembled to eventually create tri-parametric solids (blue) for Hex
meshing. This command will convert all 4-sided B-rep Solid faces into
simply trimmed surfaces (green) which then can be used to construct
tri-parametric solids.
Solids Break If difficulties are encountered in breaking a solid:
1. First disassemble the original solid (Edit/Solid/Disassemble).
2. Try to reconstruct a new solid using Create/Solid/B-rep. If
this is unsuccessful due to gaps between surfaces, use the
Edit/Surface/Sew and try again. If a solid is created, continue
with the break operation.
3. If steps (a) and (b) were unsuccessful:
Break the trimmed surfaces from the disassembled solid (step (a)).
If this operation is slow, refit the surfaces (Edit/Surface/Refit)
before the break operation.
Create the additional surfaces in the interior required to enclose
the individual solid volumes.
Create the new individual solids using Create/Solid/B-rep. If the
B-rep can not be created due to surface gaps, use
Edit/Surface/Sew and try again.
Global Model
Tolerance
Solids -
Group Transform
After successful access of Unigraphics geometry via the Parasolid
Direct method, the Global Model Tolerance will be set relative to the
models geometric characteristics. This tolerance is the recommended
tolerance for MSC.Patran applications to use for best results.
Group transform for solids is not supported. For information about
transforming solids in pre-release format, see (p. 50).

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Hybrid
TetMesher -
Global Edge
Lengths
Hybrid
TetMesher -
Mesh Control
Meshing Guidelines
The Hybrid tetmesher only accepts global edge lengths for mesh criteria if
attempting to directly mesh a solid. If you encounter difficulties, decrease
the global edge length.
The Hybrid tetmesher does not write nodes that lie on solid edges into the
mesh seed table. This limits the ability of the Hybrid tetmesher to recognize
existing meshes. For example, if your requirements are: (1) to match
adjacent meshes (i.e., multiple solids); (2) that the mesh be able to recognize
a hard curve/point; or (3) to define mesh seed prior to solid meshing,
follow these steps:
Define any desired hard points/curves and mesh seeds.
Surface mesh the geometry using the paver, creating triangular
elements which completely enclose the desired geometric volume.
Invoke the Hybrid tetmesher, using the previously created triangular
elements as input.
Paver If the paver exhibits difficulties meshing some geometry or making
congruent meshes:
Delete any existing mesh on the problematic geometry.
Perform an Edit/Surface/Refit.
Do an Edit/Surface/Edge Match if congruency is an issue.
Mesh again.

Solids - Group
Transform
Surface
Congruency
Unigraphics Sew
With Verify During
Geometry Access
PRE-RELEASE CAPABILITY: Solid Geometry Guidelines
CHAPTER 2
Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry
Group transform for solids is not supported. If a transformed solid is
required, consider the following alternatives: (1) Perform the
transformation in the native CAD system and then again access the
desired geometry in MSC.Patran; (2) Enable an environment variable
before executing MSC.Patran. At the system prompt, type:
setenv P3_UG_ENTITY_FILTER 1
which allows the transformation of Parasolid solid geometry and perform
the transformation. If a solid is successfully constructed, continue as
planned. If not, either:
Mesh the original solid and transform the resulting finite element
mesh, with the limitation being that element properties and
loads/boundary conditions will have to be assigned directly to the
finite elements; or
Try to reconstruct a B-rep solid from the constituent surfaces that
result from the transformation, by first using Geometry tools such as
Edit/Surface/Sew, Edit/Surface/Edge Match, etc., to reconnect the
surfaces and then use Create/Solid/B-rep.
Initially access the original geometry (Unigraphics only) using the
Express Translation method. If a solid is successfully imported, a
transformation of the geometry is supported.
Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines
Unigraphics does not automatically enforce surface congruency.
Typically, CAE applications require congruent meshes; therefore,
geometric surfaces must usually be congruent. Accessing geometry
through Parasolid simply retrieves the Unigraphics geometry exactly
as it is defined; an explicit action must be taken to sew geometric
surfaces, otherwise they will not be congruent.
It is recommended that models with surfaces be sewn up in
Unigraphics prior to access by MSC.Patran. MSC.Patran offers the
ability to also invoke the Unigraphics surface sew tool; in fact, this is
the default operation when accessing Sheet Bodies.
“Unigraphics Sew” and “Verify Boundary” toggles are, by default, ON
during import. The Verification entails placement of markers at all
incongruent surface edges, thus allowing a user to quickly identify
whether the Unigraphics Sew was completely (or partially) successful.
The markers may be removed using the Broom icon.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Problem
Unigraphics
Entities From
Import
Unigraphics
Model Checks
Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines
MSC.Patran detects three different types of anomalies during
Unigraphics part file import:
a) Suspect939 Entities: Sometimes Unigraphics needs to take special
actions to convert surfaces from earlier version parts. These surfaces
are attributed with “Suspect939.” Although for the most part these
surfaces are usable, Unigraphics recommends that these surfaces be
replaced. As such, MSC.Patran will not attempt to include these
surfaces in the Unigraphics sewing, and we recommend that these
surfaces be refitted once imported into MSC.Patran. You will find
these surfaces in a group named, _UG_SUSPECT.
b) Invalid Entities: Before importing the Unigraphics model,
MSC.Patran will check each surface and curve entities to ensure
consistency and validity. Occasionally, some entities do not pass the
checks. These invalid entities will be excluded from both UG sewing
and MSC.Patran import. If you see such a message in the invoke
window, you should go back to UG to ensure the model is valid. Please
reference the next section, Unigraphics Model Checks (p. 52) for
steps to do this check. One recommended way is to refit/reconstruct
the surface in Unigraphics and then reimport it into MSC.Patran.
If UG sewing is turned on for the MSC.Patran import, there is a chance
that invalid entities are created by the UG sew. These entities will be
brought into MSC.Patran and put into a group named,
_UG_INVALID. As there is no guarantee that entities
in this group will work with any applications, we strongly recommend
you first commit/save the MSC.Patran database and then reconstruct
these bodies if possible.
c) Gap Surfaces: Sometimes surfaces, that are degenerate or are/close
to being zero area, appear in the model. These surfaces are called “gap
surfaces.” If there are any such gap surfaces, they will be in a group
named, _GAP_SURFACE. Please inspect the imported
model and determine if these gap surfaces should be removed from the
model.
Unigraphics provides geometry evaluation tools which are extremely
useful in judging the quality of a model. Here are some
geometry/topology checks Unigraphics can perform and provide
results with any UG part: (1) In Unigraphics V13.0, “Info” is available
at the top menu bar, under Info/Analysis/Examine Geometry. If you
use this on surfaces and any are ill-defined, they will be flagged as
“suspect”. (2) In Unigraphics V13.0, Info is available at the top menu
bar. To run all checks:
Use Info->Analysis->Examine Geometry...
Choose “Set All Checks”, then “OK”.
Choose “Select All” to check the entire model currently selectable.
NOTE: Default Distance tolerance is 0.001 units and Default Angle
tolerance is 0.5 units.

MSC.Patran
Surface Sew
Refitting
Geometry
Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines
CHAPTER 2
Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry
In addition to accessing the Unigraphics surface sew tool, MSC.Patran
offers an additional capability to sew surfaces beyond what
Unigraphics supports (e.g., resolution of T-edges). If the Unigraphics
surface sew does not resolve all incongruences, try using the
MSC.Patran surface sew as well. This capability can be accessed
through Edit/Surface/Sew in the Geometry application. If both the
Unigraphics and MSC.Patran surface sew tools cannot remove all of
the gaps and incongruencies, then two options are available. The first
option is to refit all of the surfaces (Edit/Surface/Refit). Sometimes,
after this operation, these surfaces can be sewn together
(Edit/Surface/Sew).
The other option for sewing the model using MSC.Patran surface
sewing is to increase the global tolerance in MSC.Patran and sew the
model again. Changing the global tolerance in MSC.Patran is generally
not recommended, but in this case may be necessary. The necessity of
increasing the global tolerance is determined by checking the
incongruent edges of the model (Verify/Surface/Boundary) to see if
they share vertices, or by the gap closure operation when gaps cannot
be closed between surface since the edge curves are too far apart. The
tolerance value should be set to a value just larger than the distance
between the vertices to be equivalenced (vertices which should be
shared at the ends of incongruent curves), or just larger than the
“allowable gap closure tolerance” which is issued by the sewing (or
edge match) operation.
(Note that there are cases where sewing will report that gaps exist
which are not really gaps. This is because the operation of checking for
gaps does not necessarily know about the engineering intent of the
model. We suggest that the user check the gaps reported to make sure
that they are gaps. Furthermore, we suggest that the global tolerance
be increased conservatively, e.g., double the tolerance instead of
increasing it by an order of magnitude.)
The technique of refitting geometry has been identified as a potentially
viable method of removing problematic geometry that prevents
subsequent meshing, application of LBC’s, editing, transforming, etc.
Edit/Curve/Refit and Edit/Surface/Refit are available under the
Geometry application. These functions will more regularly
parameterize poorly parameterized geometry (for surfaces, this
typically involves those with compound curvature), which can
currently lead to difficulties in successfully building CAE models.
Congruency and boundary definitions are retained.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Edit/Surface/Refit As previously mentioned, the Edit/Surface/Refit function in the
Geometry application can be used to successfully handle problematic
Sheet Body geometry. The situations where this applies include:
Curves
Coincident With
Surface and Solid
Edges
Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines
Accessing geometry with the Unigraphics Sew option disabled
with subsequent attempts to make the surfaces congruent by
using MSC.Patran’s surface sew, edge match, etc.
Difficulties rendering, meshing, edge matching, disassembling,
transforming, etc.
Surfaces that result from disassembling solid geometry (i.e., for
regioning).
Wire Bodies coincident with Sheet Body and Solid Body edges are not
equivalenced. This is a different behavior from what occurs if the
“Express Translation” method is used. If coincident curves are not
detected by the user, they may, for example, apply a Loads/Boundary
Condition to what they believe is a surface or solid edge, when in fact
they are applying it to a curve. To avoid this situation:
Move all Wire Bodies to a separate group and post only when
required.
If Wire Bodies are accessed, use the new Geometry function
Edit/Point/Equivalence to connect the curve and surface/solid
vertices.
Disable access of Wire Bodies and only access when needed.

Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran ProENGINEER
CHAPTER 2
Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry
If MSC.Patran ProENGINEER is licensed at your site, you can access the geometric entities from
an external Pro/ENGINEER part file.
You can execute MSC.Patran ProENGINEER either from MSC.Patran or from Pro/ENGINEER
by doing one of the following:
Executing MSC.Patran ProENGINEER From MSC.Patran. Execute MSC.Patran
ProENGINEER from MSC.Patran by using the File/Import... menu and make sure the
Pro/ENGINEER button is pressed on the Import form. See Importing Pro/ENGINEER Files
(p. 118) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions for more information.
Executing MSC.Patran ProENGINEER From Pro/ENGINEER
Important: Make sure MSC.Patran ProENGINEER has been properly installed by following
the instructions in Selecting Products (Ch. 3) in the MSC.Patran Installation and
Operations Guide.
Execute MSC.Patran ProENGINEER from Pro/ENGINEER by doing the following:
1. Execute Pro/ENGINEER by entering:
p3_proe
p3_proe will ask for the command name to run Pro/ENGINEER. Press if you
want to accept the default command pro.
Enter the command name for running Pro/ENGINEER.
[pro]?:
2. Open the Pro/ENGINEER assembly file or part file. Then, select the Pro/ENGINEER
menus in the following order:
File
Export
Model
Patran Geom
The MSC.Patran menu will list four options:
Filter
Run MSC.Patran
Create .db
Create .geo
You can select any one of the above four options.
If Filter is selected:
A menu appears which allows the user to select:
Datum Points
Datum Curves
Datum Surfaces
Datum Planes
Coordinate System Datums
for output to the intermediated .geo file. (Default = no datum entities).

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
If Run MSC.Patran is selected:
A MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be created from the
current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory.
MSC.Patran will automatically be executed and a database will be created and
opened.
The MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file containing the
Pro/ENGINEER geometry will be loaded into the MSC.Patran database, and
both Pro/ENGINEER and MSC.Patran will remain executing.
If Create .db is selected:
A MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be created from the
current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory.
A batch job will be submitted in background mode that will:
One, execute MSC.Patran and create and open a database.
Two, load the.geo file into the MSC.Patran database.
And, three, close the database and exit MSC.Patran.
If Create .geo is selected, a MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be
created from the current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory.
For more information on the MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file, see Executing
MSC.Patran ProENGINEER From Pro/ENGINEER (p3_proe) (p. 122) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

CHAPTER 2
Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry
2.3 PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic
Geometry
The PATRAN 2 Neutral file is supported by MSC.Software Corporation’s MSC.Patran.
With the PATRAN 2 neutral file, MSC.Patran can import or export only parametric cubic
geometry by executing the File/Import menus on the main form.
MSC.Patran cannot export non-parametric cubic geometry using the PATRAN 2 Neutral file.
Instead, you may use export the entire geometry model using the IGES file.
Depending on Geometry application methods used to create the geometry, you may or may not
be able to create parametric cubic curves, surfaces or solids. Also, some geometry Create action
methods can generate only parametric cubic geometry.
For information on how to import or export a PATRAN 2 Neutral file, see Importing PATRAN
2.5 Neutral Files (p. 76) and Exporting a PATRAN 2.5 Neutral File (p. 110) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
For the definition of parametric cubic geometry, see Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25).
For information on what types of curves, surfaces and solids you can create in MSC.Patran, see
Table 1-1, and starting on (p. 27).
For more information on how to export an IGES file, see Exporting an IGES File (p. 115) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
3
Coordinate Frames
■ Coordinate Frame Definitions
■ Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames
■ Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate
Frames

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
3.1 Coordinate Frame Definitions
MSC.Patran can create and support three types of coordinate frames:
Rectangular (X,Y,Z)
Cylindrical (R, Theta, Z)
Spherical (R, Theta, Phi)
MSC.Patran also has a default global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Coord 0 is the
default reference coordinate frame for many application forms (which can be changed to another
coordinate frame). Also, Coord 0 cannot be deleted, even if specified.
Each coordinate system defined in MSC.Patran has three principal axes. These axes define how
spatial locations are determined in that coordinate system, and are internally numbered 1, 2 and
3. The meaning of each principal axis depends on if the coordinate frame is rectangular,
cylindrical or spherical.
When a coordinate frame is created, its principal axes and its orientation are displayed at the
appropriate location on the model. The ID of the coordinate frame is also displayed at the
coordinate frame’s origin.
Important: Coordinate frame angles for the cylindrical and spherical coordinate frames (that
is, θ and Φ)
are expressed in degrees. Special conditions apply when defining
spatial functions in cylindrical or spherical coordinate frames. For more
information, see Procedures for Using Fields (p. 133) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.
Rectangular Coordinate Frame. Figure 3-1 shows the principal axes of a rectangular
coordinate frame and a point, P, in rectangular space. In a rectangular frame, the principal axes
1, 2 and 3 correspond to the X, Y and Z axes, respectively. Points in space specified in a
rectangular coordinate frame are entered in the order: x-coordinate, y-coordinate and zcoordinate.
Axis 1
X
Axis 3
Y
Z
P = (X, Y, Z)
Axis 2
Figure 3-1 Rectangular Coordinate Frame
Z
X
Y

CHAPTER 3
Coordinate Frames
Cylindrical Coordinate Frame. Figure 3-2 shows a cylindrical frame in which the principal
axes 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the R, T ( θ ) and Z axes, respectively. Points specified in a
cylindrical coordinate frame are entered in the order: radial-coordinate, theta-coordinate and zcoordinate.
Figure 3-2 Cylindrical Coordinate Frame
Spherical Coordinate Frame. Figure 3-3 shows a spherical frame in which the principal axes
1, 2 and 3 correspond to the R, T ( θ) and P ( Φ)
axes, respectively. Points specified in a spherical
coordinate frame are entered in the order: radial-coordinate, theta-coordinate, and phicoordinate.
A node’s local directions (1, 2, 3) can vary according to its position within the spherical
coordinate frame. For example:
If node lies along R direction, then dir 1 of node is along +R
If node lies along R direction, then dir 2 of node is along -P
If node lies along R direction, then dir 3 of node is along +T
If node lies along T direction, then dir 1 of node is along +T
If node lies along T direction, then dir 2 of node is along -P
If node lies along T direction, then dir 3 of node is along -R
If node lies along P direction, then dir 1 of node is along +P
If node lies along P direction, then dir 2 of node is along +T
If node lies along P direction, then dir 3 of node is along -R
R
Axis 1
Axis 3
θ
Z
P = (R,θ, Z)
R
Z
Axis 2
T(θ)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
See Input LBCs Set Data (Static Load Case) (p. 22) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5:
Functional Assignments.
R
Axis 1
Axis 3
φ
P (Φ)
θ
P = (R,θ, φ)
Axis 2
T(θ)
Figure 3-3 Spherical Coordinate Frame Definition
R

3.2 Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames
CHAPTER 3
Coordinate Frames
There are six ways you can create a local rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame
in MSC.Patran. They are listed as separate methods under the Geometry Application’s Create
action:
3Point
Axis
Euler
Normal
2Vector
View Vector
For more information on using the application forms for the Create methods, see Creating
Coordinate Frames (p. 350).
You can also create coordinate frames using the Transform action’s Translate and Rotate
methods. For more information, see Transforming Coordinate Frames (p. 690).
The following sections briefly discuss the Create methods for coordinate frames.
3 Point Method. Figure 3-4 illustrates using the Create action’s 3 Point method for creating a
coordinate frame by specifying three points:
A point location, using the other two
points, that defines a plane formed
by axis
1 and 3.
1
Figure 3-4 Coordinate Frame Creation Using the 3 Point Method
3
A point location on axis 3.
A point location at the origin.
2

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Axis Method. Figure 3-5 illustrates using the Axis method to create a coordinate frame by
specifying a point location at the origin, a point location on axis 1, 2, or 3, and a point location on
one of the two remaining axes.
Third, a point location on one of
the two remaining axes (you may
choose
which one).
Figure 3-5 Coordinate Frame Creation Using the Axis Method
Euler Method. The Euler Create action creates a new coordinate frame through three rotations
from an existing coordinate frame. Specifically, the following steps are performed in the order
shown:
1. Input the reference coordinate frame ID.
2. Enter the point location of the coordinate frame’s origin.
3. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 1.
4. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 2.
5. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 3.
Second, a point location on axis 1, 2,
or 3 (you may choose which one).
First, a point location at the origin.
The final orientation of the new coordinate frame depends on the order of rotations that are
made.

CHAPTER 3
Coordinate Frames
Normal Method. Figure 3-6 illustrates using the Normal method to create a coordinate frame,
where its origin is at a point location on a surface. The positive axis 3 direction is normal to the
surface by using right-hand rule and crossing the surface’s ξ1 parametric direction with the ξ2 direction. The axis 1 direction is along the surface’s ξ1 direction and the axis 2 direction is
orthogonal to axis 1 and 3.
For more information on the definition of the parametric
(p. 5).
and axes, see Parameterization
ξ 2
ξ 1
Figure 3-6 Coordinate Frame Creation Using the Normal Method
Y
ξ 1
X
Z
ξ 2

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
3.3 Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear
Coordinate Frames
You can translate or scale geometry in MSC.Patran by using the Transform action’s Translate
method or Scale method. For information and examples on using either form, see Translating
Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors (p. 605) or Scaling Points, Curves,
Surfaces, Solids and Vectors (p. 629).
On either form, you can choose either the Cartesian in Refer. CF toggle or the Curvilinear in
Refer. CF toggle.
If Curvilinear in Refer. CF is chosen, you can specify either an existing cylindrical or spherical
coordinate frame as the reference, and the translation vector or the scale factors will be
interpreted as R, θ, Z for the cylindrical system, and as R, θ, Φ for the spherical system. (Both
the θ axis and Φ axis are measured in degrees.)
Figure 3-7 throughFigure 3-10 are examples of using the Translate and Scale methods with the
Curvilinear in Refer. CF toggle.
Z
Y
X
2
7
6
Figure 3-7 Translate Method where Surface 1 is Translated within Cylindrical
Coordinate Frame 1
3
5
2
T
Z
1
1
1
R
4

CHAPTER 3
Coordinate Frames
Figure 3-8 Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled within Cylindrical Coordinate
Frame 1
Z
Z
Y
Y
X
X
4
2
2
4
Figure 3-9 Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled within Cylindrical Coordinate
Frame 1
2
T
T
2
Z
1
Z
1
1
1
R
R
1
1
3
3

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Z
Y
X
4
2
Figure 3-10 Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled within Cylindrical Coordinate
Frame 1
Points along the z-axis of a cylindrical coordinate system and at the origin of a spherical
coordinate system cannot be transformed uniquely in the θ (cylindrical) or θ and φ (spherical)
coordinates respectively. This is due to the fact that there is no unique θ for points on the z-axis
of a cylindrical coordinate system or θ and φ
coordinates at the origin of a spherical coordinate
system. Therefore, in MSC.Patran, any point on the z-axis of a cylindrical coordinate system or
at the origin of a spherical coordinate system is not transformed.
T
Z
2
1
1
R
1
3

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
4
Create Actions
■ Overview of Geometry Create Action
■ Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids
■ Creating Coordinate Frames
■ Creating Planes
■ Creating Vectors

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
4.1 Overview of Geometry Create Action
Select any method to obtain detailed help.
Object Method Description
Point ❏ XYZ Creates points from their cartesian coordinates or from existing nodes
or vertices.
❏ ArcCenter Creates a point at the center of curvature of the specified curves.
❏ Extract Creates points on existing curves at a parametric coordinate location.
❏ Interpolate Creates one or more points between two existing point locations that
are uniformly or nonuniformly spaced apart.
❏ Intersect Creates points at the intersection of any of the following pairs of
entities: Curve/Curve, Curve/Surface, Curve/Plane, Vector/Curve,
Vector/Surface, Vector/Plane.
❏ Offset Creates a point on an existing curve.
❏ Pierce Creates a point at the location where a curve intersects or pierces a
surface or solid face.
❏ Project Creates points from an existing set of points or vertices that are either
projected normally or projected through a defined vector or projected
through the current view angle, onto an existing surface or solid face.
Curve ❏ Point Creates curves through two, three or four point locations.
❏ Arc3Point Creates arced curves through a starting, middle and ending point
locations.
❏ Chain Creates a chained composite curve from two or more existing curves.
Usually used for creating trimmed surfaces.
❏ Conic Creates a conic curve based on a defined altitude and focal point and a
starting and ending points.
❏ Extract Creates a curve on an existing surface either at a parametric coordinate
location or on an edge of the surface.
❏ Fillet Creates a fillet curve with a defined radius between two existing
curves or edges.
❏ Fit Creates a curve that passes through a set of point locations based on a
least squares fit.
❏ Intersect Creates a curve at the intersection of two surfaces or solid faces.
❏ Manifold Creates a curve on a a surface or solid face that is between two or more
point locations.
❏ Normal Creates a curve that is normal from an existing surface or solid face to a
point location.
❏ Offset Creates either constant or variable offset curves from an existing curve.

Object Method Description
Curve
(cont.)
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
❏ Project Creates curves from an existing set of curves or edges that is projected
onto a surface either normally or from a defined plane or vector or
based on the current view angle.
❏ PWL Creates contiguous straight curves between two or more point
locations.
❏ Spline Creates a spline curve that passes through two or more point locations.
❏ TanCurve Creates a curve that is tangent between two curves or edges.
❏ TanPoint Creates a curve from a point location to a tangent point on a curve.
❏ XYZ Creates a curve at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its
length and orientation.
❏ Involute Creates involute curves either using an Angles option or a Radii
option.
❏ Revolve Creates curves that are rotated from point locations about a rotation
axis for a defined angle.
❏ 2D Normal Creates straight curves that are perpendicular to an existing curve or
edge and that lies within a defined plane.
❏ 2D Circle Creates a circle within a defined plane.
❏ 2D ArcAngles Creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane.
❏ 2D Arc2Point Creates an arced curve that lies within a defined plane and that uses a
starting, ending and center point locations.
❏ 2D Arc3Point Creates an arced curve that lies within a defined plane and that passes
through a starting, middle and ending point locations.
Surface ❏ Curve Creates surfaces that passes through either two, three, four or N curves
or edges.
❏ Composite Create surfaces that are composed from multiple surfaces.
❏ Decompose Creates surfaces from an existing surface (usually a trimmed surface)
based on four cursor defined vertices that lie on the existing surface.
❏ Edge Creates surfaces from three or four curves or edges.
❏ Extract Creates a surface within a solid based on either the parametric
coordinate location or on the face of the solid.
❏ Fillet Creates a filleted surface with one or two defined radii between two
existing surfaces or faces.
❏ Match Creates a surface that is topologically congruent with one of the two
specified surfaces.
❏ Offset Creates constant offset surfaces from an existing surface.
❏ Ruled Creates a surface that is created between two existing curves or edges.
❏ Trimmed Creates a trimmed surface that consist of an outer chained curve loop
and optionally, an inner chained curve loop.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Object Method Description
Surface
(cont.)
❏ Vertex Creates a surface from four point locations.
❏ XYZ Creates a surface at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its
length and orientation.
❏ Extrude Creates a surface from an existing curve or edge that is extruded
through a vector and is optionally scaled and rotated.
❏ Glide Creates a surface that is created from a specified director curve or
edge, along one or more base curves or edges.
❏ Normal Creates surfaces from existing curves through a defined thickness.
❏ Revolve Creates surfaces that are rotated from curves or edges about a rotation
axis for a defined angle.
❏ Mesh Creates a surface from a congruent 2-D mesh (shell mesh).
Solid ❏ Primitive Creates a solid (block, cylinder, cone, sphere or torus) with user input a
point, length, width, height, and reference coordinate frame. It also
provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target
solid using the created block, cylinder, cone, sphere or torus as the tool
solid.
❏ Surface Creates solids that pass through two, three, four or N surfaces or faces.
❏ B-rep Creates a B-rep solid from an existing set of surfaces that form a closed
volume.
❏ Decompose Creates solids from two opposing solid faces by choosing four vertex
locations on each face.
❏ Face Creates solids from five or six surfaces or faces.
❏ Vertex Creates solids from eight point locations.
❏ XYZ Creates a solid at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its
length and orientation.
❏ Extrude Creates a solid from an existing surface or face that is extruded
through a vector and is optionally scaled and rotated.
❏ Glide Creates a solid that is created from a specified director curve or edge,
along one or more base surfaces or faces.
❏ Normal Creates solids from existing surfaces through a defined thickness.
❏ Revolve Creates solids that are rotated from surfaces or faces about a rotation
axis for a defined angle.

Object Method Description
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Coord ❏ 3Point Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame based
on defined point locations for its origin, a point on Axis 3 and a point
on Plane 1-3.
❏ Axis Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame based
on point locations that define the original and either points one Axis 1
and 2, Axis 2 and 3, or Axis 3 and 1
❏ Euler Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame based
on three rotation angles about Axes 1, 2 and 3.
❏ Normal Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame whose
Axis 3 is normal to a specified surface or solid face, and whose origin is
at a point location.
Plane ❏ Vector Normal Creates a plane from a specified point as the plane origin and a
specified direction as the plane normal.
❏ Curve Normal Creates a plane from a point on or projected onto a specified curve as
the plane origin and the curve tangent at that point as the plane
normal.
❏ Interpolate Creates a plane from the interpolating points on a specified curve as
the plane origins and the curve tangents at those points as the plane
normals.
❏ Least Squares Creates a plane from the least square based on three and more
specified non-colinear points.
❏ Offset Creates a plane that is parallel to a specified plane with a specified
offset distance.
❏ Surface
Tangent
Creates a plane from a specified point on or projected to a specified
surface as the plane origin and the surface normal at that location as
the plane normal.
❏ 3 Points Creates a plane from three specified non-colinear points. The plane
origin is located at the first point.
❏ Point-Vector Creates planes at a point and normal to a vector.
Vector ❏ Magnitude Creates a vector by specifying the vector base point, the vector
direction and the vector magnitude of the desired vector.
❏ Intersect Creates a vector along the intersecting line of two specified planes. The
vector base point is the projection of the first plane origin on that
intersecting line.
❏ Normal Creates a vector that has the direction parallel to a specified plane and
the base point at a specified point on or projected onto that plane.
❏ Product Creates a vector that is the cross product of two specified vectors and
has its base point located at the base point of the first vector.
❏ 2 Point Creates a vector that starts from a specified base point and pointing to
a specified tip point.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
4.2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids
Create Points at XYZ Coordinates or Point Locations (XYZ Method)
The XYZ method creates points from their cartesian coordinates or at an existing node, vertex or
other point location as provided in the Point select menu.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Point ID List
5
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Point Coordinates List
[0 0 0]
Create
Point
XYZ
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions.
Used to express the coordinate values entered in the
Point Coordinate List, within the reference frame. Default
is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the existing cartesian coordinates or point
location for the new points, either by entering the
coordinates from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the
point location. Examples: [ 10 0 0], Surface 10.1.1, Node
20, Solid 10.4.3.1.
The Point Select menu that appears can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.
☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

Point XYZ Method Example
Creates Point 6 using the Create/XYZ method that is located at the global rectangular
coordinates X = 10, Y = 5 and Z = 3.125.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Point ID List
6
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Point Coordinates List
[10 5 3.125]
Create
Point
XYZ
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Z
Y
After:
Y
3
3
X
X
2
2
4
4
6
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
1
1
5
5

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point XYZ Method On a Surface Example
Creates Point 5 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icons listed below which locates Point
5 on Surface 1, whose exact location is cursor defined.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Point ID List
5
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Create
Point
XYZ
Auto Execute
Point Coordinates List
Construct Point Surface Point
-Apply-
Point Select Menu Icons
Before:
2 3
1
After:
1
Y
Z
X
1
2 3
Y
Z
X
1
5
4
4

Point XYZ Method At Nodes Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Points 1 through 4 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icon listed below which
locates the points at Nodes 10 through 13.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Point ID List
1
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Point Coordinates List
Node 10:13
Create
Point
XYZ
-Apply-
Point Select Menu Icon
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
10 11
12
1
2
3
4
13

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point XYZ Method At Screen Location Example
Creates Points 1 through 5 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icon listed below which
locates Points 1 through 5 by cursor defining them on the screen.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Point ID List
1
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Create
Point
XYZ
Auto Execute
Point Coordinates List
[1.596433 0.096824 0.000000]
-Apply-
Point Select Menu Icon
Before:
After:
1
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
2
3
4
5

Create Point ArcCenter
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The ArcCenter method creates a point at the center of curvature of the specified curves which
have a non-zero center/radius of curvature.
Action:
Object:
Point ID List
48
Geometry
Auto Execute
Curve List
Create
Point
Method: Arc Center
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the existing curves or edges either by cursor selecting
them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example:
Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate curves or edges.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions
Topology (p. 10)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point ArcCenter Method Example
Creates point 3 using Create/Point/Arc Center which locates point 3 in the center of the arc.
Action:
Object:
Point ID List
3
Geometry
Auto Execute
Curve List
Create
Point
Method: Arc Center
Curve 1
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Z
Z
2
Y
2
Y
X
X
3
1
1
1
1

Extracting Points
Extracting Points from Curves and Edges
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates points on an existing set of curves or edges at the parametric ξ1 coordinate location of
the curve or edge, where ξ1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ1 ≤1.
Point ID List
5
Geometry
Parameterization Method
◆
◆
Action:
Object:
Equal Arc Length
Equal Parametric Values
Parametric Position
0.0
1.0
u Parametric Value
Auto Execute
Curve List
Create
Point
Method: Extract
-Apply-
0.5
Select the curve icon to extract a point from a curve.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If Equal Arc Length is ON, MSC.Patran will create the
point(s) based on the arc length parameterization of the
curve. If Equal Parametric Values is ON, MSC.Patran will
create the point(s) based on the equal parametric values of
the curve.
ξ1( u)
Specify the curve’s or edge’s coordinate value, where
ξ1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ1 ≤1,
either by using the slide bar
or by entering the value in the databox. The direction of ξ1 is
defined by the connectivity of the curve or edge. You can plot
the ξ1 direction by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle
on the Geometric Properties form under the menus
Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Connectivity (p. 15)
Geometric Attributes (p. 257) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2:
Basic Functions
Specify the existing curves or edges to extract points from, either
by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve
Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Extract Method Example
Creates Point 7 using the Create/Extract method, where the point is located at ξ1( u)
is equal to
0.75, on Curve 1. Notice that the curve’s parametric direction arrow is displayed.
Point ID List
7
Geometry
Parameterization Method
◆
◆
Action:
Object:
Create
Point
Method: Extract
Equal Arc Length
Equal Parametric Values
Parametric Position
0.0
1.0
u Parametric Value
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1
-Apply-
0.75
Before:
5
5
1
Y
Z
After:
1
Y
Z
X
X
1
1
7
6
6

Point Extract Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Point 5 using the Create/Extract method, where the point is located at ξ1( u)
is equal to
0.75, on the edge of Surface 1.
Point ID List
5
Geometry
Parameterization Method
◆
◆
Action:
Object:
Create
Point
Method: Extract
Equal Arc Length
Equal Parametric Values
Parametric Position
0.0
1.0
u Parametric Value
Auto Execute
Curve List
Surface 1.4
-Apply-
0.75
Before:
2 3
1
After:
1
Y
Z
X
1
2 5
3
Y
Z
X
1
4
4

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extracting Single Points from Surfaces or Faces
Creates single points on an existing set of surfaces or faces at a specified u,v parametric location
on the surface.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Extract
Point ID List
1
Parametric Position
0.0
1.0
u Parametric Value
0.0
1.0
v Parametric Value
Auto Execute
Surface List
-Apply-
0.5
0.5
Select the icon to create a Single Point.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
ξ1( u)
ξ2( v)
Specify the surface or faces’s or coordinate
value , which have a range of 0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 , either by using the
slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The ξ1 and
ξ2 directions are defined by the connectivity of the surface
or face. You can plot the ξ1 , ξ2 directions by choosing the
Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties
form under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the existing surfaces or faces to create points on,
either by cursor selecting the surfaces or faces or by
entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1
or Solid 5.1 The Surface Select menu that appears can be
used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate surfaces or faces.

Point Extract from Surfaces or Faces Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Point 5 using the Create/Extract Point from Surface or Face method, where the point is
located at ξ1( u)
is equal to 0.333 and ξ2( v)
is equal to 0.666, on Surface 1.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Extract
Point ID List
1
Parametric Position
0.0
1.0
u Parametric Value
0.0
1.0
v Parametric Value
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
-Apply-
0.333
0.666
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
1
X
1
X
2 3
2 3
5
1
1
4
4

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces
Creates multiple points on an existing set of surfaces or faces where the bounds of the grid of
points is defined by a diagonal of two points.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Extract
Point ID List
1
Number of Points
u Direction
2
v Direction
2
Bounds
Diagonal Points
Parametric
Auto Execute
Point 1 List
Point 2 List
Surface List
-Apply-
Select the icon to create Multiple Points.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Specify the number of points to create in the u and v direction
of the surface.
Specify the Bounds as Diagonal Points when two point
locations are to be used to define the boundary for the points
to be extracted from the surface.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the two points to define the diagonal for the points,
either by cursor selecting the points or by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Point 1 or Curve 1.1, Surface 1.1.1.
The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate points.
Specify the existing surface or face to create points on, either
by cursor selecting the surface or face by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 5.1 The Surface
Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want
to cursor select the appropriate surface or face.

Multiple Point Extract from Surfaces or Faces Diagonal Method Example
Creates Points 7 through 28 on Surface 1 in the bounds defined by points 5 and 6.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Extract
Point ID List
7
Number of Points
u Direction
4
v Direction
6
Bounds
Diagonal Points
Parametric
Auto Execute
Point 1 List
Point 5
Point 2 List
Point 6
Surface List
Surface 1
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
1
X
1
X
2 3
5
2 3
1
6
26 27 28 6
22 23 24 25
18
14
19
1
15
20
16
21
17
10 11 12 13
5 7 8 9
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
4
4

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces
Creates multiple points on an existing set of surfaces or faces where the bounds of the grid of
points is defined by a parametric , diagonal.
ξ ξ 2
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Extract
Point ID List
1
Number of Points
u Direction
2
v Direction
2
Bounds
Diagonal Points
Parametric
[Parametric Bounds...]
Auto Execute
Surface List
-Apply-
Select the icon to create Multiple Points.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Specify the number of points to create in the u and v direction
of the surface.
Specify the Bounds as Parametric when two parametric
locations are to be used to define the boundary for the points
to be extracted from the surface.
Display the Parametric Bounds form to define the u,v
parametric locations to define the bounds of the points.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the existing surface or face to create points on, either
by cursor selecting the surface or face by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 5.1 The Surface
Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want
to cursor select the appropriate surface or face.

Multiple Point Extract from Surfaces or Faces Parametric Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Points 5 through 28 on Surface 1 in the bounds defined by u-min=0.333, u-max=0.666, vmin=0.333,
and v-max=0.666.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Extract
Point ID List
5
Number of Points
u Direction
4
v Direction
6
Bounds
Diagonal Points
Parametric
[Parametric Bounds...]
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
1
X
1
X
2 3
1
2 3
25 26 27 28
21 22 23 24
17
13
18
1
14
19
15
20
16
9 10 11 12
5 6 7 8
4
4

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Parametric Bounds for Extracting Points from a Surface
Parametric Bounds
u v Bounds
0.0
1.0
u-Min
0.0
u-Max
0.0
v-Min
0.0
v-Max
Reset
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.0
1.0
0.0
1.0
OK Cancel
Specify the surface’s x1 (u) and x2 (v) coordinate values for the
definition of the bounds of the points, either by using the slide
bar or by entering the value in the databox. The x1and x2
directions are defined by the connectivity of the surface or face.
(x1 has a range of 0 £ x1 £ 1 and x2 has a range of 0 £ x2 £ 1)
You can plot the x1 and x2 directions by choosing the
Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form
under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

Interpolating Points
Between Two Points
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Interpolate method using the Point option will create n points of uniform or nonuniform
spacing between a specified pair of point locations, where n is the number of interior points to
be created. The point location pairs can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point location
provided by the Point select menu.
Point ID List
5
Option: Point
Geometry
Number of Interior Points
1
Point Spacing Method
◆
Action:
Object:
◆
Uniform
Nonuniform
Auto Execute
Create
Point
Method: Interpolate
Point 1 Coordinates List
Point 2 Coordinates List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions.
Enter the number of interior points you want to create
between the specified point locations in the Point 1 and
Point 2 Coordinates List.
Select either button for Uniform or Nonuniform point
spacing for the new interior points. If Nonuniform is ON,
then enter the value for L2/L1, where L2/L1 is 0 ≤ L2/L1
≤ 1.0 or L2/L1 ≤ 1.0.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify in the Point 1 Coordinates listbox, the starting
point location to begin the interpolation. Specify in the
Point 2 Coordinates listbox, the ending point location to
end the interpolation.
You can express the point location either by entering the
location’s cartesian coordinates from the keyboard, or by
using the Point Select menu to cursor select the
appropriate points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations. Examples: [ 10 0 0], Surface 10.1.1, Node 20,
Solid 10.4.3.1.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Interpolate Method With Point Option Example
Creates five interior points starting with Point 3 that are between Points 1 and 2, using the
Create/Interpolate/Point option. The spacing is nonuniform at L2/L1 = 2.0.
Point ID List
3
Option: Point
Geometry
Number of Interior Points
5
Number of Spacing Method
◆
Action:
Object:
◆
Uniform
Nonuniform
Auto Execute
Create
Point
Method: Interpolate
L1 L2
L2/L1 =
Point 1 Coordinates List
Point 1
Point 2 Coordinates List
Point 2
2.0
-Apply-
Before:
1 2
After:
Y
Z
X
1 3 4 5 6 7
2
Y
Z
X

Point Interpolate Method With Point Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Same as the previous example, except the five new points are uniformly spaced between Nodes
1 and 2, by using the Point select menu icon listed below.
Point ID List
1
Option: Point
Geometry
Number of Interior Points
5
Number of Spacing Method
◆
Action:
Object:
◆
Uniform
Nonuniform
Auto Execute
Create
Point
Method: Interpolate
Point 1 Coordinates List
Node 1
Point 2 Coordinates List
Node 2
-Apply-
Point Select Menu Icon
Before:
After:
1
Y
Z
1
Y
Z
X
1
X
2
3
4
5
2
2

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Interpolating Points on a Curve
The Interpolate method using the Curve option creates n points along an existing curve or edge
of uniform or nonuniform spacing where n is the number of interior points to be created.
Enter the number of interior points you want to create along the
curves or edges that are specified in the Curve listbox.
Point ID List
5
Option: Curve
Geometry
Number of Interior Points
Parameterization Method
◆ Equal Arc Length
◆ Equal Parametric Values
Point Spacing Method
◆
◆
Action:
Object:
Uniform
Nonuniform
Auto Execute
Curve List
Create
Point
Method: Interpolate
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions.
If Equal Arc Length is ON, MSC.Patran will create the
point(s) based on the arc length parameterization of the
curve. If Equal Parametric Values is ON, MSC.Patran
will create the point(s) based on the equal parametric
values of the curve.
Choose either button for Uniform or Nonuniform point
spacing for the new interior points.
If Nonuniform is ON, then enter the value for L2/L1,
where L2/L1 is 0 ≤ L2/L1 ≤ 1.0 or L2/L1 ≤ 1.0. The
starting point of where L1 and L2 is measured from is at
the curve’s or edge’s parametric origin, which is defined
by its connectivity. You can plot the ξ 1 direction by
choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the
Geometric Properties form under the menus
Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the existing curves or edges to create points on,
either by cursor selecting the curves or edges or by
entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1
Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate curves or edges.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Connectivity (p. 15)
Geometric Attributes (p. 257) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic
Functions

Point Interpolate Method With Curve Option Example
Creates five uniformly spaced interior points, starting with Point 6 on Curve 1, using the
Create/Point/Interpolate/Curve option.
Point ID List
6
Geometry
Option: Curve
Number of Interior Points
Parameterization Method
◆
◆
Equal Arc Length
Equal Parametric Values
Point Spacing Method
◆
◆
Action:
Object:
Uniform
Nonuniform
Auto Execute
Curve List
Create
Point
Method: Interpolate
5
Curve 1
-Apply-
Before:
1
1
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
6 7
X
8
1
1
9
10
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
5
5

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Interpolate Method With Curve Option Example
Creates Points 5 through 9 that are nonuniformly spaced by using the Create/Interpolate/Curve
option, where the points are created on an edge of Surface 1.
Point ID List
5
Geometry
Option: Curve
Number of Interior Points
Parameterization Method
◆
◆
Equal Arc Length
Equal Parametric Values
Point Spacing Method
◆
◆
Action:
Object:
Uniform
Nonuniform
Auto Execute
Curve List
Create
Point
Method: Interpolate
5
L1 L2
L2/L1 =
Curve 1
2.0
-Apply-
Before:
2 3
1
1
2
After:
Y
Z
1
X
1
2 5 6 7 8 9 3
2
Y
Z
1
X
1
4
4

Intersecting Two Entities to Create Points
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Intersect method creates points at the intersection of any of the following pairs of entities:
Curve/Curve, Curve/Surface, Curve/Plane, Vector/Curve, Vector/Surface, Vector/Plane.
One point will be created at each intersection location. The pair of entities should intersect within
a value defined by the Global Model Tolerance. If the entities do not intersect, MSC.Patran will
create a point at the closest approach on each specified curve, edge, or vector for the
Curve/Curve and Vector/Curve intersection options.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect
Point ID List
24
Option:
Option:
Auto Execute
List
List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Options for 1st entity to intersect:
1. Curve (or edge of a surface)
2. Vector
Options for 2nd entity to intersect:
1. Curve (or edge of a surface)
2. Surface
3. Plane
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
The list changes depending on the option selected.
Specify in List 1 and List 2 the pair of intersecting entities at
which to create points, either by cursor selecting them or by
entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1
Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1.
The Select menus that appear can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate entities.
The Global Model Tolerance that defines the tolerance
value within which the two entities can intersect is defined
on the Global Preferences form under the
Preferences/Global menu.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Global Preferences (p. 290) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2:
Basic Functions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Intersect Method At An Edge Example
Creates Point 17, using the Create/Intersect method, at the intersection of Curve 3 and an edge
of Surface 1.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect
Point ID List
17
Option: Curve
Option: Curve
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 3
Curve List
Surface 1.2
-Apply-
Before:
Z
12
11
Y
After:
Z
12
11
Y
X
15
X
15
1
3
1
3 17
16
16
13
14
13
14

Point Intersect Method with Two Curves Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Points 1 and 2, using the Create/Intersect method, at the intersection of Curves 1 and 2.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect
Point ID List
1
Option: Curve
Option: Curve
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1
Curve List
Curve 2
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
X
Y
Z
X
2
2
1
1
1
2

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Intersect Method with Two Curves Example
Creates Points 1 and 2, using the Create/Intersect method. Because the curves do not intersect,
Points 1 and 2 are created at the closest approach of the two curves.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect
Point ID List
1
Option: Curve
Option: Curve
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1
Curve List
Curve 2
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
1 2
1 2

Point Intersect Method with a Curve and a Surface Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Points 1, 2 and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Curve 6 with
Surface 1.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect
Point ID List
1
Option: Curve
Option: Surface
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 6
Surface List
Surface 1
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Z
Y
X
Z
X
Y
3
6
1
1
6
1
21
1

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Intersect Method with a Curve and a Plane Example
Creates Points 1, 2, and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Curve 2 with
Plane 1.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect
Point ID List
1
Option: Curve
Option: Plane
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 2
Plane List
Plane 1
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
2
2
1
1
2
1
3

Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Curve Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Points 1, 2, and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 1 with
Curve 2.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect
Point ID List
1
Option: Vector
Option: Curve
Auto Execute
Vector List
Vector 1
Curve List
Curve 2
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
2
2
1
2
1
1
3

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Curve Example
Creates Point 1 on Vector 1 and Point 2 on Curve 2, using the Create/Intersect method. Since the
entities do not intersect, Points 1 and 2 are created at the closest approach between the Vector
and the Curve.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect
Point ID List
1
Option: Vector
Option: Curve
Auto Execute
Vector List
Vector 1
Curve List
Curve 2
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
1
1
2
2
1 2

Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Surface Example
Creates Points 1 and 2 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 1 and
Surface 1.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect
Point ID List
1
Option: Vector
Option: Surface
Auto Execute
Vector List
Vector 1
Surface List
Surface 1
-Apply-
Before:
After:
1
Z
Z
1
Y
Y
X
X
1
1
1
2
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Plane Example
Creates Point 1 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 2 and Plane 1.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect
Point ID List
1
Option: Vector
Option: Plane
Auto Execute
Vector List
Vector 2
Plane List
Plane 1
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
1
1
2
1
2

Creating Points by Offsetting a Specified Distance
The Offset method creates a point on an existing curve by offsetting a specified model space
distance from an existing point on the same curve.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Action:
Object:
Point ID List
1
Geometry
Create
Point
Method: Offset
Offset Distance
Auto Execute
Reference Point List
Curve/Point List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Input the Model Space offset distance from an existing point
on a curve (curve to be input).
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Specify the existing points on the curve either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Point 1 Curve 5.1. The Point Select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate points or vertices.
Specify in Curve/Point List, the existing curve or edge, along
with a point on the curve which indicates the direction in
which the offset will be taken. For each listbox, the Curve
Select menu and the Point Select menu will appear at the
bottom to allow you to cursor define the appropriate curves or
edges, and the points, vertices, nodes, or other appropriate
endpoint locations.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Global Preferences (p. 290) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2:
Basic Functions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Offset Method Example
Creates point 3 on curve one, .75 units from point 1 using Create/Point/Offset.
Action:
Object:
Point ID List
3
Geometry
Create
Point
Method: Offset
Offset Distance
0.75
Auto Execute
Reference Point List
Point 1
Curve/Point List
Geometry (Curve 1)
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Z
Z
Y
Y
X
1
X
1
3
1
1
2
2

Piercing Curves Through Surfaces to Create Points
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Pierce method creates points at the intersection between an existing curve or edge and a
surface or solid face. The curve or edge must completely intersect with the surface or solid face.
If the curve or edge intersects the surface or face more than one time, MSC.Patran will create a
point at each intersection.
Action:
Object:
Point ID List
1
Geometry
Auto Execute
Curve List
Surface List
Create
Point
Method: Pierce
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify in Curve List the existing curves or edges that
intersect the surfaces and faces listed in the Surface listbox.
Specify in Surface List the existing surfaces or faces that
intersect with the curves and edges.
You can either cursor select the existing entities or enter the
IDs from the keyboard. Example: For curves - Curve 1
Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10 Solid 5.1.
The Curve Select menu and Surface Select menu that appears
can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate curves, edges, surfaces or faces.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Pierce Method Example
Creates Point 15, using the Create/Pierce method at the location where Curve 3 intersects
Surface 1.
Action:
Object:
Point ID List
15
Geometry
Auto Execute
Curve List
Surface List
Create
Point
Method: Pierce
Curve 3
Surface 1
-Apply-
Before:
11
11
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
1
1
13
13
3
1
3
15
1
14
14
12
12
5
5

Point Pierce Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
This example is the same as the previous example, except the curve is defined by Points 13 and
14 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below.
Action:
Object:
Point ID List
15
Geometry
Auto Execute
Curve List
Surface List
Create
Point
Method: Pierce
Construct 2 Point Curve
Surface 1
-Apply-
Curve Select Menu Icon
Before:
11
11
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
1
1
13
13
1
15
1
14
14
12
12
5
5

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Projecting Points Onto Surfaces or Faces
The Project method creates points by projecting an existing set of points onto a surface or solid
face through a defined Projection Vector. New points can be projected from other points,
vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See
Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Basic Functions.
Action:
Object:
Point ID List
5
Geometry
Option: Normal to Surf
Projection Vector
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Delete Original Points
Auto Execute
Create
Point
Method: Project
Project onto: Surface
Normal to Surf option will project the existing points by using
the normal direction of the specified surface or face.
Define Vector option allows you to specify the coordinates of
the Projection Vector and the Refer. Coordinate Frame to
express the vector within. (Example: ). The Vector
Select menu will appear to allow you alternate ways to cursor
define the vector direction.
View Vector option will project the existing points by using the
view angle of the current viewport. MSC.Patran will project the
existing points using the normal direction of the screen.
Projection Vector and Refer. Coordinate Frame is used if the
Define Vector option is chosen.
If ON, after Project completes the existing points specified in
Point List will be deleted from the database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Projection Vector
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Delete Original Points
Auto Execute
Point List
Surface List
-Apply-
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Specify in Point List the existing points, vertices, nodes or
other point locations that you want to project onto the surfaces
or faces specified in the Surface List box.
Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or faces that the
points will be projected onto.
You can either cursor select the existing entities or enter the
IDs from the keyboard. Example: For points - Point 1:10,
Curve 5.1 Surface 5.1.1; For surfaces - Surface 10 Solid 5.1.
The Point Select menu and Surface Select menu that appears
can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate points, vertices, nodes, surfaces or faces.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Viewing Menu (p. 219) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Project Method With Normal to Surf Option Example
Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Project/Normal to Surf option. Points 13:16,
18:20 and Node 1 are all projected normally onto Surface 1. Notice Delete Original Points is
pressed in.
Action:
Object:
Point ID List
21
Geometry
Option: Normal to Surf
Projection Vector
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Delete Original Points
Auto Execute
Point List
Point 13:16 18:20 Node 1
Surface List
Surface 10
Create
Point
Method: Project
Project onto: Surface
-Apply-
Before:
ZX
After:
ZX
Y
Y
11
11
12
12
21
22
28
23
27
24
1
1
26
13
14
10
209
10
9
15
19
16
1
18

Point Project Method With Define Vector Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Point/Project/Define Vector option. The points
are projected onto Surface 1 through the vector that is expressed within the Refer.
Coordinate Frame, Coord 1. Notice that Delete Original Points is pressed in.
Action:
Object:
Point ID List
13
Geometry
Option: Define Vector
Projection Vector
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 1
Delete Original Points
Auto Execute
Point List
Point 13:20
Surface List
Surface 1
Create
Point
Method: Project
Project onto: Surface
-Apply-
Before:
10 11
9
After:
9
Y
Z
X
117
16
18
15
Y
1Z X
10 11
23
24
22
25
Y
Z
26
X
27
28
21 1
19
Y
1Z X
14
20
13
12
12

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Project Method With View Vector Option Example
Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Project/View Vector option. The points are
projected onto Surface 1 using the view angle of the current viewport. Notice that Delete
Original Points is pressed in and Points 13 through 20 are deleted.
Action:
Object:
Point ID List
21
Geometry
Option: View Vector
Projection Vector
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Delete Original Points
Auto Execute
Point List
Point 13:20
Surface List
Surface 1
Create
Point
Method: Project
Project onto: Surface
-Apply-
Before:
10 11
15
9
After:
9
Y
Z
X
117
16
18
Y
1Z X
10 11
23
24
22
Y
Z
X
19
14
20
13
125 1Z X 21
26
Y
27
28
12
12

Creating Curves Between Points
Creating Curves Through 2 Points
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Point method using the 2 Point option creates straight parametric cubic curves between two
existing point locations. The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or other point
locations provided on the Point select menu.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Option: 2 Point
Geometry
Auto Execute
Create
Curve
Point
Starting Point List
Ending Point List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the starting and ending point locations for the new
curves. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs
from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20,
Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used
to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points,
vertices, nodes, or other point locations.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Point Method With 2 Point Option Example
Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Point/2 Point option, which is between Point 1 and Node 10.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
3
Geometry
Option: 2 Point
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
Point 1
Ending Point List
Node 10
Create
Curve
Point
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
1
X
1
X
3
10
10 2

Creating Curves Through 3 Points
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Point method using the 3 Point option creates parametric cubic curves that pass through
three existing point locations where the starting point defines the curve at ξ1 = 0 and the
ending point defines the curve at ξ1 = 1 . The point locations can be existing points, vertices,
nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Curve ID List
1
Option: 3 Point
Parameterization Method
◆
◆
Parametric Position
Chord Length
0.0
Create
Curve
Point
1.0
0.5
u Value of Middle Point
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
ξ1( u)
Parametric Position allows you to specify the
parametric position of the middle point for the new curve, either
by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox
where 0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 . The direction of ξ1 is defined by the order
of the point locations specified in the Starting Point List and
Ending Point List, which defines the new curve’s connectivity.
You can plot the curve’s ξ1 direction by selecting the
Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form
under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
Chord Length will disable the slide bar and databox. Instead,
MSC.Patran will calculate the parametric coordinates of the
points along the curve, based on the chord length distances
relative to the locations of the curve’s interior points. This means
the curve may or may not be uniformly parameterized,
depending on where the interior points are located.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Parameterization Method
◆
◆
Parametric Position
Chord Length
0.0
1.0
0.5
u Value of Middle Point
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
Middle Point List
Ending Point List
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the starting, middle and ending point locations for the
new curve to pass through. Either cursor select the point
locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1,
Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric
Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Connectivity (p. 15)
Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

Curve Point Method With 3 Point Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Point/3 Point option, which is created through Points 1 and
2 and Node 10. Point 2 is located on the curve at x1(u) =0.5.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Curve ID List
1
Option: 3 Point
Parameterization Method
◆
◆
Parametric Position
Chord Length
0.0
1.0
0.5
u Value of Middle Point
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
Point 1
Middle Point List
Point 2
Ending Point List
Node 10
Create
Curve
Point
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
1
1
2
21
10
10

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Point Method With 3 Point Option Example
This example is the same as the previous example, except Point 2 is located on the curve at
=0.75, instead of 0.5.
Geometry
Before:
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Option: 3 Point
Parameterization Method
◆
◆
Parametric Position
Chord Length
0.0
1.0
0.75
u Value of Middle Point
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
Point 1
Middle Point List
Point 2
Ending Point List
Node 10
Create
Curve
Point
-Apply-
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
1
1
1
2
2
ξ1( u)
10
10

Creating Curves Through 4 Points
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Point method using the 4 Point option creates parametric cubic curves that pass through
four existing point locations where the starting point defines the curve at ξ1 = 0 and the ending
point defines the curve at ξ1 = 1 . The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or
other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Option: 4 Point
Parameterization Method
◆ Parametric Position
◆ Chord Length
[Parametric Positions...]
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
Second Point List
Third Point List
Create
Curve
Point
Ending Point List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
ξ1( u)
Parametric Position allows you to specify the parametric
position of the second and third points on the new curve, where
0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 . Press the Parametric Positions button to enter the ξ1 locations for both points. The direction of ξ1 is defined by the order
of the point locations specified in the Starting Point List and Ending
Point List, which defines the new curve’s connectivity. You can plot
the curve’s ξ1 direction by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle
on the Geometric Properties form under the menus Display/Display
Properties/Geometric.
Chord Length will disable the slide bar and databox. Instead,
MSC.Patran will calculate the parametric coordinates of the points
along the curve, based on the chord length distances relative to the
locations of the curve’s interior points. This means the curve may or
may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the interior
points are located.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Option: 4 Point
Parameterization Method
◆
◆
Parametric Position
Chord Length
[Parametric Positions...]
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
Second Point List
Third Point List
Ending Point List
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the starting, second, third and ending point locations for
the new curve to pass through. Either cursor select the point
locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1,
Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Connectivity (p. 15)
Display Attributes (p. 243) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic
Functions

Curve Point Method With 4 Point Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Point/4 Point option, which is created through Points 1, 2 and
3 and Node 10. Point 2 is located at ξ1( u)
=0.333 and Point 3 is located at ξ1( u)
=0.667.
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Option: 4 Point
Parameterization Method
◆
◆
Action:
Object:
Method:
Parametric Position
Chord Length
[Parametric Positions...]
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
Point 1
Second Point List
Point 2
Third Point List
Point 3
Ending Point List
Node 10
Create
Curve
Point
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
1
1
2
2
1
10
10
3
3

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Point Method With 4 Point Option Example
This example is the same as the previous example, except that Point 2 is located at x1(u) =0.25
and Point 3 is located at x1(u) =0.80.
Curve ID List
3
Geometry
Option: 4 Point
Parameterization Method
◆
◆
Action:
Object:
Method:
Parametric Position
Chord Length
[Parametric Positions...]
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
Point 1
Second Point List
Point 2
Third Point List
Point 3
Ending Point List
Node 10
Create
Curve
Point
-Apply-
Before
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
1
1
2
2
10
10
3
1
3

Curve 4 Point Parametric Positions Subordinate Form
This subordinate form is displayed when the Parametric Positions button is pressed on the
Geometry Application’s Create/Curve/Point form for the 4 Point option.
Curve 4 Point Parametric Positions
0.0
1.0
u Parametric Value of second point
0.0
☞ More Help:
1.0
u Parametric Value of third point
0.333
0.667
OK Cancel
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Connectivity (p. 15)
Display Attributes (p. 243) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2:
Basic Functions
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Enter the ξ1 (C1) parametric position for
the second and third point locations that are
specified in the Second Point List and Third
Point Listboxes, where 0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 . This
defines where these two points will occupy
on the new curve. Either use the slide bars
or enter the ξ1 value in each databox.
Moving the slidebar will automatically
update the databox value.
Press OK to update the ξ1 values.
Press Cancel if you want to exit the form
and not change the specified ξ1 values.
The direction of ξ 1 is defined by the order of
the point locations specified in the Starting
Point List and Ending Point List, which
defines the new curve’s connectivity. You
can plot the ξ 1 direction of the new curves
by pressing the Parametric Direction toggle
on the Geometric Properties form under the
menus Display/Display
Properties/Geometric.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Arced Curves (Arc3Point Method)
The Arc3Point method creates true arced curves that pass through three specified point
locations. MSC.Patran calculates the arc’s center point location and the radius and angle of the
arc. The three point locations can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations that are
provided on the Point select menu.
Action:
Object:
If ON, MSC.Patran will create a point at
the center location of the arc.
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Curves per Arc
1
Create Center Point
Auto Execute
Create
Curve
Method: Arc3Point
Starting Point List
Middle Point List
Ending Point List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If PATRAN 2 Convention is pressed, enter the number of curves
to be created for each arc definition. Otherwise, the Curves pre
Arc databox is disabled.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the starting, middle and ending point locations for the
new arc to pass through. Either cursor select the point
locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point
1, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu
that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point
locations.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Curve Arc3Point Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Arc3Point method, which creates a true arc through Points 1
through 3. Notice that Create Center Point is pressed which created Point 4.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
3
Geometry
Curves per Arc
1
Create Center Point
Auto Execute
Create
Curve
Method: Arc3Point
Starting Point List
Point 1
Middle Point List
Point 2
Ending Point List
Point 3
-Apply-
Before:
3
After:
Y
Z
X
Y
3 4
Z X
2
2
1
1

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Arc3Point Method Example
This example is similar to the previous example, except that the point locations for the arc are
specified with point coordinate locations.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
3
Geometry
Curves per Arc
1
Create Center Point
Auto Execute
Create
Curve
Method: Arc3Point
Starting Point List
[-1 0 0]
Middle Point List
[0 1 0]
Ending Point List
[1 0 0]
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
X
Y
3 4
Z X
2
1

Creating Chained Curves
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Chain method creates a chained composite curve from one or more existing curves or edges.
The existing curves and edges must be connected end to end. If a chained curve is used to create
planer or general trimmed surfaces for an inner loop, they must form a closed loop. Chained
curves are used to create planar or general trimmed surfaces using the
Create/Surface/Trimmed form.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Auto Chain...
Delete Constituent Curves
Curve List
Create
Curve
Chain
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If selected, the Auto Chaining form is displayed to enable
auto chaining of existing curves.
If ON, after Chain completes, the existing curves specified in
the Curve List will be deleted from the database.
Specify the existing curves or edges to chain either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20)
Creating Trimmed Surfaces (p. 278)
Disassembling a Chained Curve (p. 429)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Chain Method Example
Creates Curve 11, using the Create/Chain method, which is created from Curves 3 through 10.
Notice that Delete Constituent Curves is pressed and Curves 3 through 10 are deleted.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
11
Geometry
Auto Chain...
Delete Constituent Curves
Curve List
Curve 3:10
Create
Curve
Chain
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
8
10
After:
9
7
8
6
7
1 3
2
X
8 7
4 11
Y
Z
6
1 2
X
4
6
5
5
5
3
3
4

Creating Conic Curves
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Conic method creates parametric cubic curves representing a conic section (that is,
hyperbola, parabola, ellipse, or circular arc), by specifying point locations for the starting and
ending points of the conic and the conic’s focal point. The point locations can be points, vertices,
nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Action:
Geometry
Create
Object: Curve
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Conic Section Classification
0.0
Conic
1.0
0.5
Conic Altitude for Parabola
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Used by the Focal Point List and the Starting and Ending Point
Lists to express the point’s coordinate values that may be entered
within the specified coordinate frame. Example: Coord 5. Default
is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0.
Enter a value for the altitude of the conic either by using the slide
bar or by entering the value in the databox.
Conic
Altitude
Focal Point
Conic Curve
Starting Point Ending Point

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Conic Section Classification
0.0
1.0
0.5
Conic Altitude for Parabola
Auto Execute
Focal Point List
Starting Point List
Ending Point List
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the focal point location, and the starting and ending point
locations that defines a conic section. Either cursor select the
point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example:
Point 1, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

Curve Conic Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Conic method whose focal point is Point 3, the starting and
ending points are Points 1 and 2, and the conic altitude is 0.50.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Conic Section Classification
0.0
1.0
0.5
Conic Altitude for Parabola
Auto Execute
Focal Point List
Point 3
Starting Point List
Point 1
Ending Point List
Point 2
Create
Curve
Conic
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
3
1 2
3
1
1 2

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Conic Method Example
This is the same as the previous example, except that the conic altitude is increased to 0.75 from
0.50 for Curve 2.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
2
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Conic Section Classification
0.0
1.0
0.75
Conic Altitude for Parabola
Auto Execute
Focal Point List
Point 3
Starting Point List
Point 1
Ending Point List
Point 2
Create
Curve
Conic
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
3
1
1 2
3
2
1
1 2

Extracting Curves From Surfaces
Extracting Curves from Surfaces Using the Parametric Option
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Extract method creates curves on an existing set of surfaces or solid faces by specifying the
surface’s or face’s parametric ξ1 or ξ2 coordinate location where ξ1 has a range of 0 ≤ξ1≤1 and ξ2 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ2 ≤1.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
Parametric
Curve Direction
◆ u Direction
◆ v Direction
Curve Position
0.0
Create
Curve
Method: Extract
1.0
v Parametric Value
0.5
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Choose either Constant u Direction or Constant v
Direction. The curves will either be created along either
the ξ1( u)
direction for Constant u Direction or along the
direction for Constant v Direction.
ξ2( v)
ξ1( u)
ξ2( v)
Specify the surface’s or coordinate value for
the location of the curve, either by using the slide bar or by
entering the value in the databox. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions
are defined by the connectivity of the surface or face. You can
plot the ξ1 and ξ2 directions by choosing the Parametric
Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the
menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Direction
◆ u Direction
◆ v Direction
Curve Position
0.0
1.0
v Parametric Value
Auto Execute
Surface List
-Apply-
0.5
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the existing surfaces or faces for the curves to be
created on, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the
IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The
Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

Curve Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The curve is created on Surface 2
at ξ2( v)
= 0.75. Notice that the parametric direction is displayed.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
Parametric
Curve Direction
◆ u Direction
◆ v Direction
Curve Position
0.0
1.0
v Parametric Value
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 2
Create
Curve
Method: Extract
-Apply-
0.75
Before:
8
8
Z
After:
Z
Y
11
Y
X
X
7
2
7
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
9
9
12
10
10

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example
This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curve X is created at ξ1( u)
= 0.75,
instead of ξ2( v)
= 0.75.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Option:
Parametric
Curve Direction
◆ u Direction
◆
v Direction
Curve Position
0.0
1.0
v Parametric Value
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 2
Geometry
Create
Curve
Method: Extract
-Apply-
0.75
Before:
8
8
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
7
2
7
2
1
1
2
9
9
2 11
1
12
1
10
10

Curve Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 3 which is at ξ2( v)
= 0.25 on a surface defined by Curve 2 and an edge of Surface
1 by using the Surface select menu icons listed below.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
3
Option:
Parametric
Curve Direction
◆
◆
u Direction
v Direction
Curve Position
0.0
Geometry
Create
Curve
Method: Extract
1.0
v Parametric Value
Auto Execute
Surface List
0.25
Construct2CurveSurface(Ev
-Apply-
Surface Select Menu Icons
Before:
6
After:
6
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
1
1
1
1
8
7
7
3
3
3
2
2
9
2
2
5
5

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extracting Curves From Surfaces Using the Edge Option
The Extract method creates curves on specified edges of existing surfaces or solid faces.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
Edge
Auto Execute
Edge List
Create
Curve
Method: Extract
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify in Edge List, the existing edges of the surfaces or solid
faces for the curves to be created on, either by cursor selecting
them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example:
Surface 1.1 Solid 5.1.1.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Curve Extract Method With Edge Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Extract/Edge option. The curve is created on one of the edges
of Surface 1.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
3
Option:
Geometry
Edge
Auto Execute
Edge List
Create
Curve
Method: Extract
Surface 1.2
-Apply-
Before:
1
1
2
After:
2
5
Z
5
Z
Y
1
Y
1
X
X
1
2
2
1
1
3
3
3
4
4
6
6

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Fillet Curves
The fillet method is intended for use with 2D construction. The created curve is a circular arc.
For this reason, the method will not work if the provided curves are not co-planar. The Patran
2.5 switch overrides this requirement and places no restriction on coplanarity. The result is a
single cubic line so that it is more like a slope continuous blend between the 2 curves.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Curve ID List
1
Fillet Parameters
Curves per Fillet
1
Fillet Radius
Fillet Tolerance
0.005
Trim Original Curves
Auto Execute
Create
Curve
Fillet
Curve/Point 1 List
Curve/Point 2 List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Curves per Fillet specifies the number of curves you want to
create for each defined fillet arc. This is only used in conjunction
with the Patran 2 Convention.
Fillet Radius specifies a real value for the radius of the fillet arc.
Only one radius value is allowed which is applied to all specified
curves or edges/points that are entered in the Curve/Point 1 and
2 Lists.
Fillet Tolerance specifies the accuracy MSC.Patran uses when
it subdivides the geometry to calculate the fillet position.
Decreasing the value helps when the fillet is very small
compared to the geometry. This is only used in conjunction with
the Patran 2 Convention.
If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the original curves specified in the
Curve/Point 1 and 2 Lists. Each curve is trimmed from the
tangent point of the fillet to the end of the original curve.
Calculated
Center
Radius
New Fillet
Curve
Curve 2
Endpoint
Curve 1 Endpoint
Portions to Trim

Fillet Parameters
Curves per Fillet
1
Fillet Radius
Fillet Tolerance
0.005
Trim Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve/Point 1 List
Curve/Point 2 List
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to Press the Apply button to execute the form.
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Specify in Curve/Point 1 List and Curve/Point 2 List, the existing
pair of curves or edges, along with their endpoints that the fillet will
be created between. For each listbox, the Curve Select menu and
the Point Select menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to
cursor define the appropriate curves or edges, and the points,
vertices, nodes, or other appropriate endpoint locations.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Fillet Method Example
Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Fillet method. The fillet curve is created between Curve 1 and
Point 4 and Curve 2 and Point 5, with a radius of 0.5. Notice Trim Original Curves is pressed.
Geometry
Curve ID List
3
Fillet Parameters
Curves per Fillet
1
Action:
Object:
Method:
Fillet Radius
0.5
Fillet Tolerance
0.005
Trim Original Curves
Auto Execute
Create
Curve
Fillet
Curve/Point 1 List
ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve
Curve/Point 2 List
ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
5
5
1
1
2
8 3
1 2
7
1
4
4
6
6

Curve Fillet Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Fillet method. The fillet curve is created between Curve 1 and
Point 2 and Curve 2 and Point 3, with a radius of 0.25.
Geometry
Curve ID List
3
Fillet Parameters
Curves per Fillet
1
Action:
Object:
Method:
Fillet Radius
0.25
Fillet Tolerance
0.005
Trim Original Curves
Auto Execute
Create
Curve
Fillet
Curve/Point 1 List
ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve
Curve/Point 2 List
ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve
-Apply-
Before:
2
X
After:
2
X
Z
Z
Y
Y
3
3
6
5
3
2
1
2
1
1
1
4
4

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Fitting Curves Through a Set of Points
The Fit method creates a parametric cubic curve by fitting it through a set of two or more point
locations. MSC.Patran uses a parametric least squares numerical approximation for the fit. The
point locations can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point
select menu.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Fit Parameters
Geometry
Number of Curves to Create
1
Convergence Tolerance
0.005
Number of Iterations
0
Point List
Create
Curve
Fit
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Number of Curves to Create specifies the number of curves to
create to represent the fit through the specified points.
Convergence Tolerance is used when the Number of Iterations
is greater than zero. This value, measured in model units,
defines the maximum the interior points will deviate from a
calculated spline of the original curves that are used in the
synthesis of the new curves. Default is .005.
Number of Iterations is zero by default. If zero, MSC.Patran will
create smooth, evenly parameterized curves. If it is greater than
zero, as the value increases, the curve fit will be more accurate,
but they will become more nonuniformly parameterized and they
may have unwanted kinks or oscillations.
Specify the existing points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations to fit the curve through, either by entering the IDs from
the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point locations.
Examples: Point 1:10, Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select
menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate point locations.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)

Curve Fit Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates three curves starting with Curve 1, using the Create/Fit method. The curve is created
through Points 1 through 6.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Fit Parameters
Geometry
Number of Curves to Create
3
Convergence Tolerance
0.005
Number of Iterations
0
Point List
Point 1: 6
Create
Curve
Fit
-Apply-
Before:
1
After:
1
Y
Z
Y
Z
2
X
2
X
7
3
3
2
4
4
8
5
3
5
6
6

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Curves at Intersections
Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Surfaces
The Intersect method using the 2 Surface option creates curves at the intersection of two surfaces
or solid faces. The two surfaces or faces must completely intersect each other.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
Option: 2 Surface
Intersect Parameters...
Auto Execute
Surface 1 List
Surface 2 List
Create
Curve
Method: Intersect
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If pressed, the Intersect Parameters subordinate form will
appear. See Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form
(p. 157) for more information.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the existing pair of intersecting surfaces or solid
faces either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by
cursor selecting them. Examples: Surface 10 Solid 10.1.
The Surface Select menu can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Curve Intersect Method With 2 Surface Option Example
Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Intersect method with the 2 Surface option. The curve is
located at the intersection of Surfaces 1 and 2.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Option: 2 Surface
Intersect Parameters...
Auto Execute
Surface 1 List
Surface 2 List
Create
Curve
Method: Intersect
Surface 1
Surface 2
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
2
2
4
4
6
1
6
1
5
7
5
2
1
2
1
1
3
3
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Intersect Method With 2 Surface Option Example
This example is similar to the previous example, except the second surface is instead defined by
Curves 2 and 3 by using the Surface select menu icon and selecting Curves 2 and 3 to create
Surface 2.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
4
Geometry
Option: 2 Surface
Intersect Parameters...
Auto Execute
Surface 1 List
Surface 2 List
Create
Curve
Method: Intersect
Surface 1
Construct 2CurveSurface
-Apply-
Surface Select Menu Icon
Before:
After:
Z
Z
Y
Y
X
X
2
2
1
1
4
4
8
7
8
9
7
3
2
4
2
1
3
1
3
3

Curve Intersect Method With 2 Surface Option Example
Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Intersect/2 Surface option. The curve is located at the
intersection of Surfaces 1 and 4.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Option: 2 Surface
Intersect Parameters...
Auto Execute
Surface 1 List
Surface 2 List
Create
Curve
Method: Intersect
Surface 1
Surface 4
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
X
Y
X
4
1
4
1
1
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Curves at the Intersection of a Plane and a Surface
The Intersect method with the Plane-Surface option creates curves at the intersection of a defined
plane and a surface or a solid face. The plane and the surface or face must completely intersect
each other.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Option: Plane-Surface
Intersect Parameters...
Auto Execute
Plane List
Surface List
Create
Curve
Method: Intersect
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If pressed, the Intersect Parameters subordinate form will
appear. See Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form
(p. 157) for more information.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify in Plane List, one or more plane definitions that
intersect with the specified surfaces or faces, either by
entering the vector coordinates or by cursor defining them
using the Vector Select menu. Examples: {[0 0 0][0 0 1]},
Coord 0.1.
Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or solid faces
either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor
selecting them. The Surface Select menu can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces
or faces.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Curve Intersect Method With Plane-Surface Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 1 which is located at the intersection of Surface 1 and a plane whose normal is
defined at {[0 2.5 0][0 3.5 0]}.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Option: Plane-Surface
Intersect Parameters...
Auto Execute
Plane List
Surface List
Create
Curve
Method: Intersect
{[0 2.5 0][0 3.5 0]}
Surface 1
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Z
Y
2
1
After:
2
5
1
Y
X
X
1
1
3
6
4
3
4

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Intersect Method With the Plane-Surface Option Example
Creates Curve 1 which is located at the intersection of Surface 2 and a plane whose normal is
defined by the Z axis of Coord 1, Coord 1.3, by using the Axis select menu icon listed below.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Axis Select Menu Icon
3
Geometry
Option: Plane-Surface
Intersect Parameters...
Auto Execute
Plane List
Surface List
Create
Curve
Method: Intersect
Coord 1.3
Surface 2
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Y
Z
Y
X
X
2
Z
6
T
1 R
Z
6
5
5
21
1
T
7
R

Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form
The Intersect Parameters subordinate form appears when the Intersect Parameters button is
pressed on the Create/Curve/Intersect application form.
Intersect Parameters
Curves per Intersection
0
Max. Deviation Tolerance
0.005
Intersect Tolerance
0.05
OK Cancel
Active if PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is ON, on the
Create/Curve/Intersect application form. Specify the
number of parametric cubic curves to create at each
intersection.
Used by MSC.Patran to approximate the curve
intersection using a tolerance based cubic spline.
Used by MSC.Patran to determine how many points to
create to represent the curve intersection.
☞ More Help:
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Planes
This form is used to create a curve from the intersection of two planes.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Intersect
Curve ID List
1
Curve Type
PATRAN 2 Convention
Option: 2 Plane
Curve Length
Input Length
Calculate Length
6.9282
Distance
Deltax
Deltay
Deltaz
Calculate Curve Length
Auto Execute
Plane 1 List
Plane 2 List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If ON, MSC.Patran will create parametric cubic curves.
Otherwise, the new curves will be a Straight Line geometry
type. Parametric cubic geometry is supported by the PATRAN
2 Neutral File for import or export.
If Input Length is ON, enter the length of the new curve, in
model units. By default, the length is calculated from the
current viewport limits to simulate an infinite construction entity.
If Calculate Length is ON, a small subordinate form called
Length Calculation Points will appear. You must enter the point
locations in the Point 1 and 2 databoxes that the curve length
will be calculated from.
Once the points have been entered, press the Calculate
Curve Length button to display the curve length in the databox
based on Distance, Deltax, Deltay, Deltaz selections
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify in Plane 1 List, one or more plane definitions that
intersect with the specified planes in Plane 2 List, either by
entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting
them. The Plane Select menu can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate planes. Examples:
Coord 0.1, Plane 1
Specify in Plane 2 List, one or more plane definitions that
intersect with the specified planes in Plane 1 List, either by
entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting
them. The Plane Select menu can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate planes.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Creating Curve Intersect from Two Planes Example
Create curve 1 with a length of 0.334 from the intersection of plane 1 and 2.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Intersect
Curve ID List
1
Curve Type
PATRAN 2 Convention
Option: 2 Plane
Curve Length
Input Length
Calculate Length
0.334
Distance
Deltax
Deltay
Deltaz
Calculate Curve Length
Auto Execute
Plane 1 List
Plane 1
Plane 2 List
Plane 2
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
1
Y
X
X
1
2
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
2

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Manifold Curves Onto a Surface
Manifold Curves onto a Surface with the 2 Point Option
The Manifold method with the 2 Point option creates curves directly on an existing set of
surfaces or solid faces by using two point locations on the surface. The point locations must lie
on the surface or face. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations
provided on the Point select menu.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Option:
Option:
Geometry
Manifold Parameters...
2 Point
Auto Execute
Create
Curve
Method: Manifold
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Active if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. When this toggle is
pressed, the Manifold Parameters subordinate form will
appear. See Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form
(p. 167) for more information.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.

Option: 2 Point
Auto Execute
Surface List
Starting Point List
Ending Point List
-Apply-
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or faces that the
new curves will lie on, either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard or by cursor defining them using the Surface Select
menu. Examples: Surface 1 10, Solid 5.2.
Specify in Starting Point List and Ending Point List, the
existing point locations either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard or by cursor selecting them. Examples: Point 10,
Surface 5.2.1, Solid 10.3.2.1. The Surface Select menu can be
used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
surfaces or faces.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Manifold Method With the 2 Point Option Example
Creates three curves starting with Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/2 Point option. The
curves are created on Surface 1 between Point 7 and Points 2,5 and 8.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Option: Manifold Parameters...
Option:
2 Point
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
Starting Point List
Point 7
Ending Point List
Point 2 5 8
Create
Curve
Method: Manifold
-Apply-
Before:
6
6
Z
Z
Y
After:
Y
X
X
8
8
5
5
1
1
4
2
2
2
7
7
4
4

Curve Manifold Method With the 2 Point Option On a Face Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 1 using the Manifold/2 Point option on a face of Solid 1 that is between Points 5
and 12.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Option: Manifold Parameters...
Option:
2 Point
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1.5
Starting Point List
Point 5
Ending Point List
Point 12
Create
Curve
Method: Manifold
-Apply-
Before:
1
8
Y
Z
X
After:
1
8
Y
Z
X
6
6
9
9
12
12
1
1
1
5
5
11
11
7
7
10
10

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Manifold Curves onto a Surface With the N-Points Option
The Manifold/N-Points option creates curves directly on a set of surfaces or solid faces by using
two or more point locations on the surface. The point locations must lie on the surface or face
and they can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point
select menu.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
4
Option:
Option:
Surface
Geometry
Manifold Parameters...
Point List
Create
Curve
Method: Manifold
N-Points
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Active if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. When the Manifold
Parameters... button is pressed, the Manifold Parameters
subordinate form will appear. See Manifold Parameters
Subordinate Form (p. 167) for more information.
Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or faces that you
want to create curves on, either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard or by cursor defining them using the Surface Select
menu. Examples: Surface 1 10, Solid 5.2.
Specify in Point List the existing point locations either by entering
the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting them. Examples:
Point 10, Surface 5.2.1, Solid 10.3.2.1. The Surface Select menu
can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate surfaces or faces.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Curve Manifold Method With N-Points Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/N-Points option. The curve is created on Surface 1
through Points 5, 8, 17, 18 and 4.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Option: Manifold Parameters...
Option:
Surface
Point List
Create
Curve
Method: Manifold
Surface 1
N-Points
Point 5 8 17 18 4
-Apply-
Before:
6
6
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
5
5
8
8
17
1
17
1
18
1
18
7
7
4
4

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Manifold Method With N-Points Option On a Face Example
Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/N-Points option. The curve is created on the top
face of Solid 1, through Points 6, 12, 13 and 5.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Option: Manifold Parameters...
Option:
Surface
Point List
Create
Curve
Method: Manifold
Solid 1.5
N-Points
Point 6 12 13 5
-Apply-
Before:
1
1
X
8
8
After:
X
Y Z
Y Z
6
6
9
9
12
12
1
1
1
13
13
5
5
11
11
7
7
10
10

Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Manifold Parameters subordinate form appears when the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is
ON and the Manifold Parameters button is pressed on the Create/Curve/Manifold application
form.
Manifold Parameters
Curves per Manifold
0
Manifold Tolerance
0.005
OK Cancel
Specify the number of parametric cubic curves to create
between each pair of points (for the 2 Point option) or
through a set of given points (for the N-Points option).
Used by MSC.Patran to approximate the manifold using
a tolerance based cubic spline.
☞ More Help:
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Curves Normally Between a Point and a Curve (Normal
Method)
The Normal method creates straight parametric cubic curves from a point location, normally to
a curve or an edge. The point location can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations
provided on the Point select menu.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Auto Execute
Point List
Curve List
Create
Curve
Method: Normal
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Specify in Point List, the existing point locations, either by
entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor defining
them using the Point Select menu. Examples: Point 1 10,
Curve 5.2.
Specify in Curve List, the existing curves or edges either by
entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting
them. Examples: Curve 10, Solid 5.2.1. The Curve Select
menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate curves or edges.
Point
New Curve
☞ More Help:
Original Curve
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)

Curve Normal Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 6 using the Create/Normal method. The curve is created from Point 13 normally
to the edge of Curve 5.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
6
Geometry
Auto Execute
Point List
Curve List
Create
Curve
Method: Normal
Point 13
Curve 5
-Apply-
Before:
13
13
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
6
5
14
5
12
12

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Normal Method From An Edge Example
Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Normal method. The curve is created from Point 20 normally
to an edge of Surface 4 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Auto Execute
Point List
Curve List
Create
Curve
Method: Normal
Point 20
Curve 4
-Apply-
Curve Select Menu Icon
Before:
After:
Z
Z
Y
Y
X
X
16
16
18
18
4
4
17
17
19
21
19
1
20
20

Creating Offset Curves
Creating Constant Offset Curve
This form is used to create a constant offset curve.
Action:
Geometry
Geometry
Create
Object: Curve
Method: Offset
Curve ID List
1
Offset Parameters
Constant Offset Value
1.0
Repeat Count
1
Auto Execute
Curve List
Draw Direction Vector
Reverse Direction
Reset Graphics
-Apply-
Specify the Offset Curve type to create:
1. Constant Offset
2. Variable Offset
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Specify the constant offset value of the curve.
Specify the number of copies of the offset curve to create using
the Repeat Count parameter.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the curve used to create an offset curve from either
by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Curve 10 11. The Curve select menu
that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate curves.
Draws the direction vector of the curve to create the offset
curve from.
Reverses the direction vector of the curve to create the
offset curve from.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Constant Offset Curve Example
Create offset curves 2 thru 4 by offsetting a distance of .5 from curve 1 using a repeat count of 3.
Action:
Geometry
Geometry
Create
Object: Curve
Method: Offset
Curve ID List
2
Offset Parameters
Constant Offset Value
.5
Repeat Count
3
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1
Draw Direction Vector
Reverse Direction
Reset Graphics
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
X
After:
Y
Z
X
1
2
3
1
4

Creating Variable Offset Curve
This form is used to create a variable offset curve.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Offset
Curve ID List
1
Offset Parameters
Start Value
1.0
End Value
1.0
Repeat Count
1
[Parameterization Control...]
Auto Execute
Curve List
Draw Direction Vector
Reverse Direction
Reset Graphics
-Apply-
Specify the Offset Curve type to create:
1. Constant Offset
2. Variable Offset
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Reverses the direction vector of the curve to create the
offset curve from.
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Specify the start offset value of the curve.
Specify the end offset value of the curve.
Specify the number of copies of the offset curve to create using
the Repeat Count parameter.
Specify the Parameterization Control of the offset curve.
Parameter Value: Defines the parametric values of the start
and end offset distances.
Arc Length: Function of arc length.
Specify the curve used to create an offset curve from either
by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Curve 10 11. The Curve select menu
that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate curves.
Draws the direction vector of the curve to create the offset
curve from.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Parameterization Control for Variable Offset Curve
This form is used to define the parameterization control for the offset curve. There are two types;
Arc Length and Parameter Value.
0.0
Parameterization Control
Arc Length
Parameter Value
Start Parameter Value
0.0
End Parameter Value
1.0
1.0
0.0
1.0
OK Cancel
Define the start and end Parameter Values for the start and end distance of
the offset curve by using the slidebar or entering the value in the databox.
The start Parameter Value must be less than the End Parameter Value.
(Used for when the Parameterization Method is Parameter Value.
Select the Parameterization Method for the
offset curve. (Arc Length is Default )

Creating Variable Offset Curve Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Create curves 2 thru 3 from curve 1 by offsetting a start distance of .25 and an end distance of 1.
Use parameter values of .5 and 1.0.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Offset
Curve ID List
2
Offset Parameters
Start Value
0.25
End Value
1.0
Repeat Count
1
[Parameterization Control...]
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1
Draw Direction Vector
Reverse Direction
Reset Graphics
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
X
After:
Y
Z
X
1
1
2
3

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Projecting Curves Onto Surfaces
The Project method creates curves by projecting a set of curves or edges along a defined
projection vector, onto a surface or solid face.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
Create
Curve
Method: Project
Project Parameters...
Option: Normal to Plane
Available options are:
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If pressed, the Project Parameters subordinate form will
appear. See Project Parameters Subordinate Form
(p. 182) for more information.
Normal to Plane - The curves or edges in Curve List will be projected
through a vector that is normal to at least one of the curves or edges that
define a plane.
Normal to Surf - The curves or edges in Curve List will be projected
through a vector that is normal to the surface or solid face specified in
Surface List.
Define Vector - The project direction is defined by the vector coordinates
entered in the Projection Vector databox which is expressed within the
Refer. Coordinate Frame. Example: . The Vector Select menu will
appear to allow you alternate ways to cursor define the vector definition.
View Factor - The project direction is defined by the view angle in the
current viewport. MSC.Patran will project the existing points using the
normal direction of the screen.

If ON, after Project completes, the existing curves specified in Curve
List will be deleted from the database.
Option: Normal to Plane
Projection Vector
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Surface List
-Apply-
Used if the Define Vector option is chosen. Either enter the
vector coordinates that are expressed in the Refer.
Coordinate Frame, or use the Vector Select Menu that
appears to cursor define the projection vector.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Specify in Curve List, the existing curves or edges that you
want to project onto the surfaces or faces listed in Surface
List.
Specify in Surface List, the surfaces or faces that the curves
or edges will be projected onto.
You can either cursor select the existing entities or enter the
IDs from the keyboard. Example: For curves - Curve 1:10,
Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10 Solid 5.1.
The Curve Select menu and Surface Select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate curves or edges, and surfaces or faces.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
Viewing Menu (Ch. 5) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Project Method With the Normal to Plane Option Example
Creates Curve 7 using the Create Project/Normal to Plane option. The curve is projected from
Curve 6 onto Surface 2 that is normal to the plane defined by Curve 6.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
7
Geometry
Option: Project Parameters...
Option: Normal to Plane
Projection Vector
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 6
Surface List
Surface 2
Create
Curve
Method: Project
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Z
Y
After:
Y
6
X
12
6
X
12
15
15
7
5
5
2
2
16
14
14
13
13

Curve Project Method With the Normal to Surf Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 8 using the Create/Project/Normal to Surf option. The curve is projected from
Curve 6 normally onto Surface 2. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curve 6 is
deleted.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
8
Geometry
Option: Project Parameters...
Option: Normal to Surf
Projection Vector
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 6
Surface List
Surface 2
Create
Curve
Method: Project
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Z
Y
Y
After:
6
X
12
X
12
15
8
7
7
5
5
17
2
2
16
16
14
14
13
13

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Project Method With Define Vector Option Example
Creates Curve 7 with the Define Vector option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 onto Surface
2 through the vector that is defined by Points 19 and 20 by using the Vector select menu icon
listed below.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
7
Geometry
Option: Project Parameters...
Option:
Define Vector
Projection Vector
Construct2PointVector
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 6
Surface List
Surface 2
Create
Curve
Method: Project
-Apply-
Vector Select Menu Icon
Before:
Z
After:
Y
Z
Y
6
19
X 12
19
X 12
7
2
2
20
20
21
14
14
13
13

Curve Project Method With View Vector Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 7 with the View Vector option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 onto Surface
2 through the view angle of the current viewport. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed
and Curve 6 is deleted.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
7
Geometry
Option: Project Parameters...
Option:
View Vector
Projection Vector
Construct2PointVector
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 6
Surface List
Surface 2
Create
Curve
Method: Project
-Apply-
Before:
Y
After:
12 Z X
Y
12 Z X
6
7
15
2
2
13
13
14
14

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Project Parameters Subordinate Form
The Project Parameters subordinate form appears when the Project Parameters button is pressed
on the Create/Curve/Project application form.
Project Parameters
Curves per Projection
0
Projection Tolerance
0.005
OK Cancel
Disabled if the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is OFF on
the Create/Curve/Project form. If PATRAN 2 Convention
is ON, specify the number of parametric cubic curves to
create for a given projection location.
Used by MSC.Patran to approximate the curve
projection location using a tolerance based cubic spline.
☞ More Help:
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Creating Piecewise Linear Curves
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The PWL method will create a set of piecewise linear (or straight) parametric cubic curves
between a set of existing point locations. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or
other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Point List
Geometry
Create
Curve
PWL
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve
to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions.
Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations to connect the curves between, either by
entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor
selecting the point locations. Examples: Point 1:10,
Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select menu can be
used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate point locations.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve PWL Method Example
Creates seven curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/PWL method. The straight curves
are created through Points 12 through 18 and Node 1.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
5
Point List
Geometry
Create
Curve
PWL
Point 12: 18 Node 1
-Apply-
Before:
13
12
Y
13
5
Z
After:
12
Y
Z
X
X
6
14
15
14
7
15
8
17
9
17
16
16
10
18
11
18
1
119

Creating Spline Curves
Creating Spline Curves with the Loft Spline Option
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Spline method using the Loft Spline option creates piecewise cubic polynomial spline curves
that pass through at least three point locations. MSC.Patran processes the slope continually
between the point segments. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations provided on the Point select menu.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
Create
Curve
Method: Spline
Loft Spline
Curves per Spline
0
End Point Slope Control
Auto Execute
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions.
Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number
of parametric cubic curves to compose the spline.
If ON, End Point Slope Control allows you to use the Start and
End Point Tangent Vector databoxes to define the tangent
vector for the slopes at the spline’s start point and end point
locations.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
End Point Slope Control
Auto Execute
Start Point Tangent Vector
End Point Tangent Vector
Point List
-Apply-
Used if End Point Slope Control toggle is ON.
Specify in Start Point Tangent Vector, the vector definition
of the slope at the first point listed in Point List.
Specify in End Point Tangent Vector, the vector definition of
the slope at the last point listed in Point List.
You can either enter the vector coordinates that are
expressed in the global rectangular frame, Coord 0
(Example: ); or you can use the Vector Select menu
that appears to cursor define the slope’s vector.
Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations to
define the spline, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard
or by cursor selecting the point locations. Examples: Point
1:10, Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select menu can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate point
locations.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Curve Spline Method With Loft Spline Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Spline method with the Loft Spline option. The curve is
created through Points 1 through 5. Notice that since End Point Slope Control are not pressed in,
Start and End Point Tangent Vector are disabled.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
Loft Spline
End Point Slope Control
Auto Execute
Start Point Tangent Vector
End Point Tangent Vector
Point List
Point 1:5
Create
Curve
Method: Spline
Curves per Spline
0
-Apply-
Before:
1
After:
1
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
2
2
3
3
1
4
4
5
5

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Spline Method With Loft Spline Option Example
This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curve 2 is created with End Point
Slope Control is pressed in. The Start Point Tangent Vector is defined by Points 1 and 2, and the
End Point Tangent Vector is defined by Points 4 and 5, using the Vector select menu icon listed
below.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Curve ID List
1
Option: Loft Spline
End Point Slope Control
Auto Execute
Start Point Tangent Vector
End Point Tangent Vector
Point List
Point 1:5
Create
Curve
Method: Spline
Curves per Spline
0
Construct 2PointVector
Construct 2PointVector
-Apply-
Vector Select Menu Icon
Before:
1
1
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
2
2
3
3
1
21
4
4
5
5

Creating Spline Curves with the B-Spline Option
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Spline/B-Spline option creates spline curves that pass through at least three point locations.
MSC.Patran processes the slope continually between the point segments. The point locations can
be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
B-Spline
B-Spline Parameters
2
Order
Create
Curve
Method: Spline
Curves per Spline
Interpolation
Closed
Parametrization Method
◆
◆
Chord Length
Uniform
Point List
-Apply-
10
Specify the points, vertices, nodes or
other point locations to define the spline,
either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard or by cursor selecting the point
locations. Examples: Point 1:10,
Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select
menu can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number
of parametric cubic curves to compose the spline.
Specify for Order, the B-Spline’s order of the polynomials. As Order
increases, MSC.Patran will create an increasingly smoother spline.
MSC.Patran will not create the spline if Order is greater than the
number of points listed in Point List.
If Interpolation is ON, MSC.Patran will force the spline through the
given points. If it is OFF, the spline will only pass through the first
and last points.
If Closed is ON, MSC.Patran will created a closed spline. If it is
OFF, the spline will be open ended.
If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points
along the B-spline is based on the chord length distances relative to
the locations of the spline’s interior points. This means the curve may
or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the
interior points are located.
If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points along the
B-spline will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the specified
points in the Point List are located. That is, the curve will be always
uniformly parameterized.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric
Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Spline Method With B-Spline Option Example
Creates Curve 1 with the B-Spline option. The B-spline has an order of 3 and uses Points 1
through 5. Since Interpolation is not pressed, the curve is not forced to pass through all the
points.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Option: B-Spline
Curves per Spline
0
B-Spline Parameters
3
Order
Interpolation
Closed
Parametrization Method
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Point List
Point 1:5
Create
Curve
Method: Spline
-Apply-
10
Before:
1
After:
1
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
2
2
3
3
1
4
4
5
5

Curve Spline Method With B-Spline Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
This example is the same as the previous example, except that the order for Curve 2 is three,
instead of five.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Curve ID List
2
Option: B-Spline
Curves per Spline
0
B-Spline Parameters
5
Order
Interpolation
Closed
Parametrization Method
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Point List
Point 1:5
Create
Curve
Method: Spline
-Apply-
10
Before:
1
After:
1
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
2
2
3
1
3
1
4
4
5
5

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Spline Method With B-Spline Option Example
This example is the same as the previous example, except Interpolation is pressed and Curve 3
is forced to pass through Points 1 through 5.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
3
Geometry
Option: B-Spline
Curves per Spline
0
B-Spline Parameters
5
Order
Interpolation
Closed
Parametrization Method
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Point List
Point 1:5
Create
Curve
Method: Spline
-Apply-
10
Before:
1
1
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
2
2
3
1
3
1
4
4
5
5

CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creating Curves Tangent Between Two Curves (TanCurve Method)
The TanCurve method creates straight parametric cubic curves that are tangent between two
existing curves or edges. The curves or edges cannot be straight, or else MSC.Patran will not be
able to find the tangent location on each curve.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Create
Curve
Method: TanCurve
Trim Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve/Point 1 List
Curve/Point 2 List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the curves listed in the Curve/Point 1
and 2 Lists. Each curve is trimmed from the tangent point to the
end of the original curve.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify in Curve/Point 1 List and Curve/Point 2 List, the
pair of curves or edges, along with their endpoints that the
new curve will be created between.
For each listbox, the Curve Select menu and the Point Select
menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to cursor define
the appropriate curves or edges, and the points, vertices,
nodes, or other appropriate endpoint locations.
New Curve
Original Curve 2
Portions To Be Trimmed
Original Curve 1
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric
Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve TanCurve Method Example
Creates Curve 10 using the Create/TanCurve method. The curve is tangent between Curves 9
and 8 with Points 26 and 25 as the endpoints selected in the Point 1 and 2 Lists. Notice that Trim
Original Curves is pressed.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
10
Geometry
Create
Curve
Method: TanCurve
Trim Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve/Point 1 List
ConstructPoint CurveUOn Curve
Curve/Point 2 List
ConstructPoint CurveUOnCurve
-Apply-
Before:
9
26 28
After:
9
Y
Z
X
29
10
26 28
Y
Z
X
23
23
30
8
8
25
25

Creating Curves Tangent Between Curves and Points
(TanPoint Method)
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The TanPoint method creates straight parametric cubic curves that are tangent between a point
location and a curve or an edge. The curve or edge cannot be straight, or else MSC.Patran will
not be able to find the tangent location. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other
point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Closest Tangent Only
Trim Original Curves
Auto Execute
Point List
Curve List
Create
Curve
Method: TanPoint
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If Closest Tangent Only is chosen, the new curve will be
created at the closest tangent point to the existing point
location.
If All Tangents is chosen, MSC.Patran will preview each
curve to be created at all possible tangent points and ask if you
want to create a curve at each possible location.
If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the curves listed in the Curve List.
Each curve is trimmed from the tangent point to the end of the
original curve.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Closest Tangent Only
Trim Original Curves
Auto Execute
Point List
Curve List
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify in Point List, the points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations either by entering the IDs from the keyboard
(Examples: Point 1 10, Curve 10.1, Node 20); or by cursor
selecting the location using the Point Select menu.
Specify in Curve List, the curves or edges either by entering
the IDs or by cursor selecting them using the Curve Select
menu. Examples: Curve 1:10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1.
Point
New Curve
Original Curve
Portion to trim
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)

Curve TanPoint Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 10 using the Create/TanPoint method. The curve is tangent between Point 25 and
Curve 9. Notice that Trim Original Curves is pressed in and Curve 9 is trimmed.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
10
Geometry
Closest Tangent Only
Trim Original Curves
Auto Execute
Point List
Curve List
Create
Curve
Method: TanPoint
Point 25
Curve 9
-Apply-
Before:
9
26 28
After:
Y
9
Z
X
29
26 28
Y
Z
X
10
25
25

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve TanPoint Method Example
Creates Curve 1 using the Create/TanPoint method. The curve is tangent between Point 9 and
an edge of Surface 1.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Closest Tangent Only
Trim Original Curves
Auto Execute
Point List
Curve List
Create
Curve
Method: TanPoint
Point 9
Curve 1.2
-Apply-
Before:
5
5
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
1
1
10
1
1
6
6
1
2
2
9
9

Creating Curves, Surfaces and Solids Through a Vector Length
(XYZ Method)
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The XYZ method creates parametric cubic curves, surface, or solids from a specified vector
length and origin. The origin can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex,
node or other point location provided by the Point select menu.
Action:
Object:
Method:
ID List
1
Geometry
Create
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Vector Coordinates List
Auto Execute
Origin Coordinates List
[0 0 0]
XYZ
-Apply-
Set to either: Curve, Surface or Solid.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve,
surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in
the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Used to express the coordinate values entered in the Vector
Coordinates List and the Point Coordinate List, within the
specified coordinate frame. Default is the global rectangular
frame, Coord 0.
Enter the vector coordinates to define the lengths and direction
for the new curves, surfaces or solids. Enter the coordinates
either from the keyboard (example: ); or cursor define
the vector using the Vector Select menu that appears.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the origin or starting point location of the new curve,
surface or solid. You can express the origin’s point location
either by entering the cartesian coordinates from the
keyboard, or by using the Point Select menu to cursor select
the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point
locations. Examples: [ 10 0 0], Surface 10.1.1, Node 20, Solid
10.4.3.1.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve XYZ Method Example
Creates Curve 3 using the Create/XYZ method, whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose
vector orientation and length is .
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
3
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Vector Coordinates List
Auto Execute
Origin Coordinates List
Point 6
Create
Curve
XYZ
-Apply-
Before:
6
6
Z
Z
After:
Y
Y
X
X
3
7

Surface XYZ Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Surface 3 using the Create/XYZ method, whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose
vector orientation and length is .
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
3
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Vector Coordinates List
Auto Execute
Origin Coordinates List
Point 6
Create
Surface
XYZ
-Apply-
Before:
6
Z
After:
Y
Z
Y
X
7
X
6
3
8
9

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid XYZ Method Example
Creates Solid 1 whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose vector orientation and length is which is expressed within the Reference Coordinate Frame, Coord 0.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Solid ID List
1
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Vector Coordinates List
Auto Execute
Origin Coordinates List
Point 6
Create
Solid
XYZ
-Apply-
Before:
Z
6
After:
Y
Z
11
10
X
Y
X
7
6
1
12
13
8
9

Creating Involute Curves
Creating Involute Curves with the Angles Option
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Involute/Angles option creates parametric cubic curves from a point location. The point
location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Involute curves are like the unwinding of an imaginary string from a circular bobbin. Intended
for gear designers, the Angles option requires the angle of the unwinding and the starting angle.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Curve ID List
1
Option:
Angles
Involute Parameters
Angle to unwind the involute
0.0
Starting angle for involute
0.0
Curves per Point
1
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Involute Axis
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Auto Execute
Point List
Create
Curve
Method: Involute
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Specify in Angle to unwind the involute, the angle in degrees
to unwind the involute.
Specify in Starting angle for involute, the starting angle in
degrees of the involute curve.
Specify in Curves per Point, how many curves will compose the
total involute. This is only used in conjunction with the Patran 2
Convention.
Define in Involute Axis, a vector that is perpendicular to the
plane the involute curve will be in.
Either enter the vector coordinates that will be expressed in the
Refer. Coordinate Frame (default is the global rectangular
frame, Coord 0). Example: {[0 0 0][1 0 0]. Or, use the Vector
Select menu and cursor define the vector definition.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Involute Parameters
Angle to unwind the involute
0.0
Starting angle for involute
0.0
Curves per Point
1
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Involute Axis
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Auto Execute
Point List
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the existing point, vertex, node or other point
location that defines the starting point of the involute, either
by entering the ID from the keyboard or by cursor selecting
the point location. Examples: Point 1, Surface 10.1 Node
20. The Point Select menu can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate point location.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

Curve Involute Method With the Angles Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates four curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/Involute/Angles option, where the
curve is unwound 360 degrees about the involute axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}, from Point 13.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Curve ID List
5
Option: Angles
Involute Parameters
Angle to unwind the involute
360
Starting angle for involute
0.0
Curves per Point
4
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Involute Axis
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Auto Execute
Point List
Point 13
Create
Curve
Method: Involute
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
16
7
8
15
6
14
135
17
13

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Involute Curves with the Radii Option
The Involute/Radii option creates parametric cubic curves from a point location. The point
location can be a point, vertex, node or other point location provided on the Point select menu.
Involute curves are like the unwinding of an imaginary string from a circular bobbin. Intended
for the material modeling community, the Radii option requires the base radius of the bobbin
and the radius of the stop of the curve.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Curve ID List
1
Option:
Radii
Involute Parameters
Base radius of the bobbin
0.0
Radius of the stop
0.0
Curves per Point
1
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Involute Axis
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Auto Execute
Point List
Create
Curve
Method: Involute
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Specify in Base radius of the bobbin, the base radius, in model
units, of the bobbin.
Specify in Radius of the Stop, the radius of the stop of the
involute curve.
Specify in Curves per Point, how many curves will compose the
total involute.
Define in Involute Axis, a vector that is perpendicular to the plane
the involute curve will be in.
Either enter the vector coordinates that will be expressed in the
Refer. Coordinate Frame (default is the global rectangular frame,
Coord 0). Example: {[0 0 0][1 0 0]. Or, use the Vector Select menu
and cursor define the vector definition.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the point, vertex, node or other point location that
defines the starting point of the involute, either by entering the
ID from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point location.
Examples: Point 1, Surface 10.1 Node 20. The Point Select
menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate point location.

Curve Involute Method With the Radii Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates six curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/Involute/Radii option, where the
curve is unwound starting with a base radius of 0.1 and a stop radius of 2, about the involute
axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}, starting from Point 13.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Curve ID List
5
Option:
Radii
Involute Parameters
Base radius of the bobbin
0.1
Radius of the stop
2
Curves per Point
6
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Involute Axis
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Auto Execute
Point List
Create
Curve
Method: Involute
Point 13
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
10
19
X
15
6
18 9
7
14
16
5
13
8
13
17

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Revolving Curves, Surfaces and Solids
The Revolve method creates curves, surfaces or solids by the rotation of a point, curve or surface
location, respectively. The new geometric entity is rotated about a defined axis. Point locations
can be points, vertices, or nodes, Curve locations can be curves or edges. Surface locations can
be surfaces or solid faces.
Action:
Object:
ID List
1
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Revolve Parameters
Total Angle
90.0
Offset Angle
0.0
per
1
Auto Execute
List
Create
Method: Revolve
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions is ON which means you do not need
to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Set to either: Curve,
Surface or Solid.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next entity type to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Specify in Axis, the coordinate values of the rotation vector
that will be expressed within the Refer. Coordinate Frame
(default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0). Example:
{[10 0 0][10 0 1]}.
You can instead use the Vector Select menu that appears, to
cursor define the rotation vector in the Axis databox.
Specify in Total Angle, the total positive or negative rotation
angle, in degrees, using “right-hand” rule.
Specify in Offset Angle, an optional offset angle in degrees.
(Default is no offset.)
If PATRAN 2 Convention is ON, specify in per
, the number of curves, surfaces or solids to create
within the specified Total Angle. Otherwise if PATRAN 2
Convention is OFF, per is disabled.
Specify the points, curves or surfaces either by cursor selecting
them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point
5 10, Curve 10, Surface 1:10.
The Select menu that appears at the bottom can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points,
vertices, nodes, curves, edges, faces or solids.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

Curve Revolve Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curves 5 and 6 using the Create/Revolve method, where the curves are created from
Points 12 and 13 about the axis, {[0 0 0][0 0 1]} for 180 degrees, with an offset of 30 degrees.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
5
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Revolve Parameters
Total Angle
180.0
Offset Angle
30.0
Curves per Point
1
Auto Execute
Point List
Create
Curve
Method: Revolve
Point 12 13
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
17
X
X
6
15
12
5 16
14
12
13
13

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Revolve Method Example
Creates Surface 1 where the surface is created from a curve defined by Points 1 and 2 using the
Curve select menu icon listed below. The surface is revolved 45 degrees about the axis {Point 1
[x1 y1 1]}.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Surface ID List
1
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis
{Point 1 [x1 y1 1]}
Sweep Parameters
Total Angle
45.0
Offset Angle
0.0
Surfaces per Curve
1
Auto Execute
Curve List
Create
Surface
Method: Revolve
Construct 2 Point Curve
-Apply-
Curve Select Menu Icon
Before:
Y
Z
After:
X
Y
Z
X
1 2
1
1 2
3

Surface Revolve Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates four surfaces starting with Surface 2 using the Create/Revolve method, where the
surfaces are created from Curves 9 through 12 about the axis, {[0 0 0 ] [ 1 0 0 ]} for 360 degrees.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Surface ID List
2
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis
{Point 1 [x1 y1 1]}
Sweep Parameters
Total Angle
360.0
Offset Angle
0.0
Surfaces per Curve
1
Auto Execute
Curve List
Create
Surface
Method: Revolve
Curve 9:12
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
X
Z
X
17 9 18
10
19
10
18
179
2 3
4
5
19
11
11
21
12
20
20
12
21

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Revolve Method
Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Revolve method, where the solid is created from Surface 2. The
axis is defined by the Points 15 and 12 using the Axis select menu icon listed below, for a rotation
of 90 degrees.
Action:
Object:
Solid ID List
1
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis
Construct2PointAxis
Sweep Parameters
Total Angle
90.0
Offset Angle
0.0
Solids per Surface
1
Auto Execute
Surface List
Create
Solid
Method: Revolve
Surface 2
-Apply-
Axis Select Menu Icon
Before:
17
13 14
12
After:
Y
Z
Y
X
Z
X
13
12
2
1
16
2
15
14
15

Solid Revolve Method
Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Revolve method, where the solid is created from Surface 1
about the X axis of Coord 1 (by using the Axis select menu listed below) for 90 degrees.
Action:
Object:
Solid ID List
1
Axis Select Menu Icon
1
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis
Coord 1.1
Sweep Parameters
Total Angle
90.0
Offset Angle
0.0
Solids per Surface
1
Auto Execute
Surface List
Create
Solid
Method: Revolve
Surface 1
-Apply-
Before:
6
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
5
2
1
X
X
2
1
1
1
1
7
8
3
4
Z
3
Z
Y
4
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
1 X
Y
1 X

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Orthogonal Curves (2D Normal Method)
Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Input Length Option
The 2D Normal/Input Length option creates straight parametric cubic curves that lie on a
defined 2D plane and is perpendicular to a curve or an edge. The curve is defined from a
specified point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations
provided on the Point select menu.
Geometry
Curve ID List
1
Curve Length
◆
◆
Action:
Object:
Input Length
Calculate Length
0.0
◆ Distance ◆
◆ Deltaic ◆
Deltay
Deltaz
Calculate Curve Length
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Flip Curve Direction
Auto Execute
Point List
Curve List
Create
Curve
Method: 2D Normal
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If Input Length is ON, enter the length of the new curve, in
model units. See Creating Orthogonal Curves with the
Calculate Length Option (p. 218) for information on the
Calculate Length button.
Enter in Construction Plane List, either the coordinate values of a
vector that is normal to the 2D plane that the new curve will lie in
(example: {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}); or cursor define the vector using the
Vector Select menu.

Construction Plane List
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Flip Curve Direction
Auto Execute
Point List
Curve List
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
If Flip Curve Direction is ON, MSC.Patran will reverse the new
curve’s parametric ξ 1 direction, relative to the curve length and
the normal direction of the construction plane. The ξ 1 direction
is defined by the curve’s connectivity.
Enter in Point List, the point, vertex, node or other point
location the curve will be created from.
Enter in Curve List, the curve or edge that the new curve will
be perpendicular to. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard or
use the Point Select menu and the Curve Select menu to
cursor define the locations.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Connectivity (p. 15)
Topology (p. 10)
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve 2D Normal Method With the Input Length Option
Creates Curve 1 with the Input Length option, where the curve is 1 unit long; it lies within the
plane whose normal is the Z axis of Coord 3; it is perpendicular to the top edge of Surface 1; and
its starting point is near Point 3.
Geometry
Curve ID List
1
Curve Length
◆
◆
Action:
Object:
Input Length
Calculate Length
1.0
◆ Distance ◆
◆ Deltax ◆
Deltay
Deltaz
Calculate Curve Length
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List
Cord 3.3
Flip Curve Direction
Auto Execute
Point List
Curve List
Create
Curve
Method: 2D Normal
Point 3
Surface 1.4
-Apply-
Before:
After:
6
Z
Z
Y
Y
3
X
X
1
2
3
5
1
2
X
Z
1
Y
4
X
Z
4
1
Y
1

Curve 2D Normal Method With the Input Length Option
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
This example is the same as the previous example, except that Flip Curve Direction is pressed.
Geometry
Curve ID List
1
Curve Length
◆
◆
Action:
Object:
Input Length
Calculate Length
0.0
◆ Distance ◆
◆ Deltax ◆
Deltay
Deltaz
Calculate Curve Length
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List
Cord 3.3
Flip Curve Direction
Auto Execute
Point List
Curve List
Create
Curve
Method: 2D Normal
Point 3
Surface 1.4
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Z
Y
Z
3
Y
5
3
X
X
2
2
1
1
1
X
Z
X
Z
Y
4
Y
4
6
1
1

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Calculate Length Option
The 2D Normal/Calculate Length option, creates straight parametric cubic curves that lie on a
defined 2D plane and is perpendicular to an existing curve or edge. The curve is defined from
specified point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations
provided on the Point select menu.
Geometry
Curve ID List
4
Curve Length
◆
◆
Action:
Object:
Input Length
Calculate Length
0.0
◆ Distance ◆
◆ Deltax ◆
Deltay
Deltaz
Calculate Curve Length
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List
Coord 0.3
Flip Curve Direction
Auto Execute
Point List
Curve List
Create
Curve
Method: 2D Normal
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If Calculate Length is ON, a small subordinate form called
Length Calculation Points will appear (shown below). You must
enter the point locations in the Point 1 and 2 databoxes shown
below that the curve will be created between.
Press Calculate Curve Length first to update the curve length
displayed in the databox above, before you complete the
remainder of the form (if Auto Execute is ON), or before you
press the Apply button.
Length Calculation Points
Auto Execute
Point 1
Point 2
Length Calculation Points Subordinate Form

If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the input point, and thus the resulting curve, are
projected directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the input point, and
the projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle
simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that plane, driven
by the input point(s).
◆ Distance ◆
◆ Deltax ◆
Deltay
Deltaz
Calculate Curve Length
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List
Coord 0.3
Flip Curve Direction
Auto Execute
Point List
Curve List
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
If Flip Curve Direction is ON, MSC.Patran will reverse the
new curve’s parametric ξ 1 direction, relative to the curve
length and the normal direction of the construction plane.
The ξ 1 direction is defined by the curve’s connectivity.
Enter in Point List, the point, vertex, node or other point
location the curve will be created from.
Enter in Curve List, the curve or edge that the new curve will
be perpendicular to.
Either enter the IDs from the keyboard or use the Point
Select menu and the Curve Select menu to cursor define the
locations.
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The default construction plane now comes from the
global preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the
default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane
select menus also have a new entry to restore the
databox value to the default coordinate
frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate. Default
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Connectivity (p. 15)
Topology (p. 10)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve 2D Normal Method With the Input Length Option Example
Creates Curve 1 with the Input Length option. The distance of Curve 1 is 1.0; it lies within the
plane whose normal is the global coordinate frame’s X axis, Coord 0.1; and it is starts from a
point that is closest to Point 6.
Geometry
Curve ID List
1
Curve Length
◆
◆
Action:
Object:
Input Length
Calculate Length
0.0
◆ Distance ◆
◆ Deltax ◆
Deltay
Deltaz
Calculate Curve Length
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List
Coord 0.1
Flip Curve Direction
Auto Execute
Point List
Curve List
Create
Curve
Method: 2D Normal
Point 6
Surface 1.3
-Apply-
Before:
5
Z
After:
5
Z
Y
Y
X
X
8
1
7
6
6
1
1
1
1
2
2

Curve 2D Normal Method With the Calculate Length Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 1 with the Calculate Length option. The distance of Curve 1 is the distance
between Points 3 and 4; it lies within the plane whose normal is the Z axis of Coord 3; and it starts
from a point that is closest to Point 3.
Geometry
Curve ID List
1
Curve Length
◆
◆
Action:
Object:
Input Length
Calculate Length
1.41421
◆ Distance ◆
◆ Deltax ◆
Deltay
Deltaz
Calculate Curve Length
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List
Cord 3.3
Flip Curve Direction
Auto Execute
Point List
Curve List
Create
Curve
Method: 2D Normal
Point 3
Surface 1.4
-Apply-
Before:
6
Z
Z
After:
Y
Y
3
X
X
1
2
1
3
5
Z
3
X
2
Y
4
1
Z
3
X
1
4
Y
1

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating 2D Circle Curves
The 2D Circle method creates circular curves of a specified radius that is within a defined 2D
plane, based on a center point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other
point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Curves per Circle
4
Circle Radius
◆ Input Radius
◆ Calculate Radius
Construction Plane List
Coord 0.3
Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]
Create
Curve
Method: 2D Circle
Project to Plane
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number of
parametric cubic curves to compose the circle.
If Input Radius is ON, enter the value of the circle’s radius in
model units.
If Calculate Radius is ON, specify the point location in
Radius Point List that the radius will be measured to, from the
specified center point. Either enter the ID from the keyboard
(example: Point 10, Surface 3.1.1, Node 30); or cursor select
the point, vertex, node or other point location using the Point
Select menu.

Circle Radius
◆
◆
The default construction plane now comes from the global preferences. So, if
unchanged by the user, the default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane
select menus also have a new entry to restore the databox value to the default
coordinate frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.
Input Radius
Calculate Radius
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List
Coord 0.3
Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]
-Apply-
Specify the point location that defines the center of the
circle, either by entering the ID from the keyboard
(examples: Point 1, Surface 10.1 Node 20); or by cursor
selecting the location. The Point Select menu can be used
to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
point location.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Basic Functions is ON which means you do
not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form. ☞ More Help:
Default
If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point,
and thus the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the
plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the
center point, and the projection is done with respect to that
new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply
indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified,
or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve 2D Circle Method With the Input Radius Option Example
Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Circle method with the Input Radius option, where the
circle has a radius of 1.0, its center point is at Node 1, and it lies within the plane whose normal
is the Z axis of Coord 0.
Curve ID List
5
Geometry
Curves per Circle
4
Circle Radius
◆
◆
Action:
Object:
Input Radius
Calculate Radius
Construction Plane List
Cord 0.3
Auto Execute
Center Point List
Node 1
Create
Curve
Method: 2D Circle
1.0
Project to Plane
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
5
1
12
1

Curve 2D Circle Method With the Calculate Radius Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Circle/Calculate Radius option, where the radius is
measured from Point 12 to Node 1, its center point is at Node 1, and it lies within the plane whose
normal is the Z axis of the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
5
Geometry
Curves per Circle
4
Circle Radius
◆ Input Radius
◆ Calculate Radius
Radius Point List
Point 12
Construction Plane List
Cord 0.3
Auto Execute
Center Point List
Node 1
Create
Curve
Method: 2D Circle
Project to Plane
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
5
X
1 12
1 12

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating 2D ArcAngle Curves
The 2D ArcAngles method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. The Arc parameter
inputs are Radius, Start Angle and End Angle. The point location for the arc’s center is to be
input.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Curves per Arc
1
Arc Parameters
Radius
1.0
Start Angle
0.0
End Angle
360.0
Construction Plane List
Coord 0.3
Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]
Create
Curve
Method: 2D ArcAngles
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number
of parametric cubic curves to compose the arc.
Enter the Arc parameters defined as Radius, Start Angle
and End Angle (degrees).
Project to Plane If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the input point,
and thus the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the
plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the input
point, and the projection is done with respect to that new
plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply
indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified,
or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).

Arc Parameters
Radius
1.0
Start Angle
0.0
End Angle
360.0
Project to Plane The default construction plane now comes from the
global preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the
Construction Plane List
Coord 0.3
Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions is ON which means you do not need
to press the Apply button to execute the form.
default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select
menus also have a new entry to restore the databox
value to the default coordinate frame/construction plane,
whichever is appropriate.
Default
Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations for the arc’s center point, by entering the IDs
from the keyboard. Examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1,
Surface 10.1.1, Node 20. Or cursor define the point
locations using the Point Select menu.
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve 2D ArcAngle Method Example
Creates Curve 1 using Create/Curve/2D ArcAngles.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Curves per Arc
1
Arc Parameters
Radius
1.0
Start Angle
0.0
End Angle
160.0
Construction Plane List
Coord 0.3
Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]
Create
Curve
Method: 2D ArcAngles
Project to Plane
-Apply-
Before:
After:
2
Z
Y
X
Y
Z X
1
1

Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc2Point Method)
Creating Arced Curves with the Center Option
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The 2D Arc2Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. Two options are
provided. The Center option inputs are point locations for the arc’s center and the arc’s starting
and ending points. The Radius option inputs are the radius and point locations for the arc’s
starting and ending points.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Curve ID List
1
Option: Option:Center
Create
Curve
Method: 2D Arc2Point
Arc2Point Parameters...
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Option Menu to select between Options Center and Radius.
(Center parameters are displayed.)
If pressed, the Arc2Point Parameters subordinate form will
appear. See Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form (p.
?) for more information.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point, and thus the resulting curve, are
projected directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the center point,
and the projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This
toggle simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that
plane, driven by the input point(s).
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List
Coord 0.3
Auto Execute
Center Point List
Starting Point List
Ending Point List
-Apply-
The default construction plane now comes from the global
preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the default is Coord
0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select menus also have a new
entry to restore the databox value to the default coordinate
frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.
Default
Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for
the arc’s center and arc’s starting and ending points, by entering
the IDs from the keyboard. Examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1,
Surface 10.1.1, Node 20. Or cursor define the point locations
using the Point Select menu.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Curve 2D Arc2Point Method With Center Min. Angle Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc2Point method, where the Minimum Angle is chosen;
the arced curve is between Point 13 and Node 1; its center point is Point 12; and the curve lies
within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
5
Geometry
Option: Center
Construction Plane List
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Auto Execute
Center Point List
Point 12
Starting Point List
Point 13
Ending Point List
Node 1
Create
Curve
Method: 2D Arc2Point
Arc2Point Parameters...
Project to Plane
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
1
1 14
12 13
5
12 13

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve 2D Arc2Point Method With Center Max. Angle Option Example
Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc2Point method, where the Maximum Angle is chosen;
the arced curve is between Point 13 and Node 1; its center point is Point 12; and the curve lies
within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
5
Geometry
Option: Center
Construction Plane List
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Auto Execut e
Center Point List
Point 12
Starting Point List
Point 13
Ending Point List
Node 1
Create
Curve
Method: 2D Arc2Point
Arc2Point Parameters...
Project to Plane
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
X
1
Y
Z
1 14
X
5
12 13
12 13

Creating Arced Curves with the Radius Option
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The 2D Arc2Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. Two options are
provided. The Center option inputs are point locations for the arc’s center and the arc’s starting
and ending points. The Radius option inputs are the radius and point locations for the arc’s
starting and ending points.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Curve ID List
1
Option: Radius
Construction Plane List
Coord 0.3
Arc Radius
1.0
Create Center Point
Flip Center Point
Auto Execute
Create
Curve
Method: 2D Arc2Point
Arc2Point Parameters...
Project to Plane
Starting Point List
Ending Point List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Option Menu to select between Options Center and Radius.
(Center parameters are displayed.)
If pressed, the Arc2Point Parameters subordinate form will
appear. See Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form
(p. 236) for more information.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point, and thus the resulting curve, are projected
directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the center point, and the
projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply
indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that plane, driven by the
input point(s).
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List
Coord 0.3
Arc Radius
1.0
Create Center Point
Flip Center Point
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
Ending Point List
-Apply-
The default construction plane now comes from the global
preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the default is Coord
0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select menus also have a new
entry to restore the databox value to the default coordinate
frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.
Default
If Create Center Point is ON, the arc center point will be created.
If Flip Center Point is ON, the arc center point will be flipped to
create arc.
Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for the
arc’s starting and ending points, by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Surface 10.1.1, Node
20. Or cursor define the point locations using the Point Select menu.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Curve 2D Arc2Point Method with Radius Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 1 by creating an arc with a radius of 1.5 using [-1 -.5 -1] and [1 1 1] as start/end
points and in the Z construction plane.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D Arc2Point
Curve ID List
1
Option: Radius
Arc2Point Parameters...
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Arc Radius
1.5
Create Center Point
Flip Center Point
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
[-1 -.5 -1]
Ending Point List
[1 1 1]
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Z
Z
Y
Y
X
X
1
1
2

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form
The Arc2Point Parameters subordinate form appears when the Arc2Point Parameters button is
pressed on the Create/Curve 2D Arc2Point application form.
Arc2Point Parameters
Curves per Arc
1
Arc Angle:
Minimum Angle
OK Cancel
Disabled if the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is OFF on
the Create/Curve/2D Arc2Point form. If PATRAN 2
Convention is ON, specify the number of parametric
cubic curves to create per Arc.
If Minimum Angle is ON, MSC.Patran will create the arc
based on the smallest angle possible between the specified
starting and ending points.
If Maximum Angle is ON, MSC.Patran will create the arc
based on the largest angle possible between the specified
starting and ending points.

Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc3Point Method)
The 2D Arc3Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane, based on point
locations for the arc’s starting, middle and ending points. The point locations can be points,
vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Curves per Arc
1
Create
Curve
Method: 2D Arc3Point
Project to Plane
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number
of parametric cubic curves to compose the arc.
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point, and thus
the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the plane; otherwise,
the plane is first translated out to the center point, and the projection
is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane.
This toggle simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane
specified, or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
The default construction plane now comes from the global preferences. So, if
unchanged by the user, the default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane
select menus also have a new entry to restore the databox value to the default
coordinate frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List
Coord 0.3
Create Center Point
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
Middle Point List
Ending Point List
-Apply-
If ON, MSC.Patran will create a point at the
calculated center of the arc.
Default
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for the
arc’s starting, middle and ending points, by entering the IDs from
the keyboard (examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Surface 10.1.1,
Node 20); or cursor defining the point locations using the Point
Select menu.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Curve 2D Arc3Point Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc3Point method. The arced curve is created through the
Points 13, 14 and Node 1 and it lies within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}. Notice that
Create Center Point is pressed in and Point 16 is created.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
5
Geometry
Curves per Arc
1
Create
Curve
Method: 2D Arc3Point
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Create Center Point
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
Point 13
Middle Point List
Point 14
Ending Point List
Node 1
-Apply-
Before:
1
After:
115
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
16
14
14
5
13
13

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Surfaces from Curves
Creating Surfaces Between 2 Curves
The Curve method using the 2 Curve option creates surfaces between two curves or edges.
Degenerate three-sided surfaces can be created. See Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle)
(p. 41) for more information.
Action:
Object:
Option:
Geometry
Surface ID List
1
Manifold
2 Curve
Manifold Surface
Auto Execute
Create
Surface
Method: Curve
Parameterization Method
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Starting Curve List
Ending Curve List
-Apply-
Specify in Starting and Ending Curve Lists, the curves
or edges for the new surfaces, either by entering the
IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface
10.1, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor defining the curve
locations using the Curve Select menu.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Deactivated and not used for the 2 Curve option.
If the Manifold toggle is ON, enter the manifold surface or
face for the new surface, either by entering the ID from the
keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor
selecting it with the Surface Select menu.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Surface Curve Method With the 2 Curve Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/2 Curve option. The curve is created between Curves
5 and 6.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Surface ID List
2
Option: 2 Curve
Parameterization Method
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Manifold
Manifold Surface
Auto Execute
Starting Curve List
Curve 5
Ending Curve List
Curve 6
Create
Surface
Method: Curve
-Apply-
Before:
12
Z
After:
12
Z
Y
Y
X
X
5
5
17
17
2
16
16
6
6
18
18

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Curve Method With the 2 Curve Option Example
Creates Surface 2 that is degenerate with the 2 Curve option which is between an edge of Surface
1 and a zero length curve defined by Point 5, twice.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Surface ID List
2
Option: 2 Curve
Parameterization Method
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Manifold
Manifold Surface
Auto Execute
Starting Curve List
Surface 1.3
Create
Surface
Method: Curve
Ending Curve List
Construct 2 Point Curve
-Apply-
Before:
2 3
1
After:
1
Y
Z
X
1
2 3
Y
Z
X
1
4
4
2
5
5

Creating Surfaces Through 3 Curves (Curve Method)
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Curve method using the 3 Curve option creates surfaces that pass through three existing
curves or edges.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Surface ID List
1
Option:
3 Curve
Parameterization Method
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Auto Execute
Create
Surface
Method: Curve
Starting Curve List
Middle Curve List
Ending Curve List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the
points on the surface is based on the chord length distances
relative to the location of the surface’s middle curve. This
means the surface may or may not be uniformly
parameterized, depending on where the middle curve is
located.
If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points on
the surface will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the
middle curve is located. That is, the surface will be always
uniformly parameterized.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify in the Starting, Middle and Ending Curve Lists, the
curves or edges that the new surfaces will pass through,
either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples:
Curve 10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor defining
the curve locations using the Curve Select menu.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Curve Method With 3 Curve Option Example
Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/Curve option. The curve is created through Curves
5, 6 and 8.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Surface ID List
2
Create
Surface
Method: Curve
Option: 3 Curve
Parameterization Method
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Auto Execute
Starting Curve List
Curve 5
Middle Curve List
Curve 6
Ending Curve List
Curve 8
-Apply-
Before:
12
Z
12
Z
Y
After:
Y
X
X
5
5
16
16
17
17
6
62
19
19
18
8
18
8
21
21

Surface Curve Method With 3 Curve Option Example
Creates Surface 2 through Curves 2, 3 and an edge of Surface 1.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Surface ID List
2
Create
Surface
Method: Curve
Option: 3 Curve
Parameterization Method
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Auto Execute
Starting Curve List
Surface 1.4
Middle Curve List
Curve 2
Ending Curve List
Curve 3
-Apply-
Before:
6
Z
Y
After:
6
Z
Y
X
1
X
1
1
1
7
8
7
1
1
8
5
2
5
2
10
9
9
10
3
3
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
11
11

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Surfaces Through 4 Curves (Curve Method)
The Curve method using the 4 Curve option creates surfaces that pass through four existing
curves or edges.
Action:
Object:
Option:
Geometry
Surface ID List
1
4 Curve
Auto Execute
Starting Curve List
Second Curve List
Third Curve List
Create
Surface
Method: Curve
Parameterization Method
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Ending Curve List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points
that describe the surface is based on the chord length distances
relative to the location of the surface’s second and third curves.
This means the surface may or may not be uniformly
parameterized, depending on where the interior curves are
located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the
points on the surface will be uniformly spaced, regardless of
where the interior curves are located. That is, the surface will be
always uniformly parameterized.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify in the Starting, Second, Third and Ending Curve Lists,
the curves or edges that the new surfaces will pass through,
either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve
10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor defining the curve
locations using the Curve Select menu.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Surface Curve Method With 4 Curve Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Curve/4 Curve option. The curve is created through Curves
5,6 and 8 and the edge of Surface 2 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below.
Geometry
Surface ID List
3
Option: 4 Curve
Parameterization Method
◆
◆
Action:
Object:
Chord Length
Uniform
Auto Execute
Create
Surface
Method: Curve
Starting Curve List
Curve 5
Second Curve List
Curve 6
Third Curve List
Curve 8
Ending Curve List
Surface 2.4
-Apply-
Curve Select Menu Icon
Before:
12
Z
12
Y
After:
Z
Y
5
X
5
X
17
17
16
16
6
6
19
19
3
8
8
18
18
21
21
22
22
24
24
2
2
23
23
2
2

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Surfaces from N Curves (Curve Method)
The Curve method using the N-Curves option creates surfaces that pass through any number of
curves or edges.
Action:
Object:
Option:
Geometry
Surface ID List
1
Curve List
Create
Surface
Method: Curve
N-Curves
Parameterization Method
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the
points that describe the surface is based on the chord length
distances relative to the location of the surface’s second and
third curves. This means the surface may or may not be
uniformly parameterized, depending on where the interior
curves are located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric
coordinates of the points on the surface will be uniformly
spaced, regardless of where the interior curves are located.
That is, the surface will be always uniformly parameterized.
Specify in Curve List, two or more curves or edges that the
surface will pass through. Either enter the IDs from the
keyboard (examples: Curve 1:10, Surface 10.2 11.1, Solid
10.1.1 12.1.1), or cursor select the curves or edges using the
Curve Select menu that appears on the bottom.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Surface Curve Method With N-Curves Option Example
Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/N-Curves option. The curve is created through
Curves 5,6,8,9 and 10.
Geometry
Option: N-Curves
Parameterization Method
◆
Action:
Object:
Surface ID List
2
◆
Chord Length
Uniform
Curve List
Create
Surface
Method: Curve
Curve 5 6 8:10
-Apply-
Before:
12
Z
After:
12
Z
Y
Y
5
X
5
X
17
17
16
16
6
19
6
19
22
8
82
18
22
18
21
21
9
9
23
24
23
24
10
10
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
25
25

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Composite Surfaces
Figure 4-1 The Composite method creates surfaces that are composed from multiple

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Composite
Surface ID List
2
Delete Constituent Surfaces
Surface List
Use All Edge Vertices
Vertex List
Options... Vertex List
Inner Loop Option: All
Preview Boundary
-Apply-
surfaces.
When toggled ON, uses all the boundary vertices from the Surface List. When toggled OFF, will enable
vertex selection. If the Vertex List is left empty the original surface edges will be automatically merged
until a slope change is encountered in the boundary. The slope change criteria is specified by the "Node-
Edge Snap Angle" in the Finite Elements form under Preferences in the main menu. If vertices are
specified, they will be graphically marked. This option is probably the most powerful as it will allow the
mesher to ignore unimportant details on the boundary.
Highlights the current outer and inner
boundary free edges and enables the
Modify Boundary Frame.
Allows the user to define larger surface regions within a model,
typically when existing surfaces are too detailed for mesh
creation. Composite surfaces may be meshed using a larger
element edge length than supported on the more detailed,
underlying surfaces. A composite surface is initially defined by
selecting the existing surfaces to be combined. The surfaces
will be graphically highlighted when picked or when the mouse
focus is put on the surface list by picking in the listbox.
Defines where geometric vertices, and subsequently finite
element nodes are to be placed on the Composite Surface
boundary.
There are three Inner Loop Options:
All will use all closed loops to identify the interior boundary of the
composite surface.
None will create a surface with no internal holes.
Select will enable the user to identify existing interior holes to be
part of the new surface. If the inner loop is defined by more than
one edge, selection of any one of those will be enough. To add a
hole which is not part of a surface, the Preview Boundary option
must be used. In this case all curves have to be selected to
identify the inner loop.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Appears either when the Preview Boundary option is selected or if the Composite Surface
Builder was not able to identify a clean boundary from the Surface List. The free edges will be
highlighted and marked as follows:
White: Free edges within the Surface List.
Dark Blue: Free edges shared by one other surface not in the Surface List.
Cyan: Free edges shared by more than one surface not in the Surface List.
Red: Free edges that have not been processed due to either a gap or a multiple branch path in
the Surface List.
Options... Vertex List
Modify Boundary:
◆ Add ◆ Remove
Edge List
Surface 1.3
Reset
-Apply-
Add/Remove toggles allow edges or curves to be added
or removed from the Surface List boundary. Add places
selected curves and edges in the Edge List databox and
also supports curve creation on-the-fly. Remove operates
in Autoexecute mode whereby previously highlighted
curves or edges are simply unhighlighted.
Reset can be used to start over again. If Surface List
contains a previous used surface and the boundary has
been modified, the previous modification list can be used
again.
Apply will initiate the Composite Surface Builder to use
the Edge List in conjunction with the Surface List to build
a new surface. If the proposed boundary is incorrect, the
problem location will be marked and a message will
appear.
General Comments
If valid boundary loops are identified and any of the vertices in the vertex list are not part of a boundary, the
location will be marked red and the user will be prompted to “ignore and continue” or “stop”.
The Surface Builder always computes the optimal view plane based on the Surface List. In most cases this
is satisfactory; however, in some instances, it can create a very distorted parametrization of the new
surface, leading to poor finite element mesh quality. Sometimes the view selected by the user as “best” is
more successful than the recommended optimal plane (i.e., answer “No” to the prompt asking permission
to reorient the model to a better view); otherwise, the proposed Composite Surface will have to be
represented by multiple composite surfaces.
If the Composite Surface Builder often fails because of unresolved boundary edges, the gap and clean-up
tolerances are most likely too small. If edges disappear the tolerances are probably too large. The default
gap and clean-up tolerances are set equal to the global model tolerance and can be changed on the
Options form.

Composite Surface Options
Used to create the boundary loops. This value has to be increased to
automatically close existing gaps larger than the tolerance value.
Cleanup Tol. 0.005
Gap Distance 0.005
Auto Zoom In Problem
Detailed Information Display
Auto Select Outer Boundary
Erase Original Surfaces
Ok
Defaults
Only used in the Surface Builder to ignore gaps
between surface edges.
Will zoom on the model location where the builder has
detected a boundary gap or branch. This is useful for
large Composite Surfaces.
Controls the appearance of warning messages when
gaps or branches are encountered. For the experienced
user, they may rather not see the warning messages but
simply rely on graphical feedback as previously
described.
Erases (not deletes) the original surfaces upon successful construction of a
Composite Surface. This is identical to using the Plot/Erase functionality
under Display.
If toggled OFF, the user will be prompted to identify the outer
boundary via a query process. This is needed if the default method of
Auto Select fails.
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Composite Method Example
Creates Surface 2 from the surfaces in the viewport.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Composite
Surface ID List
2
Delete Constituent Surfaces
Surface List
Surface 1T#
Use All Edge Vertices
Vertex List
Options... Vertex List
Inner Loop Option: All
Preview Boundary
-Apply-
Before:
Z
X
Y
After:
Z
X
Y
Z
1
X
Z
1
X
Y
Y

Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Decompose method creates four sided surfaces from an existing surface or solid face by
choosing four vertex locations. This method is usually used to create surfaces from a multi-sided
trimmed surface so that you can either mesh with IsoMesh or continue to build a tri-parametric
solid.
See Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces (p. 37) for more information on how to use the
Decompose method.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Decompose
Surface ID List
1
Surface
Auto Execute
Surface Vertex 1 List
Surface Vertex 2 List
Surface Vertex 3 List
Surface Vertex 4 List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Enter the trimmed surface to decompose either by
entering the ID from the keyboard (example: Surface 10);
or by cursor selecting the surface.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to chose the Apply button to
execute the form.
Enter in the Surface Vertex 1,2,3 and 4 listboxes, the four
vertices that will define the new surface. Use the Vertex
Select menu that appears on the bottom to cursor select
the vertices.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Decompose Method Example
Creates Surfaces 3, 4 and 5 using the Create/Decompose method. The surfaces are created from
Trimmed Surface 2 and they are defined by the cursor selected vertices listed in the Surface
Vertex databoxes on the form.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Decompose
Surface ID List
3
Surface
Surface 2
Auto Execute
Surface Vertex 1 List
Surface 2(u 0.000000)(v 1.0000
Surface Vertex 2 List
Surface 2(u 0.000000)(v 0.0000
Surface Vertex 3 List
Surface 2(u 0.516341)(v 0.0000
Surface Vertex 4 List
Surface 2(u 0.331216)(v 1.0000
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
17
18
17
18
4
2
2
3
5
19
20
15
14
15
14
12
16
12
16

Creating Surfaces from Edges (Edge Method)
The Edge method creates three or four sided surfaces that are bounded by three or four
intersecting curves or edges, without manifolding the surface to an existing surface or face.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Edge
Surface ID List
1
Option: 4 Edge
Manifold
Manifold Surface
Auto Execute
Surface Edge 1 List
Surface Edge 2 List
Surface Edge 3 List
Surface Edge 4 List
-Apply-
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Set this option to either 3 Edge or 4 Edge. The 3 Edge option
will create a degenerate three sided surface.
If the Manifold toggle is ON, enter the manifold surface or face for
the new surface, either by entering the ID from the keyboard
(examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor selecting it with
the Surface Select menu.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Enter in the Surface Edge 1,2, 3 and/or 4 Lists, the three or four
curves or edges that will bound the new surface, either by
entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface
10.2, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor selecting them with the Curve
Select menu that appears on the bottom.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Edge Method With the 3 Edge Option Example
Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Edge/3 Edge option. The degenerate surface is created from
Curves 5 and 6 and the edge of Surface 2. See Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle) (p. 41).
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Edge
Surface ID List
3
Option:
3 Edge
Manifold
Manifold Surface
Auto Execute
Surface Edge 1 List
Curve 5
Surface Edge 2 List
Curve 6
Surface Edge 3 List
Surface 2.1
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
Y
Z
16
After:
16
X
X
5
3
6
5
6
13 14
12
13 14
12
2
2
15
15

Surface Edge Method With the 4 Edge Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Surface2 using the Create/Edge/4 Edge option. The surface is created from Curves 5
through 8.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Edge
Surface ID List
2
Option: 4 Edge
Manifold
Manifold Surface
Auto Execute
Surface Edge 1 List
Curve 5
Surface Edge 2 List
Curve 6
Surface Edge 3 List
Curve 7
Surface Edge 4 List
Curve 8
-Apply-
Before:
12
Z
After:
12
Z
Y
Y
X
X
5
5
7
7
17
17
2
18
18
8
8
6
6
19
19

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extracting Surfaces
Extracting Surfaces with the Parametric Option
The Extract method creates surfaces by creating them from within or on a solid, at a constant
parametric ξ1( u)
, ξ2( v)
, or ξ3( w)
coordinate location, where ξ1has a range of 0 ≤ ξ1 ≤1, ξ2 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ2 ≤1, and ξ3has a range of 0 ≤ξ3≤1. One surface is extracted from each
solid.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Extract
Surface ID List
1
Option:
Surface Plane
Parametric
◆ Constant u Plane
◆ Constant v Plane
◆
Constant w Plane
Surface Position
0.0
1.0
u Parametric Value
Auto Execute
Solid List
-Apply-
0.5
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Select either Constant u Direction, Constant v Direction, or
Constant w Direction. The surfaces will either be created
either along the ξ1( u)
direction for Constant u Direction;
along the ξ2( v)
direction for Constant v Direction; or along
the ξ3 (w) direction for Constant w Direction.
ξ1( u)
ξ2( v)
ξ3( w)
Specify the solid’s , , or coordinate
value for the location of the surface, either by using the slide
bar or by entering the value in the databox. The directions of
ξ1 , ξ2 and ξ3 are defined by the connectivity of the solid.
You can plot the parametric directions by choosing the
Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form
under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

Surface Plane
◆ Constant u Plane
◆ Constant v Plane
◆
Constant w Plane
Surface Position
0.0
1.0
u Parametric Value
Auto Execute
Solid List
-Apply-
0.5
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify in Solid List, the solids that you want to extract
surfaces from. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard
(example: Solid 1:10), or cursor select the solids using
the Solid Select menu that appears on the bottom.
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Connectivity (p. 15)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example
Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The surface is created at
ξ3( w)
= 0.75 within Solid 1. Notice the parametric direction is displayed near Point 19.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Extract
Surface ID List
2
Option: Parametric
Surface Plane
◆ Constant u Plane
◆ Constant v Plane
◆ Constant w Plane
Surface Position
0.0
1.0
w Parametric Value
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1
-Apply-
0.75
Before:
Z
After:
Z
19
Y
12
3
2
1
X
19
3
23
2
1
Y
12
X
22
1
16
22
1
16
20
17
20
26
2
1
2
17
24
21
25
18
21
18

Surface Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The surface is created at
ξ3( w)
= 0.75 within a solid that is defined by Surfaces 1 and 2 by using the Solid select menu
icons listed below.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Extract
Surface ID List
3
Option: Parametric
Surface Plane
◆ Constant u Plane
◆ Constant v Plane
◆ Constant w Plane
Surface Position
0.0
1.0
w Parametric Value
Auto Execute
Solid List
0.75
Construct 2SurfaceSolid (Eva
-Apply-
Solid Select Menu Icons
Before:
1
Z
After:
1
Z
11
7
Y
7
Y
X
X
5
5
14
10
1
10
1
3
2
4
2
4
12
8
8
6
6
13
9
9

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extracting Surfaces with the Face Option
The Extract method creates surfaces by creating them on a specified solid face. One surface is
extracted from each solid face.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Extract
Surface ID List
1
Option:
Face
Auto Execute
Face List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify in Face List, the solid faces to create surfaces on, either by
entering the IDs from the keyboard (example: Solid 10.2 11.1); or
by cursor selecting the faces.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Surface Extract Method With the Face Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Surfaces 2 and 3 using the Create/Extract/Face option. The surface is created on two
faces of Solid 10.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Extract
Surface ID List
2
Option:
Face
Auto Execute
Face List
Solid 1.1 1.2
-Apply-
Before:
Z
19
Y
12
After:
Z
3
2
1
X
12
19 1
23
Y
12
X
2
22
1
16
22
1
16
20
17
1
20
2
17
3
21
18
21
18

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Fillet Surfaces
The Fillet method creates a parametric bi-cubic surface between two existing surfaces or solid
faces. The existing surfaces or faces do not need to intersect. If they do intersect, the edges of the
surfaces or faces must be aligned, and they must intersect so that a nondegenerate fillet can be
created.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Fillet
Surface ID List
1
Fillet Parameters
Fillet Radius 1
Fillet Radius 2
Fillet Tolerance
0.005
Trim Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface/Point 1 List
Surface/Point 2 List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Fillet Radius 1 is the fillet radius. This is either a constant fillet
radius (if Fillet Radius 2 is left blank) or part of a varying radius.
Only one radius value is allowed for all pairs of surfaces or faces
specified in Surface/Point 1 and 2 List.
Fillet Radius 2 is optional. If a value is entered, MSC.Patran will
create a fillet with a varying radius, with the first edge beginning
at Radius 1 and gradually varying to Radius 2 at the opposite
edge.
Fillet Tolerance is used to control the accuracy of the fillet when
MSC.Patran subdivides the geometry to calculate the fillet
position. Decreasing the tolerance helps when the fillet is very
small compared to the geometry model. Default is .005.
Points 1 and 2
Radius 1
Surface 1
Surface 2
Radius 2
Fillet Patch
Area To Be
Trimmed

Fillet Radius 1
Fillet Radius 2
Fillet Tolerance
0.005
Trim Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface/Point 1 List
Surface/Point 2 List
-Apply-
If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the original surfaces specified in
the Surface/Point 1 and 2 listboxes. Each surface is trimmed
from the tangent point of the fillet to the end of the original
surface.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify in Surface/Point 1 List and Surface/Point 2 List,
the existing pair of surfaces or faces, along with their
corner points that the fillet will be created between. For
each listbox, the Surface Select menu and the Point Select
menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to cursor define
the appropriate surfaces or faces, and the points, vertices,
nodes, or other appropriate corner point locations provided
on the Point Select menu.
Points 1 and 2
Radius 1
Surface 1
Surface 2
Radius 2
Fillet Patch
Area To Be
Trimmed
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Fillet Method Example
Creates Surface 4 using the Create/Fillet method that is between Surfaces 1 and 3 with the fillet’s
endpoints, Points 2 and 10, cursor selected. Surface 4 has a varying fillet radius of 0.25 to 0.5.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Fillet
Surface ID List
4
Fillet Parameters
Fillet Radius 1
0.25
Fillet Radius 2
0.5
Fillet Tolerance
0.005
Trim Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface/Point 1 List
Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu
Surface/Point 2 List
Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu
-Apply-
Before:
10
10
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
11
2
1
15
14
3
3
4
1
1
9
9
12
3
4
1
1

Surface Fillet Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Surface 5 using the Create/Fillet method that is between Surfaces 3 and 4 with the fillet’s
endpoints, Points 19 and 25, cursor selected. Surface 5 has a constant fillet radius of 0.75.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Fillet
Surface ID List
5
Fillet Parameters
Fillet Radius 1
0.75
Fillet Radius 2
Fillet Tolerance
0.005
Trim Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface/Point 1 List
Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu
Surface/Point 2 List
Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
18
X
18
X
6
27
6
16
3
3
24
20
19
30
28
19
5
5
26
4
17
4
25
23
31
29

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Matching Adjacent Surfaces
The Match method creates parametric bi-cubic surfaces with common boundaries (or matched
edges) from a pair of topologically incongruent surfaces or solid faces that have two consecutive
common vertices but unmatched edges. The surface pair need not have matching parametric
orientations. MSC.Patran requires geometry to be topologically congruent for IsoMesh and
Paver to create coincident nodes at the common boundaries. See Topological Congruency and
Meshing (p. 12) for more information.
You can also match incongruent surfaces with the Edit action’s Edge Match method. See
Matching Surface Edges (p. 481) for more information.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Match
Surface ID List
1
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface 1 List
Surface 2 List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the surfaces specified in Surface 1
and 2 List from the database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify in Surface 1 List, the surface or face to which the new
surface will be matched. Specify in Surface 2 List, the surface or
face to match with Surface 1. Either enter the IDs from the
keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select them
using the Surface Select menu.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or
Paver (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling

Surface Match Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Surface 4 using the Create/Match method that is topologically congruent with Surface
2. Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in and Surface 3 is deleted.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Match
Surface ID List
4
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface 1 List
Surface 2
Surface 2 List
Surface 3
-Apply-
Before:
13 14
12
12
Y
Z
After:
X
2
15
13 14
Y
Z
X
2
15
3
4
18
17
18
17

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Constant Offset Surface
This form is used to create a constant offset surface.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Offset
Surface ID List
1
Offset Parameters
Constant Offset Value
1.0
Repeat Count
1
Do not use a
guiding surface
Auto Execute
Surface List
Draw Direction Vector
Reverse Direction
Reset Graphics
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Specify the constant offset value of the surface.
Specify the number of copies of the offset surface to create
using the Repeat Count parameter.
By default, Do not use a guiding surface is set to use the
surface normal or the direction vector, if reversed from the
surface normal for the offset direction. If this toggle is
changed to Use first surface as guiding surface, then the
offset direction for all surfaces to be created will the same as
the first surface in the Surface List.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the surface used to create an offset surface from
either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Surface 10 11. The Surface select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate surfaces.
Draws the direction vector of the surface to create the offset
surface from.
Reverses the direction vector of the surface to create the
offset surface from.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions

Creating Constant Offset Surface Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Create surfaces 2 and 3 by offsetting from surface 1, a distance of 0.5 with a repeat count of 2 and
reversing the direction vector of surface 1.
Action:
Geometry
Geometry
Create
Object: Surface
Method: Offset
Surface ID List
2
Offset Parameters
Constant Offset Value
0.5
Repeat Count
2
Do not use a
guiding surface
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
Draw Direction Vector
Reverse Direction
Reset Graphics
-Apply-
Before:
X
Y
Z
After:
X
Y
Z
1
3
2
1

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Ruled Surfaces
The Ruled method creates ruled surfaces between a pair of curves or edges.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Ruled
Surface ID List
1
Surface Parameterization
◆
Equal Arc Length
◆ Equal Parametric Values
Avoid Bow Tie Surface
Auto Execute
Ruling Curve 1 List
Ruling Curve 2 List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If Equal Arc Length is ON, MSC.Patran will define the ruled
surface’s ξ1 and ξ2 parametric directions based on the arc
length parameterizations of the ξ1 direction for the curves or
edges in Curve 1 List, and the ξ2 direction for the curves or
edges in Curve 2 List. If Equal Parametric Values is ON, the
curves or edges in Curve 1 List define the surface’s ξ1 direction
and the curves or edges in Curve 2 List define the surface’s ξ2 direction. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are defined by the curve and
surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 and ξ2 directions by
choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric
Properties form under the menu Display/Display
Properties/Geometric.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Avoid Bow Tie Surface
Auto Execute
Ruling Curve 1 List
Ruling Curve 2 List
-Apply-
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
If Avoid Bow Tie Surface is ON, MSC.Patran will optimize
the ruled surface, so that the two curves ξ1 directions do not
need to be aligned or be in the same direction. The resulting
ruled surface will not be twisted or bow tied. This is the
default setting. If Allow Bow Tie Surface is ON, if the ξ1 direction of the curves or edges in Ruling Curve 1 and 2 List
are not aligned, a bow tie ruled surface will be created.
Specify in Ruling Curve 1 and 2 List, the two curves or edges
to create the ruled surface between. Either enter the IDs from
the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface 10.1); or cursor
select them using the Curve Select menu.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Connectivity (p. 15)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver (p. 15)
in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite
Element Modeling
Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Ruled Method Example
Creates Surface 1 using the Create/Ruled method which is created between Curves 1 and 2.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Ruled
Surface ID List
1
Surface Parameterization
◆ Equal Arc Length
◆ Equal Parametric Values
Avoid Bow Tie Surface
Auto Execute
Ruling Curve 1 List
Curve 1
Ruling Curve 2 List
Curve 2
-Apply-
Before:
5
5
1
1
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
1
1
1
2
2
4
4
6
6

Surface Ruled Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Ruled method which is created between Curve 5 and an edge
of Surface 2 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below. Notice that since Equal Parametric
Values was pressed in, Surface 3’s parametric ξ1 direction is the same as for Curve 5.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Ruled
Surface ID List
3
Surface Parameterization
◆ Equal Arc Length
◆ Equal Parametric Values
Avoid Bow Tie Surface
Auto Execute
Ruling Curve 1 List
Curve 5
Ruling Curve 2 List
Surface 2.4
-Apply-
Curve Select Menu Icon
Before:
Z
1
12
Y
After:
Z
X
1
21
12
Y
X
5
5
18
2
17
16
18
2
17
3
1
16
1
2
2
19
20
19
20

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Trimmed Surfaces
The Trimmed method creates a trimmed surface. You must first create at least one chained curve
for the surface’s outer loop or boundary by using the Create/ Curve/Chain form before using
this form, or by bringing up the Auto Chain form from within this form. (Note that an outer loop
must be specified, and the inner loop being specified is not necessary.) Trimmed surfaces can be
meshed by Paver.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Trimmed
Surface ID List
1
Option:
Surface
Auto Chain...
Use All Edge Vertices
Delete Outer Loop
Outer Loop List
Delete Inner Loops
Inner Loop List
Delete Constituent Surface
Surface List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Options for creating trimmed surfaces:
1. Surface: Creates a trimmed surface that has the same curvature
as a specified parent surface. The parent surface must be simply
trimmed (default color is green).
2. Planar: Creates a flat or planar trimmed surface.
3. Composite: Combines surfaces into a single trimmed surface,
where the parent trimmed surfaces may have gaps or overlaps of
a specified length, and are not required to be topologically
congruent.
Use the Auto Chain feature to chain existing curves or surface
edges into closed loops, defining the trim region.
If ON, MSC.Patran will determine the new trimmed surface’s
edge and vertex locations directly from the loop or chained
curve’s definition. That is, the edges and vertices are defined
by the links in the chained curve. If OFF, MSC.Patran will
determine the edge and vertex locations of the new trimmed
surface by the slope discontinuities in the chain.

Specify in Outer Loop List, one chained curve to represent the outer boundary of the
trimmed surface either by entering the ID from the keyboard (example: Curve 10), or by
cursor selecting the curve.
Delete Outer Loop
Outer Loop List
Delete Inner Loops
Inner Loop List
Delete Constituent Surface
Surface List
-Apply-
If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the surfaces
specified in Surface List below from the
database.
If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the chained curves specified in
the Outer Loop List listbox.
If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the chained curve specified in
Inner Loop List.
Specify in Inner Loop List, one or more optional chained curves
to represent holes or cutouts in the trimmed surface, either by
entering the IDs from the keyboard (example: Curve 10 12), or
by cursor selecting the curves.
Specify in Surface List, the surfaces that will be the parent
surface whose curvature will be used by the trimmed surface,
either by entering the IDs from the keyboard, or by cursor
selecting the surface. The parent surface must be simply
trimmed (default color is green).
Note: A Surface List is not required for the Planar option.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Creating Chained Curves (p. 131)
Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver
(p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 3: Finite Element Modeling
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Surface Option
Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Surface option which is created from
chained Curve 22 for the outer loop, chained Curve 21 for the inner loop and Surface 2 for the
parent surface. Notice that Delete Outer and Inner Loop and Delete Constituent Surface are
pressed in and Curves 21 and 22 and Surface 2 are deleted.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Trimmed
Surface ID List
3
Option:
Surface
Auto Chain...
Use All Edge Vertices
Delete Outer Loop
Outer Loop List
Curve 22
Delete Inner Loops
Inner Loop List
Curve 21
Delete Constituent Surface
Surface List
Surface 2
-Apply-
Before:
18
20
X Y
Z
After:
20
X Y
Z
19
16
2
16
23
17
24
19
30 3
29
28
21
21
25
27
26
22
22
12
12

Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Planar Option
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Planar option which is created from
chained Curve 14 for the outer loop and chained Curve 13 for the inner loop. Notice that Delete
Outer Loop and Delete Inner Loop are pressed in and Curves 13 and 14 are deleted.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Trimmed
Surface ID List
2
Option:
Planar
Auto Chain.. .
Use All Edge Vertices
Delete Outer Loop
Outer Loop List
Curve 14
Delete Inner Loops
Inner Loop List
Curve 13
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
14
18
X
19
13
21
22
2
20
12
12
16
17
16

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Auto Chain Subordinate Form
The Auto Chain form provides a more interactive, user-controllable way of creating Chain
Curves. A start curve is selected for the chain and then during the creation of the chain, if
necessary, the user will be prompted to make decisions on how to proceed by selecting the
appropriate buttons. Toggles are provided for additional control of the chain curve creation.
This subordinate form is accessible from either the Create/Curve/Chain or the
Create/Surface/Trimmed forms.
If ON, the start point of the start curve can be switched from one end of the curve to the other.
Auto Execute must be OFF. A start curve should be selected and then toggle ON and OFF to see
a white marker designating the start point.
Auto Chain
Auto Execute
Select a Start Curve
Specify End Point
Switch Start Point
Pause At Every Point
Current Group Only
Free Edges Only
Highlight Chain Creation
Delete Constituent Curves
Specify the existing curve or edge to use for the start curve
of a chain either by cursor selecting them or by entering the
IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid
5.1.1. A Curve/Edge Select menu that appears can be used
to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
curve or edge.
If ON, a Point select box allows to specify an end point for
the chain curve. A chain curve will be created, if it reaches
the end point. If OFF, the default end point is the start point.
If ON, only curves in the Current Group are selectable
for creating a chain.
If ON, only curves in the Current Group are selectable
for creating a chain.
If ON, after chain completes, the constituent curves used to
create the chain will be deleted from the database.
If ON, the created chain curve will be highlighted. Either changing the value to OFF or
picking another start curve will erase the highlight.
If ON, the OK button must be selected for each constituent curve that is
identified as the next curve in the chain. If OFF, it will automatically continue
as.far as possible before user-intervention is necessary.

Next:
Used to update the "Choose Curve
to Continue" databox when multiple
choices are possible, i.e. a branch.
Previous: Used to update "Choose Curve to
Continue" databox when more than
two curves form a branch. Use in
conjunction with the Next button.
Backup: Used to backup one curve at a time
in the list of curves that have been
previously selected as constituents
for the resulting chain.
Delete:
Choose Curve to Continue
Next OK
Previous Quit
Backup Stop
Delete Break
-Apply- Cancel
Used to delete the curve in the
"Choose Curve to Continue"
databox from the database.
Identifies the curve which is chosen to continue
the chain.
OK:
Quit:
Used to finalize the selection on the curve
echoed in the "Choose Curve to Continue"
databox and continue the auto chain
process.
Used to end the auto chain process without
attempting to creating a chain.
Stop: Used to end the auto chain process and
attempt to create a chain from the
constituent curves. (Only necessary when
pressing the Apply button did not create a
chain.)
Break: Used to break the curve in the "Choose
Curve to Continue" databox.
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Composite Option
The Create/Surface/Trimmed/Composite option provides a tool for combining surfaces into a
single trimmed surface, where the parent trimmed surfaces may have gaps or overlaps of a
specified distance, and are not required to be topologically congruent. Though the constituent
surfaces are used for all evaluations without any approximation, the resulting composite surface
is seen as a single trimmed surface by all operations that reference it, such as the Paver.
Shadow Surface Method. The method used to create a composite trimmed surface is called a
Shadow Surface Method. The best way to describe a shadow surface is to use a real life analogy.
Consider a cloud in the sky to be a shadow surface. Then the sun, being the light source behind
the cloud, creates a shadow on the planet Earth, only in the area blocked by the cloud. The same
is true of the shadow surface, except a view vector is used to determine the light direction. The
shadow itself is called an Under Surface, whose valid region is defined by where the outlines of
the shadow surface appear with respect to a given view.
The Shadow Surface itself is a collection of specified surfaces, which may have gaps or overlaps
of a specified distance, and may or may not be topologically congruent. It is bounded by outer
and inner loops, defined as closed chains of curves or surface edges.
During surface evaluations, the Under Surface is used to classify the point relative to which
constituent surface (amongst the Shadow Surface) contains it. The point is mapped to the
parameter space of that constituent surface, and the evaluation is done directly on that surface.
Creating Composite Surfaces. The steps in creating composite surfaces are, for the most part,
the same as those for creating a normal trimmed surface, with the following exceptions:
More than one surface is specified to define the curvature (multiple parent surfaces).
A Gap Distance parameter must be specified to define the maximum length for gaps
or overlaps.
An appropriate view must be obtained, satisfying the following:
Double Intersections between the Shadow Surface and the view vector must not occur.
In other words, the Shadow Surface must not wrap around on itself relative to the
current view. This is because the Under Surface is flat, and there is not necessarily a
one-to-one mapping from the Shadow Surface to the Under Surface. Surfaces that
combine to create a cylinder, therefore, cannot be used to create a single composite
surface.
No Dead Space. Unpredictable results will occur if any portion of the Shadow Surface
does not have an Under Surface counterpart. An example of dead space would be an
area on the Shadow Surface which runs parallel to the view vector. Since this portion
has no area with respect to its projection onto the Under Surface, it will not be
represented properly in the resulting composite surface. This can cause unwanted
holes or spikes in the geometry.

Not Acceptable
Acceptable
S1
S1
S2
S2
Shadow
Plane
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Trimmed Method - Composite Option Example
Creates Surface 5 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Composite option which is created from
chained Curve 5 for the outer loop, chained Curve 4 for the inner loop and Surface 1:4 for the
parent surface. Notice that Delete Outer and Inner Loop and Delete Constituent Surface are
pressed in and Curves 1 and 2 and Surfaces 1:4 are deleted.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Trimmed
Surface ID List
5
Option: Composite
Auto Chain...
Gap Distance
0.005
Use All Edge Vertices
Delete Outer Loop
Outer Loop List
Curve 5
Delete Inner Loops
Inner Loop List
Curve 4
Delete Constituent Surface
Surface List
Surface 1:4
-Apply-
Before:
After:
2 3
10
12 4 11
13
1
2 3
10 11
12 13
1
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
1
4
5
2
5
7 8
3
4
6
5
8
6

Creating Surfaces From Vertices (Vertex Method)
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Vertex method creates four sided surfaces from four existing point locations that define the
surface’s vertices or corners. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations provided on the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Vertex
Surface ID List
1
Manifold
Manifold Surface
Auto Execute
Surface Vertex 1 List
Surface Vertex 2 List
Surface Vertex 3 List
Surface Vertex 4 List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If ON, MSC.Patran will allow you to specify a surface or solid
face in the Manifold Surface databox to manifold the new surface
onto.
If the Manifold toggle is ON, enter the manifold surface or face
for the new surface, either by entering the ID from the keyboard
(examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor selecting it
with the Surface Select menu.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify in Surface Vertex 1,2,3 and 4 Lists, the four points,
vertices, nodes or other point locations that define the surface’s
vertices or corners. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.1.1); or
cursor select them using the Point Select menu.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Vertex Method Example
Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Vertex method which is created from Points 12, 13, 14 and
Node 1. Notice that since Manifold is not on, the Manifold Surface databox is disabled.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Vertex
Surface ID List
2
Manifold
Manifold Surface
Auto Execute
Surface Vertex 1 List
Point 12
Surface Vertex 2 List
Point 13
Surface Vertex 3 List
Point 14
Surface Vertex 4 List
Node 1
-Apply-
Before:
Y
12
Z
After:
Y
12
Z
X
X
1
15
2
14
14
13
13

Extruding Surfaces and Solids
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Extrude method creates surfaces or solids by moving a curve or edge, or a surface or solid
face, respectively, through space along a defined axis with the option of scaling and rotating
simultaneously. This method is convenient for adding depth to a cross section, or for more
complex constructions that require the full capabilities of this form.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object:
Method: Extrude
ID List
1
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Origin of Scale and Rotate
[0 0 0]
Translation Vector
Sweep Parameters
Scale Factor
1.0
Angle
0.0
per
1
Auto Execute
List
-Apply-
Set to either: Surface or Solid.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface or solid to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Refer. Coordinate Frame is used by the Origin of Scale and
Rotate databox and the Translation Vector databox to express
the coordinates of the origin and vector within a specific
coordinate frame. Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord
0. Enter in Origin of Scale and Rotate, the point location of the
origin of scaling and rotation. Either enter the coordinate values
(example: [10 0 0]); or use the Point Select menu to cursor
define alternate point locations. Enter in Translation Vector, a
vector definition defining the direction and distance that the curve
or surface is moved through space. Either enter the coordinate
values (example: ); or use the Vector Select menu to
cursor define the translation vector.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Sweep Parameters
Scale Factor
1.0
Angle
0.0
per
1
Auto Execute
List
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is
ON which means you do not need
to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Enter in Scale Factor, a scaling factor value to be applied in
the two or three directions of the surface or solid, respectively.
A scale factor of one means no scaling will take place. Enter
in Angle, an optional angle value in degrees to rotate the
curve or surface about the translation vector. per
is not active or used if the PATRAN 2 Convention
toggle is OFF. If ON, enter how many parametric bi-cubic
surfaces per curve or how many parametric tri-cubic solids per
curve to create.
Specify in List, the curves or edges, or surfaces or
solid faces that you want to extrude to create the surfaces or
solids, respectively. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: for curves - Curve 10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1;
for surfaces - Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or cursor select them by
using the Curve or Surface Select menu.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

Surface Extrude Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Extrude method which is created from Curve 5. The surface
is extruded +10 units in the global Y direction.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Extrude
Surface ID List
1
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Origin of Scale and Rotate
[0 0 0]
Translation Vector
Sweep Parameters
Scale Factor
1.0
Angle
0.0
Surface per Curve
1
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 5
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Y
Z
Y
X
X
12
3
1
1
5
5
4
2
13

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Extrude Method Example
This example is the same as the previous example, except that Surface 1 is extruded +10 units in
the global Y direction about an angle of 90 degrees and with a scale factor of 2. The origin of the
scale and rotation is at Point 14.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Extrude
Surface ID List
1
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Origin of Scale and Rotate
Point 14
Translation Vector
Sweep Parameters
Scale Factor
2.0
Angle
90.0
Surface per Curve
1
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 5
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
15
12
12
2
14
14
5
13
16
13

Solid Extrude Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Extrude method which is created from a face of Solid 1. The
solid is extruded +10 units in the global Y direction, with a scale factor of 2. The origin of the scale
is at Point 21.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Extrude
Solid ID List
2
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Origin of Scale and Rotate
Point 21
Translation Vector
Sweep Parameters
Scale Factor
2.0
Angle
0.0
Solids per Curve
1
Auto Execute
Surface List
Solid 1.5
-Apply-
Before:
15
18Y
Z
After:
Z
Y
X
X
25
12
17
22
1
15
18
2
12
17
1
14
19
24
21
21
14
19
13
20
23
13
20

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Gliding Surfaces
Gliding Surfaces with the 1 Director Curve Option
The Glide method creates biparametric surfaces by sweeping base curve along a path defined by
a set of director curves or edges.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Glide
Surface ID List
1
Option: 1 Director Curve
Glide Input Options
◆ Fixed Glide
◆ Normal Project Glide
Sweep Parameters
Scale Factor
1.0
Auto Execute
Director Curve List
Base Curve List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If Normal Project Glide is ON, MSC.Patran avoids twisting
the surface. One degree-of-freedom of motion is eliminated. If
Fixed Glide is ON, MSC.Patran uses “fixed” logic which
basically drags the director curve along the base curve surface
without rotating. Three degrees-of-freedom of motion are
eliminated.
Enter an optional scale factor value to be applied to the
director curve during the glide. A default of 1 means no
change will occur in the size of the director curve during the
glide.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify in Director Curve List, the curve or edge that will act
as the Glide’s director curve. Specify in Base Curve List, one
or more base curves or edges for surfaces. Either enter the
IDs from the keyboard (examples: for curves - Curve 1:10,
Surface 10.1 11.1; for surfaces - Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or
cursor select the curves or edges, or the surfaces or faces
using the Curve or Surface Select menu.
☞ More Help:
Gliding Surfaces with
the 2 Director Curve

Surface Glide Method - 1 Director Curve Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Surfaces 2 through 4 using the Create/Glide method which is created from Curve 10 for
the Director Curve and Curves 11, 13 and 14 for the Base Curves. The scale is set to 1.0 and Fixed
Glide is pressed in.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Glide
Surface ID List
2
Option: 1 Director Curve
Glide Input Options
◆ Fixed Glide
◆ Normal Project Glide
Sweep Parameters
Scale Factor
1.0
Auto Execute
Director Curve List
Curve 10
Base Curve List
Curve 11 13 14
-Apply-
Before:
10
12
Z
16
After:
12
16
10
Z
Y
11
2
Y
11
X
18
18
X
20
13
3
13
19
19
21
4
14
14
17
22
17

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Gliding Surfaces with the 2 Director Curve Option
This option sweeps a base curve along a path defined by a pair of director curves. Automatic
scaling is optional.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Glide
Surface ID List
2
Option: 2 Director Curve
Scale Base Curve
Auto Execute
Director Curve 1 List
Base Curve List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If this toggle is ON, the base curve will automatically be scaled
to fit between the two director curves, If OFF, no scaling will
occur.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Director Curve 2 List Director Curve 1 List and Director Curve 2 List provide a
moving local coordinate system which provides for sweeping
and scaling of the base curve. The Base Curve is swept
along the two director curves. It does not need to be attached
to either director. A copy will be transformed into its
appropriate position for exclusive used by the surface.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Surface Glide Method - 2 Director Curve Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Surface 1 by using Curves 1 and 2 as the director curves and Curve 3 as the base curve
to glide along.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Glide
Surface ID List
1
Option: 2 Director Curve
Scale Base Curve
Auto Execute
Director Curve 1 List
Curve 1
Director Curve 2 List
Curve 2
Base Curve List
Curve 3
-Apply-
Before:
6
Y
Z
After:
Z
Y
3
X
X
5
1
3
6
1
1
5
1
1
2
2
4
3
2
2
4

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Surfaces and Solids Using the Normal Method
The Normal method creates parametric bi-cubic surfaces or solids which are defined by a set of
base curves or surfaces, respectively, and an offset distance from those curves or surfaces in the
direction of the curvature. The offset may be constant or have a varying thickness.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object:
Method:
Normal
ID List
1
Thickness Input Options
◆
◆
Constant Thickness
Varying Thicknesses
Thickness at u=0; v=0
1.0
Thickness at u=0; v=1
1.0
per
1
Set to either Surface or Solid.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface or solid
to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If more than one
ID is listed, the thickness of each surface or solid is based on
dividing the number of surfaces or solids into the thickness
value.
If Constant Thickness is ON, a single thickness value is
entered in the Thickness databox below (not shown here) which
represents a constant offset distance for the Normal.
If Varying Thickness is ON, you must enter two thickness values
for surfaces and four thickness values for solids at the parametric
ξ1( u)
and ξ2( v)
coordinate locations shown on the form. (The
form here shows the thickness databoxes for creating a surface.)

Thickness at u=0; v=0
1.0
Thickness at u=0; v=1
1.0
per
1
Construction Point Options
◆ Frenet Frame
◆ Construction Point
Construction Point
Flip Normal
Auto Execute
List
Specify in List, the curves or edges, or the
surfaces or faces that you want to create surfaces or
solids from, respectively. Either enter the IDs from
the keyboard (examples: for curves - Curve 10,
Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10,
Solid 10.1), or cursor select them by using the Curve
or Surface Select menu.
If ON, MSC.Patran will reverse the parametric ξ 1 direction for
the base curves listed in Curve List below.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Shown only for creating surfaces.
If Frenet Frame is ON, MSC.Patran uses a Frenet Frame in which the surfaces are blended together across
the contiguous edges, provided the edges have the same ξ1( u)
directions. If Construction Point is ON,
enter the point location in the Construction Point databox, which defines the offset or thickness direction.
The direction is measured from the first point of the first curve given in Curve List, to the construction point
location. Either enter the ID from the keyboard (examples: Point 10, Node 100, Curve 12.1); or cursor select
the point location by using the Point Select menu.
Active if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. If ON, specify the
number of parametric bi-cubic surfaces or parametric tri-cubic
solids to create from each curve or surface specified in
List below.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to chose the Apply button to execute the form.
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Normal Method Example
Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Normal method which is created from Curve 5. It has a
varying thickness of 0.75 at ξ1 = 0 and x2=0 and a thickness of 2.0 at x1=0 and x2=1. Notice that
the parametric direction is on.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Normal
Surface ID List
2
Thickness Input Options
◆
◆
Constant Thickness
Varying Thicknesses
Thickness at u=0; v=0
0.75
Thickness at u=0; v=1
2.0
Surfaces per Curve
1
Construction Point Options
◆
◆
Frenet Frame
Construction Point
Construction Point
Flip Curve Normal
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 5
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
X
Y
Z
13
X
15
13
5
1
122
2
5
14
1
12

Surface Normal Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Surface 2 which is created from an edge of Surface 1. It has a constant thickness of 0.25
and the normal direction is defined by a construction point, Point 9. Notice that the normal
direction is measured from the first vertex of the edge (Point 5) to Point 9.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Normal
Surface ID List
2
Thickness Input Options
◆
◆
Constant Thickness
Varying Thicknesses
Thickness
0.25
Surfaces per Curve
1
Construction Point Options
◆
◆
Frenet Frame
Construction Point
Construction Point
Point 9
Flip Curve Normal
Auto Execute
Curve List
Surface 1.2
Before:
5
5
Z
Z
After:
10
Y
Y
X
9
X
9
1
2
1
6
1
1
11
6
2
2

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Normal Method Example
Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Normal method which is created from Surface 1 and has a
thickness of 0.5. Notice that since PATRAN 2 Convention is not pressed in, the Solids per Surface
databox is disabled.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Normal
Solid ID List
1
Thickness Input Options
◆
◆
Constant Thickness
Varying Thicknesses
Thickness
0.5
Solids per Surface
1
Flip Surface Normal
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
-Apply-
Before:
1
7
Z
After:
1
Y
Z
Y
X
X
5
8
5
1
1
10
1
4
4
9
6
6

CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
This example is similar to the previous example, except that the thickness is -0.5 instead of +0.5.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Normal
Solid ID List
1
Thickness Input Options
◆
◆
Constant Thickness
Varying Thicknesses
Thickness
-0.5
Solids per Surface
1
Flip Surface Normal
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
-Apply-
Before:
1
Z
Z
1
Y
Y
After:
7
X
X
5
5
1
1
10
1
4
4
8
6
6
9

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Normal Method From a Face Example
Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Normal method which is created from a face of Solid 1 and has
a thickness of 0.25.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Normal
Solid ID List
2
Thickness Input Options
◆
◆
Constant Thickness
Varying Thicknesses
Thickness
0.25
Solids per Surface
1
Flip Surface Normal
Auto Execute
Surface List
Solid 1.6
-Apply-
Before:
20
12
Z
After:
27
Z
Y
20
Y
12
X
X
21
17
22
3 2
18
1
1
24
1
3 2
22
2
3 2
26 18
1 1
21
17
25
23
19
23
19

Creating Surfaces from a Surface Mesh (Mesh Method)
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Mesh method creates a surface from a congruent 2-D mesh. Vertices can be defined on the
surface boundary by selecting nodes in the Outer Corner Nodes or Additional Vertex Nodes
listboxes.
Every edge of the surface will have at least one node. If no node is selected to identify a vertex,
then one will be selected automatically. The nodes entered in the Outer Corner Node listbox will
define the parametrization of the surface and will also be a vertex. If no nodes are selected, 4
appropriate nodes will be selected automatically. Also the 4 nodes selected should be on the
outer loop. Additional vertices can be defined by selecting nodes in the Additional Vertex Nodes
listbox.
The longest free edge loop will be the outer loop of the surface. The holes inside the mesh can be
preserved or closed by invoking the options in the Inner Loop Options pull-down menu. When
few of the inner holes need to be preserved Inner Loop Options is set to Select. Identify the holes
by selecting at least 1 node on the hole. If selected, nodes on the outer loop and those not on the
free boundary, will be ignored.
The parametrization of the surface can also be improved by setting Surface Creation Methods to
Better Parametrization. However, if speed were important and the mesh used to create the
surface is of poor quality, selecting the Fast option under the Surface Creation Methods pulldown
menu would create a better surface.
Tessellated Surface is a representation of the underlying mesh that is used to create it. Therefore
the surface is piecewise planar and the normals are not continuous. The surface is primarily
generated to facilitate the meshing operation on complex surface models. Though these surfaces
support most of the geometry operations, it has limitations due to the nature of the surface.
To create a tessellated surface the mesh should have the following characteristics:
Congruent 2-D elements
Should be one connected set of elements
No more than 2 elements should share the same 2 nodes
The outer or inner loop should not intersect.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Created Tessellated Surface from Geometry Form
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Mesh
Surface ID List
9
Delete Original Elements
Element List
Elm 1:322 364:445
Outer Corner Nodes
1 2
Node 292
3 4
Node 273
Additional Vertex Nodes
Node 50 34 303
Inner Loop Options: All
Surface Creation Methods
Fast
-Apply-
Node 288
Node 253
Figure 4-2
If toggled ON, the elements selected will be deleted when
the surface is created successfully.
Congruent element list that defines the surface.
Select four corner nodes that define the four vertices of
the resulting green surface or the parent surface of a
trimmed surface. If any of the boxes are left empty, one
will be selected automatically.
If there are more than four vertices for the surface, the
additional nodes can be listed in the Additional Vertex
Nodes listbox.
By setting Inner Loop Options to All, None or Select, the
holes in the resulting surface can be defined.
Note: When the Inner Loop Options is set to Select, a
node listbox opens. Here the holes to be preserved can
be identified by the nodes on its edge. Any nodes not
on the hole edge or on the outer boundary will be
ignored.
By selecting the surface creation option, emphasis can
be placed on parametrization or speed.

Creating Midsurfaces
Creating Midsurfaces with the Automatic Option
This form is used to create a Midsurface using the Automatic Method.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Midsurface
Surface ID List
1
Max. Thickness
0.01
Auto Execute
Solid List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Specify the midsurface option:
1. Automatic
2. Manual
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Specify the maximum distance the solid face pairs can be apart
in order to calculate a midsurface between (wall thickness)
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the solid(s) to create a midsurface from either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can
be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
solid.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Create Midsurface Automatic Example
Create surfaces 1t6 by automatically computing the midsurfaces of solid 1 where the solid wall
thickness is less than 8.1.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Midsurface
Surface ID List
1
Max. Thickness
8.1
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Y
X
After:
Z
Y
X
2
3
4
1
1
1
6
5

Creating Midsurfaces with the Manual Option
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
This form is used to create a Midsurface using the Manual Method. The resulting midsurface
will be trimmed to the domain of the parent surface pairs.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Midsurface
Surface ID List
1
Auto Execute
First Surface Set
Offset Surface Set
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Specify the midsurface option:
1. Automatic
2. Manual
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the first surface set of the pair to create a midsurface
from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Surface 1, Solid 1.1. The Surface
select menu that appears can be used to define how you want
to cursor select the appropriate surface.
-Apply- Specify the offset surface set of the pair to create a midsurface
from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Surface 2, Solid 1.2. The Surface
select menu that appears can be used to define how you want
to cursor select the appropriate surface.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Create Midsurface Manual Example
Create surfaces 1t3 by manually selecting solid faces Solid 1.5 and Solid 1.9, Solid 1.4 and Solid
1.8, Solid 1.7 and Solid 1.10 as face pairs to create the midsurfaces from.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Midsurface
Surface ID List
1
Auto Execute
Solid Face List
Solid 1.5 1.4 1.7
Offset Solid Face List
Solid 1.9 1.8 1.10
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Z
Y
After:
Y
X
X
1
1
1
2
3

Creating Solid Primitives
Creating a Solid Block
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
This form is used to create a solid block with user input a point, length, width, height, and
reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the
input target solid using the created block as the tool solid.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
1
Block Parameters
X Length List
1.0
Y Length List
1.0
Z Length List
1.0
Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Base Origin Point List
[0 0 0]
-Apply-
Specify the Solid Primitive type to create:
1. Block
2. Cylinder
3. Cone
4. Sphere
5. Torus
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Specify the length, width, and height of the block.
If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the
selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a
boolean operation on with the created block.
Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the block.
Default is the global coord 0.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the base origin point of the block. Under The Refer.
Coordinate Frame, the created block will start at this location
extending length in x-axis, width in y-axis, and height in z-axis. If
the base origin point is an [x,y,z] definition, the origin of the
block will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creates solid blocks 1 and 2 at [0 0 0] and [2 0 0] with parameters of X=1.0, Y=1.0, Z=1.0 and
X=2.0, Y=2.0, Z=2.0 respectively.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
1
Block Parameters
X Length List
1.0 2.0
Y Length List
1.0 2.0
Z Length List
1.0 2.0
Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Base Origin Point List
[0 0 0] [2 0 0]
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Y
After:
Z
Y
X
X

Creates solid block 1 at [-1 .5 .5] with parameters of X=5.0, Y=1.0, Z=1.0 while performing a
boolean add operation with solid 1.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
2
Block Parameters
X Length List
5.0
Y Length List
1.0
Z Length List
1.0
Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Base Origin Point List
[-1 .5 .5] Boolean Operation
Geometry
-Apply-
Target Solid List
Solid 1
Before:
Z
Y
After:
Z
Y
Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON)
OK Cancel
X
X
1
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Solid Cylinder
This form is used to create a solid cylinder with user input a point, height, radius, optional
thickness, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform
boolean operation with the input target solid using the created cylinder as the tool solid.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
1
Cylinder Parameters
Height List
1.0
Radius List
1.0
[Thickness List]
0.0
Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Base Center Point List
[0 0 0]
Axis List
Coord 0.3
-Apply-
Specify the Solid Primitive type to create:
1. Block
2. Cylinder
3. Cone
4. Sphere
5. Torus
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Specify the height, radius, and optional thickness which is used
to shell the cylinder.
Default = 0.0 which designates no shelling.
If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the
selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a
boolean operation on with the created cylinder.
Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the
cylinder. Default is the global coord 0.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the base center point and the axis of the cylinder.
If the base center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the
cylinder will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame.
The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer. Coordinate
Frame, therefore, the cylinder axis will be defined by the absolute
value of the Axis specified, where the default is the z axis of
Coord 0.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions

Creates solid cylinder 1 at point 1with parameters of Height=3.0, Radius=0.25, along X axis.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
1
Cylinder Parameters
Height List
3.0
Radius List
0.25
[Thickness List]
0.0
Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Base Center Point List
Point 1
Axis List
Coord 0.1
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Y
After:
Z
Y
X
X
1
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creates Solid Cylinder 1 at point 1 with parameters Height=3.0, Radius=0.25, a wall thickness =
0.125 along X axis while performing a boolean add operation with solid 1.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
2
Cylinder Parameters
Height List
3.0
Radius List
0.25
[Thickness List]
0.125
Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Base Center Point ListBoolean
Operation
Geometry
point 1
Axis List
Coord 0.1
Target Solid List
Solid 1
Before:
Y
After:
-Apply-
Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON)
Z
Z
OK Cancel
1
Y
X
X
5
3
5
3
8
8
4
2
4
2
9
9
6

Creating Solid Sphere
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
This form is used to create a solid sphere with user input a point, radius, and optional reference
coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target
solid using the created sphere as the tool solid.
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
1
Sphere Parameters
Radius List
1.0
Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]
Axis List
Coord 0.3
Geometry
-Apply-
Specify the Solid Primitive type to create:
1. Block
2. Cylinder
3. Cone
4. Sphere
5. Torus
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Specify the radius of the sphere
If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the
selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a
boolean operation on with the created sphere.
Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the
sphere. Default is the global coord 0.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the center point and the axis of the sphere.
If the center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the
sphere will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate
Frame. The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer.
Coordinate Frame, therefore, the sphere axis will be defined by
the absolute value of the Axis specified, where the default is the
z axis of Coord 0.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creates Solid Sphere 1 at [0 0 0] with a Radius of 1.0 along the Z axis.
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
1
Sphere Parameters
Radius List
1.0
Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]
Axis List
Coord 0.3
Geometry
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Y
After:
Z
Y
X
X

CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Solid Sphere 1 at point 1with a Radius of 0.5 along the Y axis while performing a boolean
add operation with solid 1.
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
2
Sphere Parameters
Radius List
0.5
Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Center Point List
Point 1
Axis List
Coord 0.2
Geometry
Boolean Operation
Geometry
-Apply-
Target Solid List
Solid 1
Before:
Z
Y
After:
Z
Y
Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON)
OK Cancel
X
X

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Solid Cone
This form is used to create a solid cone with user input a point, base radius, top radius, height,
optional thickness, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to
perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created cone as the tool solid.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
1
Cone Parameters
Height List
1.0
Base Radius List
1.0
Top Radius List
0.5
[Thickness List]
0.0
Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Base Center Point List
[0 0 0]
Axis List
Coord 0.3
-Apply-
Specify the Solid Primitive type to create:
1. Block
2. Cylinder
3. Cone
4. Sphere
5. Torus
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Specify the height, top radius, bottom radius, and optional
thickness. The optional thickness is used to create a hollow
cone.
Default = 0.0 which designates no hollowing.
If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the
selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a
boolean operation on with the created cone.
Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the cone.
Default is the global coord 0.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the base center point and the axis of the cone.
If the base center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of
the cone will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate
Frame. The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer.
Coordinate Frame, therefore, the cone axis will be defined by
the absolute value of the Axis specified, where the default is
the z axis of Coord 0.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions

CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Solid Cone 1 at [0 0 0] and Cone 2 at [3 0 0] along the Z axis with parameters Height=2.0,
Base Radius=1.0, Top Radius=0.5 and Thickness for Cone 1=0.0 and Thickness for Cone 2=0.125
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
1
Cone Parameters
Height List
2.0
Base Radius List
1.0
Top Radius List
0.5
[Thickness List]
0.0 0.125
Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Base Center Point List
[0 0 0] [3 0 0]
Axis List
Coord 0.3
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Y
After:
Z
Y
X
X

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creates Solid Cones 1 and 2 at [.5 1 .5] along the Y axis with parameters Height=-5.0, Base
Radius=0.25, Top Radius=0.0625 while performing a boolean add operation with Solid 1 and 2.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
1
Cone Parameters
Height List
2.0
Base Radius List
1.0
Top Radius List
0.5
[Thickness List]
0.0 0.125
Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Base Center Point List
[0 0 0] [3 0 0]
Axis List
Coord 0.3
Before:
Z
Y
After:
Boolean Operation
Geometry
Target Solid List
Solid 1 2
Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON)
-Apply-
Z
Y
X
X
OK Cancel
1
2

Creating Solid Torus
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
This form is used to create a solid torus with user input a point, major radius, minor radius, and
optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation
with the input target solid using the created torus as the tool solid.
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
1
Torus Parameters
Major Radius List
1.0
Minor Radius List
0.5
Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]
Axis List
Coord 0.3
Geometry
-Apply-
Specify the Solid Primitive type to create:
1. Block
2. Cylinder
3. Cone
4. Sphere
5. Torus
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Specify the major radius and minor radius.
If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the
selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a
boolean operation on with the created torus.
Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the torus.
Default is the global coord 0.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the center point and the axis of the torus.
If the center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the torus
will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame. The
input Axis is not with reference to the Refer. Coordinate Frame,
therefore, the torus axis will be defined by the absolute value of
the Axis specified, where the default is the z axis of Coord 0.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creates Solid Torus 1 and 2 at [0 0 0] with parameters Major Radius=1.0, Minor Radius=0.5 and
Torus 1 along the X axis and Torus 2 along the Y axis.
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
1
Torus Parameters
Major Radius List
1.0
Minor Radius List
0.5
Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]
Axis List
Coord 0.1 0.2
Geometry
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Y
After:
Z
Y
X
X

Creates Solid Torus 1 at [0 0 0] along the Z axis with parameters Major Radius=1.0, Minor
Radius=0.25 while performing a boolean add operation with Solid 1.
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
2
Torus Parameters
Major Radius List
1.0
Minor Radius List
0.25
Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]
Axis List
Coord 0.3
Geometry
-Apply-
Target Solid List
Solid 1
Boolean Operation
Geometry
Before:
Z
Y
After:
Z
Y
Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON)
OK Cancel
X
X
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Boolean operation during primitive creation
This form is used to perform a Solid boolean operation on an existing solid during the creation
of a new primitive solid. This is a child form of the parent Create,Solid,Primitive form.
Boolean Operation
Geometry
Target Solid List
Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON)
OK Cancel
Specify the boolean operation type:
1. Add
2. Subtract
3. Intersect
Specify the solid to perform a boolean operation on either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can
be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
solids.
This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing
mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically
after a boolean operation. If the Geometry Preference toggle,
Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this button will
be enabled and the label will be, “Update Solid Mesh/LBC”.
Pressing this button after the boolean operation is complete will
update the existing mesh on the target solid.

Creating Solids from Surfaces (Surface Method)
Creating Solids from Two Surfaces
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Surface method with the 2 Surface option, creates solids between two surfaces or solid faces.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Surface
Solid ID List
1
Option: 2 Surface
Parameterization Method
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Auto Align Orientations
Auto Execute
Starting Surface List
Ending Surface List
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Basic Functions is ON which means you do
not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Deactivated and not used for the 2 Surface option.
If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2
directions. The ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions are defined by the surface’s
connectivity. On the Geometric Properties form under the
menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric you can plot the ξ 1
direction of the new curves by turning the Parametric Direction
toggle ON.
Specify the surfaces or solid faces for the surfaces to be
created, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or cursor define the
surface locations using the Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
☞ More Help:
Topology (p. 10)
Connectivity (p. 15)
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric
Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Surface Method With 2 Surface Option Example
Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Surface/2 Surface option. The solid is created between Surfaces
2 and 3.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Surface
Solid ID List
1
Option: 2 Surface
Parameterization Method
◆
◆
Chord Length
Uniform
Auto Align Orientations
Auto Execute
Starting Surface List
Surface 2
Ending Surface List
Surface 3
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
11
12
Z
Y
11
12
Y
3
X
3
X
9
10
9
5
10
5
6
6
1
2
2
8
8
7
7

Solid Surface Method With 2 Surface Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Surface/2 Surface option. The solid is created between Surface
2 and a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6, using the Surface select menu icon listed below.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Surface
Solid ID List
1
Option: 2 Surface
Parameterization Method
◆
◆
Chord Length
Uniform
Auto Align Orientations
Auto Execute
Starting Surface List
Surface 2
Ending Surface List
Construct2CurvesSurface(Eval
-Apply-
Surface Select Menu Icon
Before:
20
12
20
12
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
5
5
21
2
17
17
22
18
118
21
2
22
6
6
23
19
23
19

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Solids from Three Surfaces (Surface Method)
The Surface method with the 3 Surface option creates solids that pass through three existing
surfaces or solid faces.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Surface
Solid ID List
1
Option: 3 Surface
Parameterization Method
◆
Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Auto Align Orientations
Auto Execute
Starting Surface List
Middle Surface List
Ending Surface List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points
defining the new solid is based on the chord length distances
relative to the location of the solid’s starting, middle and ending
surfaces. This means the solid may or may not be uniformly
parameterized, depending on where the surfaces are located. If
Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points defining
the solid will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the
surfaces are located. That is, the solid will be always uniformly
parameterized.
If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2
directions before creating the solid. The ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions are
defined by the surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ 1 direction
of the new curves by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on
the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display
Properties/Geometric.

Auto Align Orientations
Auto Execute
Starting Surface List
Middle Surface List
Ending Surface List
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify in Starting, Middle and Ending Surface Lists, the
surfaces or solid faces for the new solids to pass through,
either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples:
Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor defining the surface
locations using the Surface Select menu.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric
Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Surface Method With 3 Surface Option Example
Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Surface/3 Surface option. The solid is created between a face
of Solid 1, Surface 2 and a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6 by using the Surface select menu
icon listed below.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Surface
Solid ID List
2
Option: 3 Surface
Parameterization Method
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Auto Align Orientations
Auto Execute
Starting Surface List
Solid 1.2
Middle Surface List
Surface 2
Ending Surface List
Construct2CurveSurface(Eval
-Apply-
Surface Select Menu Icon
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
20
12
20
12
27
24
27
24
5
5
26
25
26
25
17
21
18
2
17
1
22
21
18
2
1
28
22
31
31
28
6
6
30
29
23
19
30
29
23
19

Creating Solids from Four Surfaces (Surface Method)
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Surface method using the 4 Surface option creates solids that pass through four existing
surfaces or solid faces.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Surface
Solid ID List
1
Option: 4 Surface
Parameterization Method
◆
Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Auto Align Orientations
Auto Execute
Starting Surface List
Second Surface List
Third Surface List
Ending Surface List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created.
See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions.
If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points
defining the new solid is based on the chord length distances
relative to the location of the solid’s starting, second, third and
ending surfaces. This means the solid may or may not be
uniformly parameterized, depending on where the surfaces are
located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the
points defining the solid will be uniformly spaced, regardless of
where the surfaces are located. That is, the solid will be always
uniformly parameterized.
If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2
directions before creating the solid. The ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions are
defined by the surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ 1 direction
of the new curves by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on
the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display
Properties/Geometric.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Auto Align Orientations
Auto Execute
Starting Surface List
Second Surface List
Third Surface List
Ending Surface List
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the surfaces or solid faces for the new solids to pass
through, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples:
Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or by cursor defining the surface
locations using the Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
☞ More Help:
Topology (p. 10)
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric
Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

Solid Surface Method With 4 Surface Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Surface/4 Surface option. The solid is created between a face
of Solid 1, Surface 2, a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6 and Surface 3.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Surface
Solid ID List
2
Option: 4 Surface
Parameterization Method
◆
Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Auto Align Orientations
Auto Execute
Starting Surface List
Solid 1.2
Second Surface List
Surface 2
Third Surface List
Construct2CurveSurface(Eval
Ending Surface List
Surface 3
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
32
20
12
27
24
32
20
12
27
24
5
5
21
18
2
17
25
35
3
33
22
31
26
1
28
212
18
2
17
26
1
25
22
6
35
3
33
31
28
6
23
19
30
29
34
23
19
30
29
34

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Solids with the N Surface Option
The Surface method using the N-Surfaces option creates solids that pass through any number of
existing surfaces or solid faces.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Surface
Solid ID List
1
Option: N-Surfaces
Parameterization Method
◆
Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Auto Align Orientations
Surface List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created.
See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions.
If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points
defining the new solid is based on the chord length distances
relative to the location of the surfaces specified in Surface List.
This means the solid may or may not be uniformly parameterized,
depending on where the surfaces are located. If Uniform is ON,
the parametric coordinates of the points defining the solid will be
uniformly spaced, regardless of where the surfaces are located.
That is, the solid will be always uniformly parameterized.
If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2
directions before creating the solid. The ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions are
defined by the surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ 1 direction
of the new curves by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on
the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display
Properties/Geometric.
Specify in Surface List, two or more surfaces or faces that the solid
will pass through. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Surface 1:10, Solid 10.2 11.1), or cursor select the
surfaces or faces using the Surface Select menu.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric
Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

Solid Surface Method with N-Surfaces Option Example
Creates Solid1 using the Create/Surface/N-Surfaces option. The solid is created between
Surfaces 2, 7, 8, 9 and 10.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Surface
Solid ID List
1
Option: N-Surfaces
Parameterization Method
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Auto Align Orientations
Surface List
Surface 2 7:10
-Apply-
Before:
28
41
After:
28
Y
41
Z
Y
10
Z
10
X
X
43
43
42
42
38
24
38
24
9
9
35
20
35
20
39
40
39
40
8 32
16
16
18
32
12
13 7
37
12
36
13 7
37
36
2
34
33
2
34
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
33
14
15
14
15

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid
The B-rep method creates boundary represented solids by specifying a list of surfaces or solid
faces that form a closed topologically congruent volume. B-rep solids can only be meshed with
MSC.Patran’s TetMesh. For more information, see Gliding Solids (p. 348).
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: B-rep
Solid ID List
1
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the surfaces from the
database that are specified in Surface List.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify in Surface List, a set of surfaces or solid faces that
form a closed volume. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Surface 1:10, Solid 10.2 11.1), or cursor select the
surfaces or faces using the Surface Select menu that appears.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions
Topology (p. 10)
B-rep Solid (p. 24)
Building B-rep Solids (p. 40)

Solid B-rep Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Solid/B-rep method which is created from Surfaces 2, 3, 4, and
8 through 14. Notice that since Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in, the surfaces are deleted.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: B-rep
Solid ID List
1
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 2 3 4 8:14
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Y
After:
Z
Y
X
X
8
13
10
9
4
3
12
1
2
11
14

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating a Decomposed Solid
The Decompose method creates solids from two opposing solid faces by choosing four vertex
locations on each face and then a solid is created from the two decomposed faces.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Decompose
Solid ID List
2
Solid Faces
◆
◆
Face 1
Face 2
Solid Face 1
Auto Execute
Face Vertex 1 List
Face Vertex 2 List
Face Vertex 3 List
Face Vertex 4 List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created.
See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions.
The switch to select/show the two Solid Faces.
Enter the first solid face to decompose either by entering the ID
from the keyboard (example: Solid 1.1); or by cursor selecting
the solid face.
Enter in the Face Vertex 1,2,3 and 4 listboxes, the four vertices
that will define the surface from which the new solid will be created
from. Use the Vertex Select menu that appears on the bottom to
cursor select the vertices.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

Solid Decompose Method with Face 1 Option Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Solid 2 by selecting four points on solid face Solid 1.6 and four points on solid face Solid
1.5.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Decompose
Solid ID List
2
Solid Faces
◆
◆
Face 1
Face 2
Solid Face 1
Solid 1.6
Auto Execute
Face Vertex 1 List
1.6(u0.250000)(v0.750000)
Face Vertex 2 List
1.6(u0.788091)(v0.706851)
Face Vertex 3 List
1.6(u0.727486)(v0.239363)
Face Vertex 4 List
1.6(u0.239563)(v0.283655)
-Apply-
Step 1:
Z
Y
6
5
X
2
1
1
7
8
3
4

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Decompose Method with Face 2 Option Example
Creates Solid 2 by selecting four points on solid face Solid 1.6 and four points on solid face Solid
1.6.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Decompose
Solid ID List
2
Solid Faces
◆
◆
Face 1
Face 2
Solid Face 2
Solid 1.5
Auto Execute
Face Vertex 1 List
1.5(u0.314087)(v0.722847)
Face Vertex 2 List
1.5(u0.707491)(v0.666261)
Face Vertex 3 List
1.5(u0.658263)(v0.286671)
Face Vertex 4 List
1.5(u0.291373)(v0.250680)
-Apply-
Step 2:
Z
Y
Final Step:
Z
Y
6
5
X
6
5
X
9
10
2
1
2
1
7
8
13
16
7
2
12 14 15
1
11
8
3
4
3
4

Creating Solids from Faces
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Face method creates a solid from five or six surfaces or solid faces which define the solid’s
exterior faces. The surfaces or faces can be in any order and they can have any parametric
orientation, but they must define a valid exterior of a solid.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Face
Solid ID List
1
Option: 6 Face
Auto Execute
Solid Face 1 List
Solid Face 2 List
Solid Face 3 List
Solid Face 4 List
Solid Face 5 List
Solid Face 6 List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Set this option to 5 Face or 6 Face.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify in the Solid Face Lists, the list of surfaces or solid
faces that the solid will be created from. Depending if the form
is set to the 5 Face or 6 Face option, you will see five or six
Solid Face List boxes. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select them
using the Surface Select menu.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Face Method With 6 Faces Example
Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Face method which is created from Surfaces 2 through 7. The
option is set to 6 Face.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Face
Solid ID List
1
Option: 6 Face
Auto Execute
Solid Face 1 List
Surface 2
Solid Face 2 List
Surface 6
Solid Face 3 List
Surface 4
Solid Face 4 List
Surface 5
Solid Face 5 List
Surface 7
Solid Face 6 List
Surface 3
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
4
6
5
2
1
7
3

Solid Face Method With 5 Faces Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Face method which is created from Surfaces 1 through 5. The
option is set to 5 Face.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Face
Solid ID List
1
Option: 5 Face
Auto Execute
Solid Face 1 List
Surface 1
Solid Face 2 List
Surface 3
Solid Face 3 List
Surface 2
Solid Face 4 List
Surface 4
Solid Face 5 List
Surface 5
-Apply-
Before:
1
1
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
3
1
3
4
2
2
5
1
4
4
3
5
2
5
6
6

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Solids from Vertices (Vertex Method)
The Vertex method creates parametric tri-cubic solids by specifying a list of eight point locations
that represent the eight vertices of the new solid. The point locations can be points, vertices,
nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Vertex
Solid ID List
1
Auto Execute
Solid Vertex 1 List
Solid Vertex 2 List
Solid Vertex 3 List
Solid Vertex 4 List
Solid Vertex 5 List
Solid Vertex 6 List
Solid Vertex 7 List
Solid Vertex 8 List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify in Solid Vertex 1-8 Lists, the list of points, vertices,
nodes or other point locations that the solid will be created
from. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Point
10, Curve 10.1, Node 20); or cursor select them using the Point
Select menu.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

Solid Vertex Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Vertex method which is created from Points 12 through 15 and
Nodes 34, 44, 254 and 264.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Vertex
Solid ID List
2
Auto Execute
Solid Vertex 1 List
Point 12
Solid Vertex 2 List
Point 13
Solid Vertex 3 List
Point 14
Solid Vertex 4 List
Point 15
Solid Vertex 5 List
Node 34
Solid Vertex 6 List
Node 44
Solid Vertex 7 List
Node 254
Solid Vertex 8 List
Node 264
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Z
12
12
16
Y
After:
Y
X
X
13
13
19
1
15
15
17
14
14
18

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Gliding Solids
The Glide method creates triparametric solids by sweeping a base surface curve along a path
defined by a set of director curves or edges.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Glide
Solid ID List
1
Glide Input Options
◆ Normal Project Glide
◆ Fixed Glide
Sweep Parameters
Scale Factor
1.0
Auto Execute
Director Curve List
Base Surface List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If Normal Project Glide is ON, MSC.Patran avoids
twisting the solid. One degree-of-freedom of motion is
eliminated. If Fixed Glide is ON, MSC.Patran uses “fixed”
logic which basically drags the director curve along the
base curve or base surface without rotating. Three
degrees-of -freedom of motion are eliminated.
Enter an optional scale factor value to be applied to the
director curve during the glide. A default of 1 means no
change will occur in the size of the director curve during
the glide.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify in Director Curve List, the curve or edge that will
act as the Glide’s director curve. Specify in Base Surface
List, a base surface or face for the Glide method for solids.
Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: for
curves - Curve 1:10, Surface 10.1 11.1; for surfaces -
Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select the curves or
edges, or the surfaces or faces using the Curve or Surface
Select menu.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Solid Glide Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Glide method which is created from Curve 5 for the Director
Curve and Surface 2 for the Base Surface. The scale is set to 0.25 and Fixed Glide is pressed in.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Glide
Solid ID List
1
Glide Input Options
◆ Normal Project Glide
◆ Fixed Glide
Sweep Parameters
Scale Factor
0.25
Auto Execute
Director Curve List
Curve 5
Base Surface List
Surface 2
-Apply-
Before:
17
18
Y
17
18
Y
Z
After:
Z
X
X
2
2
16
12
16
12
1
5
5
20
21
15
19
15

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
4.3 Creating Coordinate Frames
Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 3Point Method
The 3Point method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame by specifying
three point locations. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations
provided on the Point select menu. For more information, see Overview of Create Methods For
Coordinate Frames (p. 63).
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: 3Point
Coord ID List
1
Type: Rectangular
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Origin
[0 0 0]
Point on Axis 3
[0 0 1]
Point on Plane 1-3
[1 0 0]
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate
frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.
Specify the coordinate frame to express the coordinate values
of the three point locations, if coordinate values are entered.
Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify three point locations for: 1 ) the new coordinate frame’s
origin; 2) a point on the third axis; and 3) a point on the plane
formed by the coordinate frame’s first and third axes. Either
enter the point locations’ coordinate values (example: [10 0 0])
or cursor select the point locations using the Point Select menu.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

Coordinate Frame 3Point Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates a cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100, using the Create/3Point method. Its origin is
located at [0,0,0]; a point on its Z axis is at [0,0,1]; and a point on the R-Z plane is at [0,0,1]. The
coordinate values are expressed within the global coordinate frame, Coord 0.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: 3Point
Coord ID List
100
Type: Cylindrical
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Origin
[0 0 0]
Point on Axis 3
[0 0 1]
Point on Plane 1-3
[1 0 0]
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
2
2
T
Z
100
R

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Coordinate Frame 3Point Method Example
Creates a cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 200. Its origin is located at Point 8; a point on its Z
axis is at [x8 y8 2] (which is at the X and Y coordinates of Point 8 and at Z=2); and a point on the
R-Z plane is at Point 6.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: 3Point
Coord ID List
200
Type: Cylindrical
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Origin
Point 8
Point on Axis 3
[x8 y8 2]
Point on Plane 1-3
Point 6
-Apply-
Before:
5
After:
5
Z
Z
Y
Y
1
1
X
X
8
T
Z
8200
R
1
1
6
6
2
2

Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Axis Method
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Axis method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame by specifying
three point locations for the coordinate frame’s origin, at the first, second or third axis and on
one of the remaining two axes. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations provided on the Point select menu. See Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate
Frames (p. 63).
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: Axis
Coord ID List
1
Type: Rectangular
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis: Axis 1 and 2
Auto Execute
Origin
[0 0 0]
Point on Axis 1
[1 0 0]
Point on Axis 2
[0 1 0]
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate frame
to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.
Specify the coordinate frame to express the coordinate values of
the three point locations, if coordinate values are entered. Default is
the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0.
Set this option to Axis 1 and 2, Axis 2 and 3, or Axis 3 and 1.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify three point locations for: 1) the new coordinate frame’s
origin, 2) a point on axis 1, 2 or 3 and 3) a point on axis 2, 3 or 1.
Either enter the coordinate values (example: [10 0 0]) or cursor
select the point locations by using the Point Select menu.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Coordinate Frame Axis Method Example
Creates a rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100, using the Create/Axis method. Its definition
is expressed within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0; its origin is located at [0,0,0]; a
point on its X axis is at Point 20; and a point on its Y axis is at Point 12.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: Axis
Coord ID List
100
Type: Rectangular
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis: Axis 1 and 2
Auto Execute
Origin
[0 0 0]
Point on Axis 1
Point 20
Point on Axis 2
Point 12
-Apply-
Before:
16
Y
2
17 Z X
18
After:
16
Y
2
17 Z X
18
20
100 Z
X
20
Y
12
12
19
19

Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Euler Method
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Euler method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame through three
specified rotations about the axes of an existing coordinate frame. See Overview of Create
Methods For Coordinate Frames (p. 63).
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: Euler
Coord ID List
1
Type: Type: Rectangular
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis:
Rotation Parameters ...
Auto Execute
Origin
[0 0 0]
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate
frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.
Specify the coordinate frame whose axes the three rotations
will be about. Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord
0.
When ON, a Rotation Parameters subordinate form appears
which is described on Rotation Parameters Subordinate
Form Example (p. 357).
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the point location for the origin of the new coordinate
frame, either by entering the coordinate values which are
expressed within the reference coordinate frame (example:
[10 0 0]); or by cursor defining the point location using the
Point Select menu.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Coordinate Frame Euler Method Example
Creates a spherical coordinate frame, Coord 200, using the Create/Euler method. Its definition
is expressed within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100; its origin is located at Point 14
and it is rotated 45 degrees about Coord 100’s X axis.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: Euler
Coord ID List
200
Type: Spherical
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 100
Axis: Rotation Parameters ...
Auto Execute
Origin
Point 14
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Z
Y
After:
Y
X
14
X
Y
Z
200
X
Z
13
Y
100 X
Z
13
Y
100 X
12
12

Rotation Parameters Subordinate Form Example
The Rotation Parameters subordinate form appears when the Rotation Parameters button is
pressed on the Geometry Application Create/Coord/Euler form. See Creating Coordinate
Frames Using the Euler Method (p. 355).
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
This form allows you to define up to three rotations to be performed about the specified
Reference Coordinate Frame axes. The rotations are performed in sequence from top to bottom
on the form.
Rotation Parameters
First Rotation
Axis: About Axis 3
Angle of Rotation
0.0
Second Rotation
Axis: About Axis 1
Angle of Rotation
0.0
Third Rotation
Axis: About Axis 3
Angle of Rotation
0.0
OK Cancel
Set this option to About Axis 1, About Axis 2 or About Axis 3.
Specify an angle in degrees between -180° and +180° to
rotate about the indicated axis.
Set this option to About Axis 1, About Axis 2 or About Axis 3.
Specify an angle in degrees between -180° and +180° to
rotate about the indicated axis.
Set this option to About Axis 1, About Axis 2 or About
Axis 3.
Specify an angle in degrees between -180° and +180° to
rotate about the indicated axis.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Normal Method
The Normal method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame with its
origin at a point location on a specified surface or solid face, and its axis 3 direction normal to
the surface or face. The coordinate frame’s axis 1 direction can be aligned with the surface’s or
ξ 1
face’s parametric direction, and its axis 2 direction will be aligned with the direction or
visa versa. See Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames (p. 63) for more
information.
You can plot the parametric ξ1 and ξ2 directions by pressing the Parametric Direction button
on the Geometric Properties form under the Display/Display Properties/Geometric menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: Normal
Coord ID List
1
Type: Rectangular
Auto Execute
Origin
[0 0 0]
Surface
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate
frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Create x-axis of the coordinate frame along the u-direction or
along the v-direction of the surface.
Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify in Origin, the point location for the origin of the new
coordinate frame, either by entering the coordinate values that
are expressed within the global rectangular coordinate frame,
Coord 0 (example: [10 0 0]); or by cursor defining the point
location using the Point Select menu.
Specify in Surface, the surface or solid face that the new
coordinate frame will be created on, whose normal direction will
define the coordinate frame’s axis 3 direction. Either enter the
ID from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or
cursor select it by using the Surface Select menu.
ξ 2
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

Coordinate Frame Normal Method Example
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Creates a rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 1, using the Create/Normal method whose Z axis
is normal to Surface 2 and its origin is at Point 16. Notice that Coord 1’s X and Y axis are aligned
with Surface 2’s and directions.
ξ 1
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: Normal
Coord ID List
1
Type: Rectangular
Auto Execute
Origin
Point 16
Surface
Surface 2
-Apply-
ξ 2
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
15
X
15
X
13
14
13
14
16
2
Y
Z
16 1
X
2
1
1
2
2
12
12

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Coordinate Frame Normal Method On a Face Example
Creates rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2 at Point 17, whose Z axis is normal to the top face
of Solid 1.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: Normal
Coord ID List
2
Type: Rectangular
Auto Execute
Origin
Point 17
Surface
solid 1.6
-Apply-
Before:
16
Z
After:
16
10
Z
Y
10
Y
13
X
13
X
9
9
Z
Z
T
T
R
R
1
1
11
11
17
X17
2
15
Z
Y
15
12
12
14
14

Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 2 Vector Method
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The 2 Vector method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame with its
origin at the designated location. Two of the through coordinate frame axes are defined using
existing vectors; their directions are imposed at the selected origin and the new coordinate frame
is then created.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: 2Vector
Coord ID List
1
Type: Rectangular
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis: Axis 1 and 2
Auto Execute
Origin
[0 0 0]
Vector for Axis 1
Vector for Axis 2
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate
frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical, or Spherical.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate
frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Set this option to Axis 1 and 2, Axis 2 and 3, or Axis 3 and 1.
Defines the origin of the new coordinate frame.
Select the vectors that define two of the through coordinate
frame axes.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Coordinate Frames Using the View Vector Method
The View Vector method creates a rectangular, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate frame at the
designated origin, using the Euler angles that define the current model orientation within the
graphics viewport.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: View Vector
Coord ID List
1
Type: Rectangular
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Origin
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate
frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical, or Spherical.
Select the reference coordinate frame from which the Euler
angles are to be computed and subsequently used to define the
new coordinate frame.
[0 0 0] Defines the origin of the new coordinate frame.

4.4 Creating Planes
Creating Planes with the Point-Vector Method
The Point-Vector method creates planes at a point and normal to a vector.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Geometry
Auto Execute
Point List
Vector List
Create
Plane
Point-Vector
Apply
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the points from which the new planes will be created.
Either cursor select the points or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Point1 5, Curve 1.1. The Point Select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate points.
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
Specify the vectors for the new planes. Either cursor select the
vectors or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Vector 1
5. The Vector Select menu that appears can be used to define
how you want to cursor select the appropriate vectors.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point-Vector Method Example
Creates a plane at a point and normal to a vector.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Geometry
Auto Execute
Point List
Point 1
Vector List
Vector 1
Create
Plane
Point-Vector
Apply
Before:
After:
1 1
Y
Z
X
1 1
Y
Z
X

Creating Planes with the Vector Normal Method
The Vector Normal method creates Planes whose normal is in the direction of the specified
vector and crosses the vector at a specified offset.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Vector Normal
Plane ID List
1
Plane Offset Distance
0.0
Auto Execute
Vector List
Point 2
Apply
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Used to define the plane offset from the vector base point.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the vectors from which the new planes will be created.
Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Vector 1 5, Coord 1.2. The Vector Select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate vectors.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Vector Normal Option Example
Creates a plane from Vector 1. The normal of the plane is parallel to the Vector.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Vector Normal
Plane ID List
1
Plane Offset Distance
0.0
Auto Execute
Vector List
Vector 1
Apply
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
1
1 1
X
X

Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method
Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method - Point Option
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Point on Curve method using the Point option creates Planes normal to a tangent vector of
a point along a curve. The plane centroid will be the point location on the curve.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
Auto Execute
Curve List
Point 2
Point List
Create
Plane
Curve Normal
Point
Apply
Used to express the point type to create the plane from. Options
are Point and Parametric.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the curves from which the new planes will be created.
Either cursor select the curves or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Curve 1 5, Surface 1.2. The Curve Select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate curves.
Specify the point locations for the new planes. Either cursor
select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The
Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or
other point locations.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Option Example
Creates a plane whose normal is parallel to the tangent of Curve 1 on the location where Point 3
is projected on the curve.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1
Point List
Point 3
Create
Plane
Curve Normal
Point
Apply
Before:
Y
1
Z
After:
1
Y
Z
X
X
1
1
3
1
3
2
2

Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method-Parametric Option
The Point on Curve method using the Parametric option creates Planes that are normal to a
specified curve at a parametric position along the curve. The plane centroid will be the
parametric position along the curve.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List
(p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Curve List
Geometry
Create
Plane
Curve Normal
Option: Parametric
Parametric Position
0.0
Auto Execute
Apply
1.0
u Parametric Value
0.5
Used to express the point type to create the plane from.
Options are Point and Parametric.
ξ1( u)
Specify the curves’s coordinate value, either by
using the slide bar or by entering the value in the
databox. You can plot the ξ1 direction by pressing the
Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric
Properties form under the menu Display/Display
Properties/Geometric.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the curves from which the new planes will be
created. Either cursor select the curves or enter the IDs
from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 5, Surface 1.2.
The Curve Select menu that appears can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
curves.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Parametric Option Example
Creates a plane on Curve 1 at the specified parametric location. Its normal is parallel to the
tangent of Curve 1 at that location.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Geometry
Create
Plane
Curve Normal
Option: Parametric
Parametric Position
0.0
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1
Apply
1.0
u Parametric Value
0.5
Before:
1
Y
Z
After:
1
Y
Z
X
X
1
1
1
2
2

Creating Planes with the Plane Normal Method
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Plane Normal method creates a plane normal to an existing plane. The line defined by the
projection of the new plane onto the existing plane is defined by selecting a vector; this vector is
projected normally onto the existing plane. The new plane’s normal direction is defined by the
vector cross product of the existing plane normal by the projected vector.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Plane List
Geometry
Auto Execute
Vector List
Create
Plane
Plane Normal
Apply
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Select existing plane that is perpendicular to newly
created plane.
Select vector that defines orientation of newly created
plane.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method
Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Uniform Option
The Interpolate method creates Planes whose normals are in the direction of the curve tangents
at the interpolating points on the curve. Uniform option will space the planes along the curve
based on the equal arc lengths or equal parametric values upon the user’s choice.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Geometry
Auto Execute
Curve List
Create
Plane
Interpolate
Number of Planes
3
Parameterization Method
◆
◆
Equal Arc Length
Equal Parametric Values
Plane Spacing Method
◆ Uniform
◆ Nonuniform
Apply
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Used to define the number of planes to be interpolated. If it is
1, one plane is created at the beginning of the curve. If it is 2,
two planes are created at both end of the curve. The default
value is 3.
Used to define the spacing based on equal arc length or
parametric values.
Used to define the spacing method of Uniform or the ratio for
Nonuniform spacing.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the curves from which the new planes will be created.
Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: curve 1. The CurveSelect menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate curves.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

Plane Interpolate Example
Creates planes on curve 1 at the interpolating points. The plane’s normals are parallel to the
tangents of Curve 1 at each location.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Geometry
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1
Create
Plane
Interpolate
Number of Planes
3
Parameterization Method
◆
◆
Equal Arc Length
Equal Parametric Values
Plane Spacing Method
◆ Uniform
◆ Nonuniform
Apply
Before:
Y
1
Z
After:
Y
1
1
Z
X
X
2
1
1
3
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
2
4
1

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Nonuniform Option
The Interpolate method creates Planes whose normals are in the direction of the curve tangents
at the interpolating points on the curve. Nonuniform option will space the planes along the
curve based on the space ratio applied on the arc length or the parametric values upon the user’s
choice.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Geometry
Auto Execute
Curve List
Create
Plane
Interpolate
Number of Planes
3
Parameterization Method
◆
◆
Equal Arc Length
Equal Parametric Values
Plane Spacing Method
◆
◆
Uniform
Nonuniform
. .
L1
L2/L1 = 1.5
.
Apply
. .
L2
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Used to define the number of planes to be interpolated. If it is 1,
one plane is created at the beginning of the curve. If it is 2, two
planes are created at both end of the curve. The default value is
3.
Used to define the spacing based on equal arc length or
parametric values.
Used to define the spacing method of Uniform or the ratio
for Nonuniform spacing.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the curves from which the new planes will be created.
Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: curve 1. The CurveSelect menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate curves.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method
Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Point Option
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Least Squares method using the Point option creates Planes that are a least squares fit to a
set of points that are not co-linear.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Option:
Point List
Geometry
Create
Plane
Least Squares
Point
Apply
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Used to express the entity type to create the plane from.
Options are Point, Curve, and Surface.
Specify the points from which the new planes will be
created. Either cursor select the points or enter the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Point 1 to 5. The Point Select menu
that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate points.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Option Example
Creates a plane based on the least squares calculated from Point 1:4.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Option:
Point List
Point 1:4
Geometry
Create
Plane
Least Squares
Point
Apply
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
1
1
4
4
1
3
3
2
2

Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Curve Option
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Least Squares method using the Curve option creates Planes that are a least squares fit to a
non-linear curve.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
Create
Plane
Least Squares
Curve
Auto Execute
Curve List
Apply
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Used to express the entity type to create the plane from.
Options are Point, Curve, and Surface.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the curves from which the new planes will be created.
Either cursor select the curves or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Curve 1 5, Surface 1.2. The Curve Select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate curves.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Option Example
Creates a plane based on the least squares calculated from Curve 1.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
Create
Plane
Least Squares
Curve
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1
Apply
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
1
1
Z
X
X
1
1
1
2
2

Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Surface Option
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Least Squares method using the Surface option creates Planes that are a least squares fit to
a surface.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
Create
Plane
Least Squares
Surface
Auto Execute
Surface List
Apply
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Used to express the entity type to create the plane from.
Options are Point, Curve, and Surface.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the surfaces from which the new planes will be
created. Either cursor select the surfaces or enter the IDs
from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 5, Solid 1.2. The
Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Option Example
Creates a plane based on the least squares calculated from Surface 1.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
Create
Plane
Least Squares
Surface
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
Apply
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
2 3
1
1
1
2 3
1
1
4
4

Creating Planes with the Offset Method
The Vector Normal method creates Planes whose normal is in the direction of the specified
vector and crosses the vector at a specified offset.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Geometry
Create
Plane
Offset
Plane Offset Distance
1.0
Repeat Count
1
Auto Execute
Plane List
Apply
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Used to define the plane offset from the input plane.
Used to define the number of repeat. The number created
planes equals the number of repeat count.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the Planes from which the new planes will be created.
Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Vector 1 5, Coord 1.2. The Plane Select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate planes.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Offset Method Example
Creates planes, which are parallel to Plane 1 but have a offset of 1.0 from each other.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
2
Geometry
Create
Plane
Offset
Plane Offset Distance
1.0
Repeat Count
3
Auto Execute
Plane List
Plane 1
Apply
Before:
After:
Y
Z
X
Y
Z
X
1 2 3 4
1

Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method
Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Point Option
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Tangent method using the Point option creates Planes that are tangent to a specified surface
at a specified point on the surface. The plane centroid will be the point location on the surface.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
Auto Execute
Surface List
Point List
Create
Plane
Surface Tangent
Point
Apply
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Used to express the point type to create the plane from.
Options are Point and Parametric.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the surfaces from which the new planes will be
created. Either cursor select the surfaces or enter the IDs
from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 5, Solid 1.2. The
Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces.
Specify the point locations for the new planes. Either cursor
select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The
Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices,
nodes, or other point locations.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Option Example
Creates a plane which is tangent to Surface 1 at Point 5.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
Point List
Point 5
Create
Plane
Surface Tangent
Point
Apply
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
2 3
1
1
2 3
1
1
5
5
1
4
4

Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Parametric Option
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Tangent method using the Parametric option creates Planes that are tangent to a specified
surface at a parametric position on the surface. The plane centroid will be the tangent point on
the surface.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Surface List
Geometry
Create
Plane
Surface Tangent
Option: Parametric
Parametric Position
0.0
Auto Execute
Apply
1.0
u Parametric Value
0.0
1.0
v Parametric Value
0.5
0.5
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Used to express the point type to create the plane from. Options
are Point and Parametric.
ξ1( u)
ξ2( v)
Specify the surface’s and coordinate value, either
by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox.
The directions of ξ1and ξ2 are defined by the connectivity of the
surface or face. You can plot the ξ1 and ξ2 directions by pressing
the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form
under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the surfaces from which the new planes will be created.
Either cursor select the surfaces or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Surface 1 5, Solid 1.2. The Surface Select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate surfaces.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Parametric Option Example
Creates a plane which is tangent to Surface 1 at the specified parametric locations.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Geometry
Create
Plane
Surface Tangent
Option: Parametric
Parametric Position
0.0
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
Apply
1.0
u Parametric Value
0.0
1.0
v Parametric Value
0.5
0.5
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
2 3
1
1
1
2 3
1
1
4
4

Creating Planes with the 3 Points Method
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The 3 Point method creates Planes which pass through three specified points that are not colinear.
The plane centroid will be average of the first point.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Geometry
Auto Execute
Point 1 List
Point 2 List
Point 3List
Create
Plane
3 Points
Apply
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the three point locations for the new planes. Either
cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid
10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points,
vertices, nodes, or other point locations.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
3 Points Method Example
Creates a plane from Point 1:3.
Action:
Object:
Method
Plane ID List
1
Geometry
Auto Execute
Point 1 List
Point 1
Point 2 List
Point 2
Point 3List
Point 3
Create
Plane
3 Points
Apply
Before:
After:
Y
X
Y
X
Z
Z
1
1
1
3
2
3
2

4.5 Creating Vectors
Creating Vectors with the Magnitude Method
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Magnitude method creates Vectors from a specified vector magnitude, direction and base
point. The base point can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex, node or
other point location provided by the Point select menu.
Action:
Object:
Method
Vector ID List
1
Geometry
Auto Execute
Base Point List
Create
Vector
Magnitude
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Vector Direction List
Vector Magnitude List
1.0
[0 0 0]
Apply
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Used to express the coordinate values entered in the Vector
Coordinates List and the Point Coordinate List, within the
specified coordinate frame. Default is the global rectangular
frame, Coord 0.
Enter the vector coordinates to define the direction for the new
vectors. Enter the coordinates either from the keyboard
(Example: ); or cursor define the vector direction
using the Vector Select menu that appears.
Enter a value to define the magnitude for the new vectors.
Enter the values from the keyboard. (Examples: 1.0 1.5 .05)
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the base point locations for the new vectors. Either
cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid
10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points,
vertices, nodes, or other point locations.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Magnitude Example
Creates a vector based at point 1 and directing along the X axis. The vector has a magnitude of
1.0.
Action:
Object:
Method
Vector ID List
1
Geometry
Auto Execute
Base Point List
Create
Vector
Magnitude
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Vector Direction List
Vector Magnitude List
1.0
[0 0 0]
Apply
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
X
Z
X
1 1
1

Creating Vectors with the Interpolate Method
Between Two Points
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Interpolate method using the Point option will create n points of uniform or nonuniform
spacing between a specified pair of point locations, where n is the number of interior points to
be created. The point location pairs can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point location
provided by the Point select menu.
Geometry
Vector ID List
5
Number of Vectors
1
Parameterization Method
◆
Action:
Object:
◆
Equal Arc Length
Equal Parametric Values
Auto Execute
Curves List
Create
Vector
Method: Interpolate
Vector Spacing Method
◆
◆
Uniform
Nonuniform
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next vector
to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions.
Enter the number of interior vectors you want to create.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Vector Interpolate Method Example
Creates.
Geometry
Vector ID List
5
Number of Vectors
1
Parameterization Method
◆
Action:
Object:
◆
Equal Arc Length
Equal Parametric Values
Auto Execute
Curves List
Create
Vector
Method: Interpolate
Vector Spacing Method
◆
◆
Uniform
Nonuniform
-Apply-
Before:
After:

Creating Vectors with the Intersect Method
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Intersect method creates Vectors from the intersections of pairs of Planes. The origins of the
two planes will be projected onto the intersection line to determine the base and tip of the
resulting vector. If the base and tip are not unique, the tip will be assumed.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the
form.
Action:
Object:
Method
Vector ID List
1
Geometry
Create
Vector
Intersect
Reverse Vector Direction
Auto Execute
Plane 1 List
Coord 0
Plane 2 List
Apply
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Indicate whether the direction of the resulting vector should
be reversed. The direction may be controlled via the order of
the input planes, except when the projection of the plane
origins onto the intersection line is not unique. In such a case,
if desired, this toggle may be used to reverse the direction.
Specify the two planes from which the new intersection vector
is to be created. Either cursor select the planes or enter the
IDs or definition from the keyboard. Example: Plane 1 5,
x=10, Coord 0.1. The Plane Select menu that appears can be
used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
planes.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Intersect Example
Creates a vector along the intersection of Plane 1 and Plane 2.
Action:
Object:
Method
Vector ID List
1
Geometry
Create
Vector
Intersect
Reverse Vector Direction
Auto Execute
Plane 1 List
Plane 1
Plane 2 List
Plane 2
Apply
Before:
After:
X
Y
X
Y
Z
Z
2
1
2
1
1

Creating Vectors with the Normal Method
Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Plane Option
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Normal method using the Plane option creates Vectors from normal vectors to a Plane;
originating at the plane and passing through a point. The tip point can be expressed by cartesian
coordinates or by an existing vertex, node or other point location provided by the Point select
menu.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Action:
Object:
Method
Vector ID List
1
Geometry
Auto Execute
Create
Vector
Normal
Vector Magnitude List
1
Plane List
Point List
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Option: Plane Used to express the entity type to calculate vector normal
from. Options are Plane, Surface, and Element Face.
Apply
Enter a value to define the magnitude for the new vectors.
Enter the values from the keyboard. (Examples: 1.0 1.5 .05)
Specify the planes from which the new normal vectors will be
created. Either cursor select the planes or enter the IDs or
definition from the keyboard. Example: Plane 1 5, x=10,
Coord 0.1. The Plane Select menu that appears can be used
to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
planes.
Specify the base point locations for the new vectors. Either
cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid
10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points,
vertices, nodes, or other point locations.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Plane Option Example
Creates a vector which is directing along the normal of Plane 1.
Action:
Object:
Method
Vector ID List
1
Geometry
Auto Execute
Create
Vector
Normal
Option: Plane
Vector Magnitude List
1
Plane List
Plane 1
Plane Point List
[0 0 0]
Apply
Before:
After:
Z
Z
Y
Y
1
1 1
X
X

Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Surface Option
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Normal method using the Plane option creates Vectors from normal vectors to a Plane. The
base point can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex, node or other point
location provided by the Point select menu.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Action:
Object:
Method
Vector ID List
1
Geometry
Create
Vector
Normal
Option: Surface
Vector Magnitude List
1.0
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Base at Surface Centroid Default Base Point will not be at the Surface Centroid. If ON,
Auto Execute
Surface List
Base Point List
Apply
Used to express the entity type to calculate vector normal
from. Options are Plane, Surface, and Element Face.
Enter a value to define the magnitude for the new vectors.
Enter the values from the keyboard. (Examples: 1.0 1.5 .05)
the surface centroid will automatically be entered in the Base
Point Listbox.
Specify the surfaces from which the new normal vectors will
be created. Either cursor select the surfaces or enter the IDs
from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 5, Solid 1.2. The
Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces.
Specify the base point locations for the new vectors. Either
cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid
10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points,
vertices, nodes, or other point locations.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Option Example
Creates a vector which is directing along the normal of Surface 1 at Point 5.
Action:
Object:
Method
Vector ID List
1
Geometry
Create
Vector
Normal
Option: Surface
Vector Magnitude List
1.0
Base at Surface Centroid
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
Base Point List
Point 5
Apply
Before:
After:
Y
X
Z
Y
X
Z
4
1
3
5
1
1
4
2
1
1
3
5
2

Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Element Face Option
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
The Normal method using the Element Face option creates Vectors from normal vectors to an
Element Face. The base point of the vector will be the element face centroid by default, but a
node on the element face may also be specified.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Action:
Object:
Method
Vector ID List
1
Geometry
Create
Vector
Normal
Option: Element Face
Vector Magnitude List
1.0
Element Type: 2D
Auto Execute
Element Face List
Base Node List
Apply
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Used to express the entity type to calculate vector normal from.
Options are Plane, Surface, and Element Face.
Enter a value to define the magnitude for the new vectors. Enter
the values from the keyboard. (Examples: 1.0 1.5 .05)
Base at Surface Centroid Default Base Point will be at the Surface Centroid. If ON, the
surface centroid will automatically be entered in the Base Point
List box.
Used to express the element type to calculate vector normal from.
Options are 2D and 3D.
Specify the element faces from which the new normal vectors will
be created. Either cursor select the element face or enter the IDs
from the keyboard. Example: Elm 1.5. The Element Face Select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate element faces.
Specify the base node locations for the new vectors. Either
cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Node 20.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Element Face 2D Option Example
Creates a vector along the normal of the element face at Node 6.
Action:
Object:
Method
Vector ID List
1
Geometry
Create
Vector
Normal
Option: Element Face
Vector Magnitude List
1.0
Base at Surface Centroid
Element Type: 2D
Auto Execute
Element Face List
Elem 1
Base Node List
Node 6
Apply
Before:
Z
Y
After:
Z
Y
X
X
2
2
13
14
13
15
9
14
16
15
17
3 16
10
8
18
11
7
5
1
9
1
10
6
12
12
11
7
11
2
4
3
5
8
2
3
6
4
13
14
13
9
14
15
16
17
15
3 16
10 18
8 11
9
7
12
1
5
12
10
1 11
1 6
7
1 1
2
3
2
4
5
3
8
6
4
4
4

Element Face 3D Option Example
Creates a vector along the normal of the element face at Node 2.
Action:
Object:
Method
Vector ID List
1
Geometry
Create
Vector
Normal
Option: Element Face
Vector Magnitude List
1.0
Base at Surface Centroid
Element Type: 3D
Auto Execute
Element Face List
Elem 8
Base Node List
Node 12
Apply
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
6
6
2
5
5
7
7
1
8
8
2
2
1
1
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
3
3
4
4

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Vectors with the Product Method
The Product method creates vectors of the cross products of two existing vectors. The base point
of the created vector will be the base point of the first vector.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Vector
Method: Product
Vector ID List
1
Auto Execute
Vector 1 List
Vector 2 List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next vector to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Specify two vectors. Either cursor select the point locations
or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Vector 1.
The vector select menu that appears can be used to define
how you want the cursor to select the appropriate vectors,
coords, and planes.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

Product Example
Creates Vector 3, which is the cross product of Vector 1 and Vector 2.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Vector
Method: Product
Vector ID List
3
Auto Execute
Vector 1 List
Vector 1
Vector 2 List
Vector 2
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
2
Z 1
X
Y
X
Z
2
1
13
3
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Vectors with the 2 Point Method
The 2 Point method creates vectors between two existing point locations. The point locations can
be existing points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Action:
Object:
Method
Vector ID List
1
Geometry
Auto Execute
Base Point List
Tip Point List
Create
Vector
2 Point
Apply
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Specify the base and tip point locations for the new vectors.
Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid
10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points,
vertices, nodes, or other point locations.
☞ More Help:
Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

2 Point Option Example
Creates a vector starting from Point 1 and ending at Point 2.
Action:
Object:
Method
Vector ID List
1
Geometry
Auto Execute
Base Point List
Point 1
Tip Point List
Point 2
Create
Vector
2 Point
Apply
Before:
Y
After:
Y
Z
X 1
Z
1
X 1
CHAPTER 4
Create Actions
2
2

PART 2
Geometry Modeling

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
5
Delete Actions
■ Overview of the Geometry Delete Action
■ Deleting Any Geometric Entity
■ Deleting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes or Vectors
■ Deleting Coordinate Frames

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
5.1 Overview of the Geometry Delete Action
The Geometry Application Delete action can remove any or all geometric entities from the
database. Objects that are available for deletion are listed in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 Geometry Delete Action Objects and Descriptions
Object Description
Any Deletes different types of geometric entities at the same time.
Point Deletes any number of points.
Curve Deletes any number of curves.
Surface Deletes any number of surfaces.
Solid Deletes any number of solids.
Coord Deletes any number of user defined coordinate frames.
Auto Execute Is Off By Default. By default, the Auto Execute toggle is OFF. For more
information, see Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic
Functions.
Using the Abort and Undo Buttons. When the Delete action form starts to execute, you may
press the Abort key at any time to halt the delete process. You may also press the Undo button
immediately after the Delete action completes to restore the deleted entities back to the database.
See System Icons (p. 24) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran
for more information.

5.2 Deleting Any Geometric Entity
CHAPTER 5
Delete Actions
Setting the Object menu to Any deletes any number of points, curves, surfaces, solids or
coordinate frames (except the global coordinate frame, Coord 0) from the database. You can also
delete geometric entities by using the Group/Delete menu.
Geometry
Action: Delete
Object: Any
Delete
Point
Curve
Surface
Solid
Coordinate Frame
Plane
Vector
Auto Execute
Geometric Entity List
-Apply-
You can turn ON or OFF any number of these geometry
type toggles. These toggles act like a filter, such that if
a toggle is OFF, none of the specified entities of the
toggle type that are listed in Geometric Entity List will be
deleted. Example: If Point 1 2 3 are listed in Geometric
Entity List and the Point toggle is OFF, then
MSC.Patran will not delete the specified points.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the existing geometric entities to be deleted
either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs
from the keyboard. Example: Point 3 Surface 5:10 Solid
12 Coord 10. The select menu that appears at the
bottom can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate points, curves, surfaces, solids
and coordinate frames.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Group Delete (p. 197) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
5.3 Deleting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes
or Vectors
Setting the Object menu to Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or Vector removes any number of
specified points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes or vectors from the database.
Geometry
Action: Delete
Object:
Auto Execute
List
-Apply-
Set to either:
Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or Vector.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is OFF which
means you need to press the Apply button or turn ON Auto
Execute to execute the form.
Depending if Object is set to Point, Curve, Surface, Solid,
Plane or Vector specify one or more points, curves,
surfaces, solids, planes or vectors to delete from the
databox. You can either cursor select them by using the
Point Select Menu, Curve Select Menu, Surface Select
Menu, Solid Select Menu, Vector Select Menu,or
Geometry Select Menu (Plane); or by entering the IDs
from the keyboard. Examples: Point 7 10 or Surface 3:10,
Plane 1, Vector 2.
☞ More Help:
Understanding the List Processor (p. 55)
in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Group Delete (p. 197) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

5.4 Deleting Coordinate Frames
CHAPTER 5
Delete Actions
Setting the Object menu to Coord removes any number of specified user defined coordinate
frames from the database The global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0, cannot be deleted.
Also, a coordinate frame will not be deleted if it is being referenced as a Nodal Reference
Coordinate Frame or Analysis Coordinate Frame, elsewhere in the model.
Geometry
Action: Delete
Object: Coord
Auto Execute
Coordinate Frame List
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify list of coordinate frames to be deleted either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Coord 2 10.
☞ More Help:
Understanding the List Processor (p. 55) in
the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
Node Coordinate Frames (p. 50) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite
Element Modeling

PART 2
Geometry Modeling

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
6
Edit Actions
■ Overview of the Edit Action Methods
■ Editing Points
■ Editing Curves
■ Editing Surfaces
■ Editing Solids
■ Editing Features

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
6.1 Overview of the Edit Action Methods
Object Method Description
Point ❏ Equivalence Finds groups of points which are within global model tolerances of
each other and for each group, equivalences the points into one
point.
Curve ❏ Break Breaks curves into n+1 curves at either a point location or at a
parametric coordinate location.
❏ Blend Creates curves from two or more curves or edges by forcing a first
derivative continuity across the boundaries.
❏ Disassemble Creates curves that represent a specified chained curve.
❏ Extend Extends or lengthens one curve or edge or a pair of curves or edges,
either through a straight line extension, or through a continuous
curvature.
❏ Merge Creates one or more curves from an existing set of curves or edges.
Some of the original curvature may be lost.
❏ Refit Creates Uniformly parameterized Piecewise Cubic curves from
existing curves.
❏ Reverse Redefines the connectivity of a curve or edge by reversing the curve’s
or edge’s positive parametric direction.
❏ Trim Shortens the length of a curve or edge at either a point location or a
parametric coordinate location on the curve.
Surface ❏ Break Breaks a surface or a solid face into two or four smaller surfaces at
either a point, curve or surface location, or at a parametric coordinate
location on the surface.
❏ Blend Creates surfaces from two or more surfaces or solid faces by forcing a
first derivative continuity across its boundaries.
❏ Disassemble Creates surfaces that represent the specified B-rep solid.
❏ Edge Match Recreates a specified surface either by closing a gap between it and
another adjacent surface; or by creating an additional vertex and
converting the surface into a trimmed surface.
❏ Extend Extends or lengthens a surface: by a percentage in the U and/or V
parametric directions, to its intersection with a curve, plane, point or
another surface, or by a fixed length. Also extends a pair of surfaces
to their intersection.
❏ Refit Creates a non-uniformly parameterized network of bicubic patches
from existing surfaces.
❏ Reverse Redefines the connectivity of a surface or solid face by reversing the
surface’s or face’s positive parametric directions.
❏ Sew Combines Edit, Point, Equivalence and Edit, Surface, Edge Match
functionality to equivalence surface vertices and merge edges.

Object Method Description
Solid ❏ Break Breaks a solid into two, four or eight smaller solids either at a point,
curve or surface location, or at a parametric coordinate location.
❏ Blend Creates solids from two or more solids by forcing a first derivative
continuity across its boundaries.
❏ Disassemble Creates surfaces that represent a specified B-rep solid.
❏ Refit Creates uniformly parameterized Piecewise Cubic solids from
existing solids.
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
❏ Reverse Redefines the connectivity of a solid by reversing the solid’s positive
parametric directions.and moving the location of the parametric
origin.
Feature ❏ Suppress Displays the list of CAD features associated with the geometry that
can be suppressed from the geometric model
❏ Unsuppress Displays the list of CAD features associated with the geometry that
can be unsuppressed from the geometric model.
❏ Parameters Displays the list of CAD features associated with the geometry
whose parameters can be edited to be used to regenerate the
geometric model based on the new parameter values.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
6.2 Editing Points
Equivalencing Points
The Point Equivalence method finds groups of points which are within global model tolerance
of each other and for each group and equivalences the points into one point.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Point
Method: Equivalence
Point List
Point 5 6
-Apply-
Specify in Point List, the points to be
equivalenced, either by entering the ID from the
keyboard or by cursor selecting the point location.
The Vertex select menu will appear.

Editing Point Equivalence Method Example
Equivalences points 5 and 6 resulting in point 5 at the mid-point between points 5 and 6.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Point
Method: Equivalence
Point List
Point 5 6
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X1
2 3
1
2 3
5
1
5
1
6
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
4
4

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
6.3 Editing Curves
Breaking Curves
Breaking a Curve at a Point
The Break method with the Point option creates n+1 curves by breaking an existing curve or
edge at one or more point locations. The point locations can be defined by either existing points,
nodes, vertices, curve/curve intersections, or curve/surface intersections. Also, the break point
location does not have to lie on the curve or edge.
If ON, after Break completes, the existing curves specified in Curve List will
be deleted from the database.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Option:
Curve List
Geometry
Point
Break Point List
Edit
Curve
Break
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Used to express the point type to create the curve from.
Options are Point, Parametric and Plane.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the existing curves or edges to break either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The
Curve select menu that appears can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.
Specify the point break locations along each curve either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Point 1 Node 15. The point locations
may be specified in any order. If an endpoint of a curve is
specified, then MSC.Patran will create a zero length curve.
The Point select menu can be used to define how you want
to cursor select each break point location.
☞ More Help:
Example ➠
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)

Curve Break Method At a Point Example
Creates Curves 2 and 3 by breaking Curve 1 at Point 2. Notice that Delete Original Curves is
pressed in and Curve 1 is deleted.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
2
Geometry
Option: Point
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1
Break Point List
Point 2
Edit
Curve
Break
-Apply-
Before:
1
1
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
2
2
2
1
3
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
4
4

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Break Method Between Two Points Example
Creates Curves 1 and 2 by breaking a curve defined by Points 1 and 2 (by using the Curve select
menu icon listed below) at the break location of Node 1. Notice that Node 1 does not have to be
colinear with Points 1 and 2.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Option: Point
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Construct2PointCurve(Eval
Break Point List
Node 1
Edit
Curve
Break
-Apply-
Curve Select Menu Icon
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
1
1
X
X
1
1
3
1
2
2
2

Curve Break Method At An Edge Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
Creates Curves 1 and 2 by breaking an edge of Surface 1 (using the Curve select menu icon listed
below) at the break location defined by Node 1.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Option: Point
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Surface 1.4
Break Point List
Node 1
Edit
Curve
Break
-Apply-
Curve Select Menu Icon
Before:
1
1
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
5
5
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
4
6
6

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Breaking a Curve at a Parametric Location
The Break method with the Parametric option creates two curves from an existing curve or edge,
at the curve’s parametric ξ1( u)
coordinate location, where ξ1has a range of 0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 .
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Option: Parametric
Break Point
0.0
1.0
u Parametric Value
0.5
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Used to express the point type to create the curve from. Options are
Point, Parametric and Plane.
Edit
Curve
Break
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
ξ1( u)
ξ1 Specify the curve’s coordinate value, where has a
range of 0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 , either by using the slide bar or by
entering the value in the databox. The direction of ξ1 is
defined by the curve’s connectivity. You can plot the x1
direction by pressing the Parametric Direction toggle on the
Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display
If ON, after Break completes, the existing curves specified in
Curve List will be deleted from the database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the existing curves or edges to break either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Connectivity (p. 15)
Display Attributes (p. 243) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic
Functions

Curve Break Method At a Parametric Location Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
Creates Curves 2 and 3 by breaking Curve 1 at ξ1 = 0.25 . Notice that Delete Original Curves is
pressed in and the Parametric Direction is turned ON.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
2
Option: Parametric
Break Point
0.0
1.0
u Parametric Value
0.25
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1
Geometry
Edit
Curve
Break
-Apply-
Before:
1
After:
1
1
Y
Z
Y
Z
2
1 1
X
X
6
1
3
5
5

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Break Method At a Parametric Location On An Edge Example
Creates Curves 1 and 2 by breaking an edge of Surface 1 (by using the Curve select menu icon
listed below) at = 0.25 .
Action:
Object:
Method:
ξ 1
Curve ID List
1
Option: Parametric
Break Point
0.0
1.0
u Parametric Value
0.25
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Surface 1.4
Geometry
Edit
Curve
Break
-Apply-
Curve Select Menu Icon
Before:
1
After:
2
Z
Y
1
2 1
11
1
Z
Y
X
8
X
6
6
1
1
2
1
5
5
7
7

Breaking a Curve at a Plane Location
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The method breaks a curve with a plane. The curve will be broken at each intersection point with
the plane.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Option: Plane
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Used to express the point type to create the curve from. Options are
Point, Parametric and Plane.
Edit
Curve
Break
Break Plane List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
If ON, after Break completes, the existing curves specified in
Curve List will be deleted from the database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means
you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the curves to be broken.
Specify the planes to break the curve. Either cursor select the
planes or enter the IDs or definition from the keyboard.
Example: Plane 1 5, x=10, Coord 0.1. The Plane select menu
that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate planes.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Connectivity (p. 15)
Display Attributes (p. 243) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2:
Basic Functions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Blending a Curve
The Blend method creates a set of parametric cubic curves from an existing set of two or more
curves or edges by enforcing a first derivative continuity across its boundaries. The set of
existing curves or edges must be connected.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Blend Parameters
Weighting Factors
1.0
Delete Original Curves
Curve List
Edit
Curve
Blend
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Enter n-1 weighting factors of curve i relative to curve i+1,
where the factor can be any value. By default, a value of 1.0
will cause all curves to receive equal weight. A large value
will cause the first curve of the curve pair to dominate the
slope. A small value will cause the second curve of the pair
to dominate the slope.
If ON, after Blend completes, the existing curves specified in
the Curve listbox will be deleted from the database.
Specify the existing curves or edges to blend either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

Curve Blend Method At Weighting Factor = 1.0 Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
Creates Curves 6 through 10 by equally blending Curves 1 through 5. Notice that Delete Original
Curves is pressed in.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
6
Geometry
Blend Parameters
Weighting Factors
1.0
Delete Original Curves
Curve List
Curve 1:5
Edit
Curve
Blend
-Apply-
Before:
1
1
Y
Z
After:
6
Y
Z
1
2 2 3
X
2 3
7
X
3
8
4 4 5
9
4 5
5
10
6
6

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Blend Method At Weighting Factors Other Than 1.0 Example
This example is the same as the previous example, except that four weighting factors are used
for the four curve pairs: 1e-6, 1.0, 1.0, 1e6.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
6
Geometry
Blend Parameters
Weighting Factors
1e-6 1.0 1.0 1e6
Delete Original Curves
Curve List
Curve 1:5
Edit
Curve
Blend
-Apply-
Before:
1
1
Y
Z
After:
1
1
6
Y
Z
2 2 3
X
2 27
3
X
3
38
4 4 5
4 94
5
5
10
5
6
6

Disassembling a Chained Curve
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The Disassemble method operates on one or more chains (composite curves) and breaks them
into the original curves that composed the chain. A chained curve can be created by using
Geometry Application’s Create/Curve/Chain form. Chained curves are usually used in
MSC.Patran for creating trimmed surfaces.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Delete Original Chains
Chain List
Edit
Curve
Method: Disassemble
-Apply-
If ON, after Disassemble completes, the existing chained
curves specified in Chain List will be deleted from the
database.
Specify the chained curves to disassemble either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Curve 11.
☞ More Help:
Example ➠
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20)
Creating Chained Curves (p. 131)
Creating Trimmed Surfaces (p. 278)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Disassemble Method Example
Creates Curves 8 through 13 from chained Curve 7. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed
in and Curve 7 is deleted.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Delete Original Chains
Chain List
Curve 7
Edit
Curve
Method: Disassemble
-Apply-
Before:
6
6
After:
1 Y 2 3 4
13
Z
X
12
9
1 Y 8 2 3 10 4
Z
X
5
7
5
11

Extending Curves
Extending a Curve With the 1 Curve Option
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The Extend method with the 1 Curve option extends one or more curves which start at either the
beginning or the end of an existing curve or edge, and moves in the tangent direction for a
defined length. You can either extend curves in a straight line or maintain the same curvature as
the existing curve or edge.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Option:
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created (only used if the
curve selected is an edge of a surface or solid). See Output ID List (p. 405) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
1 Curve
Extend Method
◆ Straight Line
◆ Continuous Curvature
◆
◆
Through Points
Full Circle
Curve Length
◆
◆
Actual
Fraction of Original
Auto Execute
Curve/Point List
Edit
Curve
Extend
-Apply-
Used to express the Extend method to create the curve
from. Options are 1 Curve and 2 Curve.
Straight Line - will extend curves in a straight line at an
angle defined by the tangent at the specified endpoint of the
existing curve or edge.
Continuous Curvature - will extend curves by maintaining
the same curvature of the existing curve.
Through Points - will extend the existing curve by fitting
one end of the curve through N-points.
Full Circle - will extend the existing curve by creating a full
circle at the start or end of the curve.
Actual - the value entered will be the length to extend the
existing curve.
Fraction of Original - the length to extend the existing curve
will be defined by multiplying the value entered with the
length of the existing curve. Example: a value of 1.5 means
the length of the new curve will be one and a half times as
long as the existing curve.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Length
◆ Actual
◆
Fraction of Original
Auto Execute
Curve/Point List
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Cursor select the existing curve or edge, followed by the
endpoint that you want to extend from. MSC.Patran will
assemble a “Construct PointCurveUOnCurve...” argument
string in Curve/Point List that is recognized by
MSC.Patran’s List Processor. The Curve select menu will
appear, followed by the Point select menu to allow you
alternate methods to cursor define the curve or edge and
the endpoint location for the Extend.
☞ More Help:
Example ➠
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Understanding the List Processor (p. 55)
in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran

Curve Extend Method For One Curve Example
Extends curve 1 in a straight line by an actual length of 1.0.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
1 Curve
Extend Method
◆ Straight Line
◆ Continuous Curvature
◆ Through Points
◆ Full Circle
Curve Length
◆ Actual
◆ Fraction of Original
1.0
Edit
Curve
Extend
Auto Execute
Curve/Point List
Construct PointCurveUOnCurve
-Apply-
Before:
1
1
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
1
1
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
6
7

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Extend Method For One Curve Example
This example is the same as the previous example, except Continuous Curvature is pressed in,
instead of Straight Line, and Fraction of Original is pressed in based on a value of 1.5.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
1 Curve
Extend Method
◆ Straight Line
◆ Continuous Curvature
◆ Through Points
◆ Full Circle
Curve Length
◆
◆
1.5
Edit
Curve
Extend
Actual
Fraction of Original
Auto Execute
Curve/Point List
Construct PointCurveUOnCurve
-Apply-
Before:
1
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
1
X
7
X
1
1
6

Curve Extend Method For One Edge Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
Creates Curve 1 by extending it from an edge of Surface 1 (by using the Curve select menu icon
listed below). Both Straight Line and Actual are pressed in, with a length of 1.0 entered.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Option: 1 Curve
Extend Method
◆ Straight Line
◆ Continuous Curvature
◆ Through Points
◆ Full Circle
Curve Length
◆ Actual
◆ Fraction of Original
1.0
Edit
Curve
Extend
Auto Execute
Curve/Point List
Construct PointCurveUOnCurve
-Apply-
Curve Select Menu Icon
Before:
7
7
Z
Z
After:
Y
Y
1
X
1
X
1
1
1
8
8
6
6
9

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending a Curve Using the Through Points Type
The Extend method with the 1 Curve option using the Through Points switch modifies one curve
by extending the curve through N-points.
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Option: 1 Curve
Extend Method
◆
◆
◆
Used to express the Extend method to create the curve from. Options
are 1 Curve and 2 Curve.
Action:
Object:
Method:
◆
Straight Line
Continuous Curvature
Through Points
Full Circle
Auto Execute
Curve
Point List
Edit
Curve
Extend
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON
which means you do not need to press the Apply
button to execute the form.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Straight Line - will extend curves in a straight line at an
angle defined by the tangent at the specified endpoint of
the existing curve or edge.
Continuous Curvature - will extend curves by
maintaining the same curvature of the existing curve.
Through Points - will extend the existing curve by fitting
one end of the curve through N-points.
Full Circle - will extend the existing curve by creating a full
circle at the start or end of the curve.
Cursor select the existing curve or edge. The Curve
select menu will appear to allow you alternate methods
to cursor define the curve or edge for the Extend.
Specify the point locations for the curve to extend
through. Either cursor select the point locations or
enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5,
Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want
to cursor select the appropriate points.
☞ More Help:
Example ➠
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Understanding the List Processor (p. 55)
in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran

Curve Extend Method For Through Points Example
Extends Curve 1 by passing through the selected screen points.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
2
Option:
Geometry
1 Curve
Extend Method
◆
◆
◆
◆
Straight Line
Continuous Curvature
Through Points
Full Circle
Auto Execute
Curve
Curve 1
Point List
Edit
Curve
Extend
[0.759383 0.351561 0.00000]
-Apply-
Before:
After:
1
1
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
1
1
2
2
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending a Curve Using the Full Circle Type
The Extend method with the 1 Curve option using the Full Circle switch creates one curve by
extending the curve to a full circle, given the start, end, or interior point of the curve. If the curve
has zero radius of curvature, a circle will not be created.
Used to express the Extend method to create the curve from.
Options are 1 Curve and 2 Curve.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
19
Option:
Geometry
1 Curve
Extend Method
◆
◆
◆
◆
Straight Line
Continuous Curvature
Through Points
Full Circle
Edit
Curve
Extend
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve/Point List
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic
Functions is ON which means you do not need to
press the Apply button to execute the form.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Straight Line - will extend curves in a straight line at an
angle defined by the tangent at the specified endpoint of
the existing curve or edge.
Continuous Curvature - will extend curves by maintaining
the same curvature of the existing curve.
Through Points - will extend the existing curve by fitting
one end of the curve through N-points.
Full Circle - will extend the existing curve by creating a full
circle at the start or end of the curve.
Toggle to delete original curves after the extension.
Cursor select the existing curve or edge, followed by the
endpoint that you want to extend from. MSC.Patran will
assemble a “Construct PointCurveUOnCurve...” argument
string in Curve/Point List that is recognized by
MSC.Patran’s List Processor. The Curve select menu will
appear, followed by the Point select menu to allow you
alternate methods to cursor define the curve or edge and
the endpoint location for the Extend.
☞ More Help:
Example ➠
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Understanding the List Processor (p. 55)
in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran

Curve Extend Method For Full Circle Example
Extends Curve 1 to a full circle by selecting Curve 1 and then Point 1.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
2
Option:
Geometry
Edit
Curve
1 Curve
Extend Method
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Extend
◆ Straight Line
◆ Continuous Curvature
◆ Through Points
◆ Full Circle
Curve/Point List
Geometry (Curve1) (Point1)
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Z
Z
Y
Y
X
X
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending a Curve With the 2 Curve Option
The Extend method with the 2 Curve option extends a set of curves in a straight line by
extending them from two existing curves or edges. MSC.Patran will extend the specified
endpoints to where the two curves will intersect. If the distance from the intersection to the
endpoint of one of the existing curves, is within a distance of the Global Model Tolerance, then
MSC.Patran will extend only one curve instead of two. (The Global Model Tolerance is defined
on the Global Preferences form under the Preferences/Global menu).
Used to express the Extend method to create the curve from.
Options are 1 Curve and 2 Curve.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
2 Curve
Auto Execute
Curve 1 List
Curve 2 List
Edit
Curve
Extend
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created (used only if the curve to be extended is an edge
of a surface or solid). See Output ID List (p. 405) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the existing pair of curves or edges that you want to
extend straight curves from by either cursor selecting them or
by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 2
Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve select menu that appears
can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate curves or edges.
1
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
3
Global Preferences (p. 290) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2:
Basic Functions
1
Before: After:
3
Example ➠

Curve Extend Method For Two Curves Example
Extends Curves 1 and 2 to their point of intersection.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
3
Geometry
Option: 2 Curve
Auto Execute
Curve 1 List
Curve 2
Curve 2 List
Curve 1
Edit
Curve
Extend
-Apply-
Before:
1
1
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
6
1
1
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
5
5

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Extend Method For A Curve and An Edge Example
Creates Curve 3 and extends Curve 1 by extending them from Curve 1 and an edge of Surface 1
by using the Curve select menu icon listed below.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
2
Geometry
Option: 2 Curve
Auto Execute
Curve 1 List
Curve 1
Curve 2 List
Surface 1.4
Edit
Curve
Extend
-Apply-
Curve Select Menu Icon
Before:
7
After:
7
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
1
1
1
8
1
8
2
2
3
3
3
9 2
1
1
5
5

Merging Existing Curves
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The Merge method creates one or more curves from an existing set of curves or edges. The shape
of the new curves, relative to the existing curves or edges, will be preserved to the extent
possible, but, in general, some detail will be lost. The existing curves or edges must be connected.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Geometry
Merge Parameters
Number of Curves to Create
1
Merge Tolerance
0.005
Delete Original Curves
Curve List
Edit
Curve
Merge
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Specify the number of curves to create from the original
curves and the tolerance to use to control the accuracy of
the merge process.
If ON, after Merge completes, the existing curves specified in
Curve List will be deleted from the database.
Specify the existing curves or edges to merge either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.
☞ More Help:
Example ➠
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Parameterization (p. 5)
Topology (p. 10)
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Merge Method Example
Creates Curve 6 by merging Curves 1 through 5. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed
and Curves 1 through 5 are deleted.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
6
Geometry
Merge Parameters
Number of Curves to Create
1
Merge Tolerance
0.005
Delete Original Curves
Curve List
Curve 1:5
Edit
Curve
Merge
-Apply-
Before:
1
After:
1
1 2
Y
Z
Y
Z
2
X
X
3
3
2
4
4
3
5 6
5 6
7
7
5
8
8

Curve Merge Method Example
This example is the same as the previous example, except that the merge tolerance is 0.00001.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
6
Geometry
Merge Parameters
Number of Curves to Create
1
Merge Tolerance
0.00001
Delete Original Curves
Curve List
Curve 1:5
Edit
Curve
Merge
-Apply-
Before:
1
After:
1
1 2
Y
Z
Y
Z
2
X
X
3
3
2
4
4
3
5 6
5 6
7
7
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
5
8
8

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Merge Method Example
Creates Curves 6 through 8 from merging Curves 1 through 5.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
6
Geometry
Merge Parameters
Number of Curves to Create
3
Merge Tolerance
0.00001
Delete Original Curves
Curve List
Curve 1:5
Edit
Curve
Merge
-Apply-
Before:
1
After:
1
1 2
Y
Z
6
Y
Z
X
X
9
3
2
4
7
3
5 6
10
8
7
5
8
8

Refitting Existing Curves
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The Refit method using the Uniform option creates uniformly parameterized Piecewise Cubic
curves from existing curves. The number of piecewise cubic segments per curve is input as the
refit parameter.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Option:
Geometry
Uniform
Refit Parameters
Segments per Curve
1
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Edit
Curve
Refit
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Used to express the refit option. Options are Uniform and
Nonuniform.
Uniform: Enter a value to define the number of piecewise
cubic segments to refit the original curve into. Enter the value
from the keyboard.
Nonuniform: Displays the refit tolerance.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the existing curves or edges to refit either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Parameterization (p. 5)
Topology (p. 10)
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Reversing a Curve
The Reverse method redefines the connectivity of an existing set of curves or edges by reversing
the positive ξ1 direction of the curves or edges. You can plot the curve’s ξ1 direction by selecting
the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form found under the menus
Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Reverse Associated
Elements
Option:
Auto Execute
Curve List
Edit
Curve
Method: Reverse
-Apply-
If ON, MSC.Patran will automatically reverse the
connectivity of any finite elements that are associated with
the curves or edges specified in Curve List. If OFF,
MSC.Patran retain the original connectivity of the
elements.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the existing curves or edges to reverse either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The
Curve select menu that appears can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction
to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Connectivity (p. 15)
Example ➠
Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

Curve Reverse Method Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
This example reverses Curves 6, 7 and 8. Notice that the parametric direction is displayed for the
curves.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Reverse Associated
Elements
Option:
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 6 7 8
Edit
Curve
Method: Reverse
-Apply-
Before:
1
After:
6 1
Y
Z
6
Y
Z
X
X
1
7
7
1
1
8
8
1

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Reverse Method With Associated Elements Example
This example is the same as the previous example, except Curves 7, 8 and 9 have associated bar
elements. Although the node IDs are not reversed, MSC.Patran internally reverses the bar
elements’ connectivities. For example, for Bar 1 the nodes are stored as Nodes 2 and 1, instead
of 1 and 2.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Reverse Associated
Elements
Option:
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 6 7 8
Edit
Curve
Method: Reverse
-Apply-
Before:
4
4
3
After:
13
Y
Z
Y
Z
3
3
X
X
6
2
6
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1

Trimming Curves
Trimming a Curve With the Point Option
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The Trim method with the Point option modifies an existing set of curves by trimming them at
a specified point location along each curve. The trim point can be defined by either existing
points, nodes, curve/curve intersections, or curve/surface intersections. You cannot trim
existing edges.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Option: Point
Auto Execute
Trim Point List
Edit
Curve
Curve/Point List
Trim
-Apply-
Used to express the Trim method to create the curve
from. Options are Point and Parametric.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify in Trim Point List, the point location either by cursor
selecting the point location or by entering the ID of the point
or node. Example: Point 11 Node 20.
Specify in Curve/Point List, the existing curves that you want
to trim, along with a point location that defines the end of the
curve that MSC.Patran will discard or trim off. A Curve select
menu will appear, followed by a Point select menu.
Original Curve
Trim Point Location
Discard This Section
☞ More Help:
Point Location
of End to
Discard
Example ➠
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Trim Method At a Point Example
Trims Curve 9 at Point 9, with Point 9 cursor selected in the Curve/Point List as end of the curve
to discard or trim off.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Option: Point
Auto Execute
Trim Point List
Point 9
Edit
Curve
Trim
Curve/Point List
Construct PointCurveUOnCurve
-Apply-
Before:
1
After:
1
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
9
9
9
9
8

Curve Trim Method At a Point Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
Trims Curve 9 at the intersection of Curves 9 and 10 by using the Point select menu icon listed
below for the Trim Point List. Point 8 is cursor selected for the Curve/Point List as the end of the
curve to trim.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Edit
Curve
Trim
Option: Point
Auto Execute
Trim Point List
Construct 2Curve Point(Evalua
Curve/Point List
Construct PointCurveUOnCurve
-Apply-
Point Select Menu Icon
Before:
1
After:
1
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
9
9
9
9
8
10
10
8
10
10

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Trimming a Curve Using the Parametric Option
The Trim method using the Parametric option modifies an existing set of curves by trimming
them at a specified ξ1 parametric coordinate location, where ξ1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 . You
cannot trim existing edges.
Used to express the Trim method to create the curve from. Options
are Point and Parametric.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Option: Parametric
Trim Point
0.0
Geometry
Edit
Curve
1.0
u Parametric Value
Auto Execute
Curve/Point List
Trim
-Apply-
0.5
Specify the curve’s ξ1 coordinate value, where ξ1 has
a range of 0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 , either by using the slide bar or by
entering the value in the databox. The direction of ξ1ξ1 is
defined by the curve’s connectivity. You can plot the
direction by pressing the Show Parametric Direction
toggle on the Geometric Attributes form under the menu
Display/Geometry.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to chose the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify in Curve/Point List, the existing curves that you
want to trim, along with a point location that defines the
end of the curve that MSC.Patran will discard or trim off.
A Curve select menu will appear, followed by a Point
select menu.
☞ More Help:
Example ➠
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Connectivity (p. 15)
Display Attributes (p. 243) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic
Functions

Curve Trim Method At a Parametric Location Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
Trims Curve 9 at ξ1( u)
= 0.75 , where Point 8 is cursor selected as the end of the curve to trim.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Option: Parametric
Trim Point
0.0
Edit
Curve
Trim
1.0
u Parametric Value
Auto Execute
Curve/Point List
0.75
Construct PointCurveUOnCurve
-Apply-
Before:
1
After:
Y
Z
1
1 9
X
9
1 8
Y
Z
X
8

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Trim Method At a Parametric Location Example
This example is the same as the previous example, except Point 1 instead of Point 8 is cursor
selected as the end of the curve to trim in the Curve/Point List box.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Option: Parametric
Trim Point
0.0
Edit
Curve
Trim
1.0
u Parametric Value
Auto Execute
Curve/Point List
0.75
Construct PointCurveUOnCurve
-Apply-
Before:
1
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
1 9
X
X
1 1
9
8
8

6.4 Editing Surfaces
Surface Break Options
Breaking a Surface With the Curve Option
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The Break method with the Curve option creates two surfaces by breaking a surface or solid face
at a curve location.The curve location does not have to lie on the surface, but it must intersect on
opposite edges of the surface or face. The curve location can be a curve, an edge or other curve
locations provided on the Curve select menu.
Used to express the surface type to create the curve from. Options are Curve,
Surface, Plane, Point, 2Point and Parametric.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
2
Option:
Curve
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Edit
Surface
Break
Break Curve List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
If ON, after Break completes, the existing surfaces specified in
Surface List will be deleted from the database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the existing surfaces or faces to break either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate surfaces or faces.
Specify one curve break location for each surface or face
specified in Surface List, either by cursor selecting it or by
entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 10,
Surface 11.1. The Curve select menu that appears, can be
used to define how you want to cursor select each curve break
location.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Example ➠

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Break Method At a Curve Example
Breaks Surface 1 at Curve 3. Notice that Curve 3 does not lie on Surface 1. Instead, MSC.Patran
projects the curve break location on the surface. Also, Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in and
Surface 1 is deleted.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
2
Option:
Curve
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
Break Curve List
Curve 3
Edit
Surface
Break
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
1
Z
8
Y
1
Z
8
6
X
3
X
6
10
3
3
1
11
2
5
9
9
5
7
7

Surface Break Method At Two Points Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
This example is the same as the previous example, except the curve break location is defined by
Points 8 and 9 using the Curve select menu icon listed below.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
2
Option:
Curve
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
Edit
Surface
Break
Break Curve List
Construct 2PointCurve(Evalua
-Apply-
Curve Select Menu Icon
Before:
8
Y
1
Z
After:
8
Y
1
Z
6
6
X
X
3
10
1
11
2
9
5
9
5
7
7

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Break Method At a Curve on a Face Example
Breaks a face of Solid 1 using the Surface select menu icon listed below, at the break location of
Curve 1.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
1
Option:
Curve
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Solid 1.6
Break Curve List
Curve 1
Edit
Surface
Break
-Apply-
Surface Select Menu Icon
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
9
X
1
9
X
1
8
8
6
6
12
1
12
1
1
1
1
2
13
13
10
5
10
5
11
7
11
7

Breaking a Surface With the Surface Option
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The Break method with the Surface option creates two surfaces by breaking a surface or solid
face at a surface location.The surface break location must intersect the surface or face on opposite
edges. The surface break location can be a surface or a solid face.
Used to express the surface type to create the curve from. Options are Curve, Surface, Plane,
Point, 2Point and Parametric.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
2
Option:
Surface
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Edit
Surface
Break
Break Surface List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
If ON, after Break completes, the existing surfaces specified in
Surface List will be deleted from the database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the existing surfaces or faces to break either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.
Specify one surface break location for each surface or face
specified in Surface List, either by cursor selecting it or by
entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 10,
Solid 11.1. The Surface select menu that appears, can be
used to define how you want to cursor select each surface
break location.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Example ➠

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Break Method At a Surface Example
Creates Surface 4 and 5 by breaking Surface 1 in half with the break location of Surface 3.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
4
Option:
Surface
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
Break Surface List
Surface 3
Edit
Surface
Break
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
2
28
1
4
1
4
1
1
3
3
1
6
4
5
7
6
7
3
3

Breaking a Surface With the Plane Option
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
This method breaks a surface with a plane. The surface will be broken along its intersection with
the plane.
Used to express the surface type to create the curve from. Options are Curve, Surface, Plane,
Point, 2Point and Parametric.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
2
Option:
Plane
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Edit
Surface
Break Plane List
Break
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
If ON, after Break completes, the existing surfaces specified
in Surface List will be deleted from the database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the existing surfaces or faces to break either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example:
Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select menu that appears can be
used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
surfaces or faces.
Specify the planes to break the surface. Either cursor select the
planes or enter the IDs or definition from the keyboard. Example:
Plane 1 5, x=10, Coord 0.1. The Plane select menu that appears can
be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
planes.
☞ More Help:
Example ➠
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Breaking a Surface With the Plane Option Example
Creates Surfaces 3 and 4 by breaking Surface 2 in half with the break location of Plane 1.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
3
Option:
Plane
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 2
Break Plane List
Plane 1
Edit
Surface
Break
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z X 1
After:
Y
Z
X
2
X 1
2
4
5 2
5
7
1
1
6
3
4
3
3
4

Breaking a Surface With the Point Option
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The Break method with the Point option creates two or four surfaces by breaking an existing
surface or solid face defined at a point location. If the point is on an edge, then two surfaces are
created. If the point is located on the interior, then four surfaces are created. The point location
can be a point, a node, a vertex, a curve/curve intersection or a curve/surface intersection.
Used to express the surface type to create the curve from. Options are Curve, Surface, Plane,
Point, 2Point and Parametric.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
2
Option:
Point
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
Break Point List
Point 4
Edit
Surface
Break
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
If ON, after Break completes, the existing surfaces
specified in Surface List will be deleted from the database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the existing surfaces or faces to break either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface
select menu that appears can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Example ➠

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Break Method At a Point Example
Breaks Surface 1 into four Surfaces at Point 5. Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed and
Surface 1 is deleted.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Surface ID List
2
Option:
Geometry
Point
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
Break Point List
Point 4
Edit
Surface
Break
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
X
Y
X
2
2
1
1
6
1
3
1
5
2
1
5
5
4
7
4
4
3
3

Surface Break Method At a Point Example
This example is the same as the previous example, except that the break location is at Point 4
instead of Point 5, and Surfaces 2 and 3 are created instead of four surfaces.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Surface ID List
2
Option:
Geometry
Point
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
Break Point List
Point 4
Edit
Surface
Break
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Z
After:
Y
Y
X
X
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
5
5
3
4
4
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
3
3

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Break Method At a Vertex Example
Breaks Surface 1 along the diagonal into Surfaces 2 and 3 at Point 1 which is located at the vertex
of Surface 1.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Surface ID List
2
Option:
Geometry
Point
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
Break Point List
Point 1
Edit
Surface
Break
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Z
After:
Y
X
Y
X
2
2
1
1
4
4
1
23
3
3

Breaking a Surface Using the 2 Point Option
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The Break method using the 2 Point option creates two surfaces by breaking an existing surface
or solid face defined by two point locations. The point locations must lie on opposite edges of
the surface or face. The point locations can be points, nodes, vertices, curve/curve intersections,
or curve/surface intersections.
Used to express the surface type to create the curve from. Options are Curve,
Surface, Plane, Point, 2Point and Parametric.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
2
Option:
2 Point
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Edit
Surface
Break
Break Point 1 List
Break Point 2 List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
If ON, after Break completes, the existing surfaces specified in
Surface List will be deleted from the database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the existing surfaces or faces to break either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select
menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.
Specify two point break locations for each surface or face
either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Point 1 Curve 10.1 Node 10. If two
vertices of the surface or face are selected, they must be
diagonal from each other. The Point select menu that
appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor
select each point location.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Example ➠

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Break Method At 2 Points Example
Breaks Surface 1 into Surfaces 2 and 3 defined by Point 5 and Node 1. Notice that Delete Original
Surfaces is pressed in and Surface 1 is deleted.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
2
Option: 2 Point
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
Break Point 1 List
Point 5
Break Point 2 List
Node 1
Edit
Surface
Break
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
3
X
3
5
5
4
4
2
2
2
3
1
2
1
16
1
2
2
1
1
1
1

Breaking a Surface With the Parametric Option
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The Break method with the Parametric option creates two surfaces from an existing surface or
solid face. The break location is defined at the surface’s or face’s parametric ξ1 or ξ2 coordinate
location, where ξ1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 and ξ2has a range of 0 ≤ξ2≤1. Select either Constant u Direction or Constant v Direction. The break will either be along the
direction for Constant u Direction or along the direction for Constant v Direction.
ξ1( u)
ξ2( v)
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
1
Option: Parametric
Break Direction
◆ Constant u Direction
◆ Constant v Direction
Break Curve
0.0
1.0
v Parametric Value
0.5
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Edit
Surface
Break
-Apply-
If ON, after Break completes, the surfaces
specified in Surface List will be deleted from the
database.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Used to express the surface type to create the curve from.
Options are Curve, Surface, Plane, Point, 2Point and
Parametric.
ξ1( u)
ξ2( v)
Specify the surface’s or coordinate value,
either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the
databox. The directions of ξ1 and ξ2 are defined by the
connectivity of the surface or face. You can plot the ξ1 and
ξ2 directions by pressing the Show Parametric Direction
toggle on the Geometric Attributes form under the menu
Display/Geometry.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the existing surfaces or faces to break either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select
menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Connectivity (p. 15)
Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Break Method At Parametric Location u=0.25 Example
Breaks Surface 1 into Surfaces 2 and 3 at ξ1( u)
= 0.25 . Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is
pressed and Surface 1 is deleted and that the parametric direction is displayed.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
2
Option: Parametric
Break Direction
◆ Constant u Direction
◆ Constant v Direction
Break Curve
0.0
1.0
v Parametric Value
0.25
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
Edit
Surface
Break
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
X
3
Y
Z
5
5
X
3
4
4
2
2
3
1
2
2
1
1
2 6
1
1
2

Surface Break Method At Parametric Location v=0.25 Example
This example is the same as the previous example, except that the break location is at
ξ2( v)
= 0.25 .
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
2
Option: Parametric
Break Direction
◆ Constant u Direction
◆ Constant v Direction
Break Curve
0.0
1.0
v Parametric Value
0.25
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
Edit
Surface
Break
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
3
X
3
5
4
4
62
2
3
1
2
2
1
5
2
1
1
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
1
21

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Break Method On a Face At Parametric Location v=0.25 Example
Breaks a face of Solid 1 by using the Surface select menu icon listed below at ξ2( v)
= 0.25 .
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
1
Option: Parametric
Break Direction
◆ Constant u Direction
◆ Constant v Direction
Break Curve
0.0
1.0
v Parametric Value
0.25
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Solid 1.6
Edit
Surface
Break
-Apply-
Surface Select Menu Icon
Before:
Z
8
After:
3
1
3
1
Y
2
1
2
1
X
2
12 1
82
1
Z
Y
X
1
9
9
6
6
1
1
11
5
11
5
2
13
10
7
10
7

Blending Surfaces
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The Blend method creates a set of parametric bi-cubic surfaces from an existing set of two or
more surfaces or solid faces by enforcing a first derivative continuity across its boundaries. The
set of existing surfaces or faces must share at least one edge with another surface or face in the
set.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
2
Blend Parameters
Surface Edge List
Weighting Factors
0.5
Delete Original Surfaces
Surface List
Edit
Surface
Blend
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Specify in Surface Edge List, a surface edge that the weight
factor will be applied, either by cursor selecting it or by entering
the ID. Example: Surface 1.2. If left blank, MSC.Patran will
apply the specified weight factor to all surfaces.
Specify in Weighting Factors, a value between 0.0 and 1.0 for
each specified surface edge (a maximum of four per surface or
face). A value of 1.0 will cause the edge to remain rigid as
possible. A value of 0.0 will allow the edge to remain as
flexible as possible. The default value is 0.5.
If ON, after Blend completes, the surfaces specified in
Surface List will be deleted from the database.
Specify the surfaces or faces to blend either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate surfaces or faces.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
Example ➠

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Blend Method Example
Blends Surfaces 1, 5, 3 and 4 with a default weight factor of 0.5 applied to all surface edges.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
6
Blend Parameters
Surface Edge List
Weighting Factors
0.5
Delete Original Surfaces
Surface List
Edit
Surface
Blend
Surface 1 5 3 4
-Apply-
Before:
4
4
After:
1 2
1
3
Y
Z
X
1 6 2
3
Y
Z
X
5
7
5
6 3 7
8
5
6 8 7
8
4
9
10
10

Surface Blend Method Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
Blends Surfaces 1 through 4 with a weighting factor of 1.0 applied to two edges (highlighted in
the “Before” picture).
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Surface ID List
5
Blend Parameters
Surface Edge List
Weighting Factors
1.0 1.0
Delete Original Surfaces
Surface List
Surface 1:4
Edit
Surface
Blend
Surface 3.1 4.3
-Apply-
Before:
5
5
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
4
X
4
X
2
6
1
6
1
6
1
5
3
3
4
8
9
9
2
2
3
7
8
8
7
7

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Disassembling Trimmed Surfaces
The Disassemble method operates on one or more trimmed surfaces and creates the parent
surface that has the same curvature as the trimmed surface. A trimmed surface can be created
either by using the Geometry Application’s Create/Surface/Trim form or by using the
Create/Surface/Planar Trim form.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Edit
Surface
Method: Disassemble
Delete Original Surfaces
Trimmed Surface List
-Apply-
If ON, after Disassemble completes, the surfaces specified in
Trimmed Surface List will be deleted from the database.
Specify the trimmed surfaces to disassemble either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Surface 11.
☞ More Help:
Example ➠
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20)
Creating Trimmed Surfaces (p. 278)

Surface Disassemble Method Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
Operates on Surface 2 which is a general trimmed surface. Surface 3 is the new parent surface.
Notice that new curves associated with Surface 2 are also created.
Before:
Geometry
Action:
Object:
Delete Original Surfaces
Trimmed Surface List
Surface 2
Edit
Surface
Method: Disassemble
-Apply-
After:
19
16
Y
Z
X
16
Y
Z
X
1
15
2015
2
5 23
2
13
4
13
17
22
17
3
18
18
21

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Disassemble Method Example
Operates on Surface 1 which is a planar trimmed surface. Notice that the new parent surface,
Surface 2, is also planar and that new curves associated with Surface 1 are created.
Action:
Object:
Geometry
Delete Original Surfaces
Trimmed Surface List
Surface 1
Edit
Surface
Method: Disassemble
-Apply-
Before:
5
1
Y
6
Z X
7
After:
Y
Z
12
X
5
1
12
5
9
1
8
6 2 7
11
4
3
1
10
8

Matching Surface Edges
Matching Surface Edges with the 2 Surface Option
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The Edge Match method with the 2 Surface option recreates the second surface of a specified pair
that share two common vertices but has a gap or unmatched edges. The gap must be less than
10 times the Global Model Tolerance or else MSC.Patran will not close the gap. The existing pair
of surfaces or faces do not need to have matching parametric and orientations. This
method is useful for correcting topologically incongruent surface pairs so that they are
congruent before you mesh. Also see Matching Adjacent Surfaces (p. 270).
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Edge Match
Option: 2 Surface
Auto Execute
Surface 1 List
Surface 2 List
-Apply-
ξ 1
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the first and second surfaces or faces of the pair to match
in Surface 1 List and in Surface 2 List, respectively. The Surface
select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.
ξ 2
Vertices are Shared, Edges are Not
☞ More Help:
Gap must be less than10 times
the Global Model Tolerance.
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Topological Congruency and
Meshing (p. 12)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Edge Match Method Example
Edits Surface 2 which is specified as the second surface of the pair and closes the gap between
Surfaces 1 and 2.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Edge Match
Option: 2 Surface
Auto Execute
Surface 1 List
Surface 1
Surface 2 List
Surface 2
-Apply-
Before:
2 3
1
1
Y
Z
After:
X
1
2 3
Y
Z
X
1 2
2
6
4 5
6
4 5

Surface Edge Match Method Example
This example is the same as the previous example, except Surface 1 is specified as the second
surface of the surface pair.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Edge Match
Option: 2 Surface
Auto Execute
Surface 1 List
Surface 2
Surface 2 List
Surface 1
-Apply-
Before:
2 3
1
After:
1
Y
Z
X
1
2 3
Y
Z
X
1
2
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
6
4 5
2
6
4 5

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Matching Surface Edges with the Surface-Point Option
The Edge Match method with the Surface-Point option recreates a specified surface as a trimmed
surface that includes an additional cursor defined vertex point. This method is useful for
correcting topologically incongruent pairs of surfaces so that they are congruent before you
mesh.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Edge Match
Option: Surface-Point
Auto Execute
Surface
Point List
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify in the Surface listbox, the existing surfaces or faces,
either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.
Specify in Point List, the vertex point locations along an edge
of each specified surface, either by entering the ID from the
keyboard or by cursor selecting the vertex point location. The
Vertex select menu will appear.
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Topological Congruency and Meshing
(p. 12)

Surface Edge Match Method With Surface-Point Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
Recreates Surface 1 which was a parametric bi-cubic surface, into a trimmed surface which has
the vertices Points 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 so that Surface 1 is congruent with Surfaces 2 and 3. The
additional vertex specified in the Point List was cursor selected at Point 5 by using the Vertex
select menu icon listed below.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Edge Match
Option: Surface-Point
Auto Execute
Surface
Surface 1
Point List
Surface 1 (u1.000000) (v 0.4
-Apply-
Vertex Select Menu Icon
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
2 3
X
1
X
1
1
5 6
4
2 3
1
4
3
2
3
8
7
5 6
2
8
7

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending Surfaces
Extending Surfaces with the 2 Surface Option
This form is used to extend two surfaces to their line of intersection.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
Auto Execute
Surface 1 to Extend
Surface 1 Edge
Surface 2 to Extend
Surface 2 Edge
-Apply-
Specify the extend option to use:
2 Surface
To a Curve
To a Plane
To a Point
To a Surface
Percentage
Fixed Length
Choose between editing all associated surfaces or editing only
selected surfaces.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the first surface to extend to the second surface either
by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard.
Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu that appears
can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate surface.
Specify the edge of the first surface to start the extension from
either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the
keyboard.Example: Surface 1.1. The Edge select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate edge.
Specify the second surface to extend to the first surface either
by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard.
Example: Surface 2. The Surface select menu that appears
can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate surface.
Specify the edge of the second surface to start the extension
from either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the
keyboard.Example: Surface 1.2. The Edge select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate edge.
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran

Extending a Surface With the 2 Surface Option Example
Extend surface 1 to the line of intersection of surface 2.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
Auto Execute
Surface 1 to Extend
Surface 1
Surface 1 Edge
Surface 1.3
Surface 2 to Extend
Surface 2
Surface 2 Edge
Surface 2.2
-Apply-
Z
Z
Y
Y
X
X
1
1
2
2
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending Surfaces to a Curve
This form is used to extend a surface to an intersecting curve.
Action:
Geometry
Geometry
Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
Auto Execute
Surface to Extend
Surface Edge
Intersecting Curve
-Apply-
Specify the extend option to use:
2 Surface
To a Curve
To a Plane
To a Point
To a Surface
Percentage
Fixed Length
Choose between editing all associated surfaces or editing only
selected surfaces.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the surface to extend to the intersecting curve either
by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the
keyboard. Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu
that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate surface.
Specify the edge of the surface to start the extension from
either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the
keyboard.Example: Surface 1.1. The Edge select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate edge.
Specify the Intersecting Curve to extend the surface to either
by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard.
Example: Curve 1. The Curve select menu that appears can
be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate curve.
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran

Extending a Surface to a Curve Example
Extend Surface 1 to the edge of Surface 2.
Action:
Geometry
Geometry
Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
Auto Execute
Surface to Extend
Surface 1
Surface Edge
Surface 1.3
Intersecting Curve
Surface 2.4
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
X
After:
Y
Z
X
1 2
1
2
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending Surfaces to a Plane
This form is used to extend a surface to an intersecting plane.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
Auto Execute
Surface to Extend
Surface Edge
Intersecting Plane
-Apply-
Specify the extend option to use:
2 Surface
To a Curve
To a Plane
To a Point
To a Surface
Percentage
Fixed Length
Choose between editing all associated surfaces or editing only
selected surfaces.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the surface to extend to the intersecting plane either
by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the
keyboard. Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu
that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate surface.
Specify the edge of the surface to start the extension from
either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the
keyboard.Example: Surface 1.1. The Edge select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate edge.
Specify the Intersecting Plane to extend the surface to either
by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard.
Example: Plane 1. The Plane select menu that appears can
be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate plane.
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran

Extending a Surface to a Plane Example
Extend Surface 1 to Plane 1.
Action:
Geometry
Geometry
Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
Auto Execute
Surface to Extend
Surface 1
Surface Edge
Surface 1.3
Intersecting Plane
Plane 1
-Apply-
Z
Z
Before:
Y
X
After:
Y
X
1
1
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending Surfaces to a Point
This form is used to extend a surface to an intersecting point.
Action:
Geometry
Geometry
Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
Auto Execute
Surface to Extend
Surface Edge
Intersecting Point
Specify the extend option to use:
2 Surface
To a Curve
To a Plane
To a Point
To a Surface
Percentage
Fixed Length
Choose between editing all associated surfaces or editing only
selected surfaces.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the surface to extend to the intersecting point either
by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the
keyboard. Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu
that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate surface.
Specify the edge of the surface to start the extension from
either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the
keyboard.Example: Surface 1.1. The Edge select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate edge.
-Apply- Specify the Intersecting Point to extend the surface to either
by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard.
Example: Point 1. The Point select menu that appears can be
used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
point.
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran

Extending a Surface to a Point Example
Extend Surface 1 to Point 1.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
Auto Execute
Surface to Extend
Surface 1
Surface Edge
Surface 1.3
Intersecting Point
Point 1
-Apply-
Before:
2
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
3 4
3 6
2
X
X
1
1
5
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
1
1

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending Surfaces to a Surface
This form is used to extend a surface to an intersecting surface.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
Surface ID List
1
Break Intersecting Surface
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface to Extend
Surface Edge
Intersecting Surface
-Apply-
Specify the extend option to use:
2 Surface
To a Curve
To a Plane
To a Point
To a Surface
Percentage
Fixed Length
Choose between editing all associated surfaces or editing only
selected surfaces.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
By default, the Intersecting Surface will be broken at the line of
intersection of the two surfaces.
By default, the Intersecting Surface will be deleted after the
break operation which creates two new surfaces.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the surface to extend to the intersecting surface either
by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard.
Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu that appears
can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate surface.
Specify the edge of the surface to start the extension from
either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the
keyboard.Example: Surface 1.1. The Edge select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate edge.
Specify the Intersecting Surface to extend the surface to either
by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard.
Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu that appears
can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate surface.
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran

Extending a Surface to a Surface Example
Extend Surface 1 to the line of intersection of Surface 2 and break Surface 2 at the line of
intersection to create Surface 3 and 4, then delete Surface 2.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
Surface ID List
3
Break Intersecting Surface
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface to Extend
Surface 1
Surface Edge
Surface 1.3
Intersecting Surface
Surface 2
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Y
After:
Z
Y
X
X
1
1
4
2
3
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending Surfaces with the Percentage Option
This form is used to extend a surface by a percentage in the U and/or V parametric directions.
Action:
Geometry
Geometry
Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
Display
Parametric Direction
Percent Change of U V
-99
100
U-Min
-99
U-Max
-99
V-Min
-99
V-Max
Auto Execute
Surface List
Reset
-Apply-
100
100
100
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Specify the extend option to use:
2 Surface
To a Curve
To a Plane
To a Point
To a Surface
Percentage
Fixed Length
This button toggles between Display Parametric Direction
of the geometry in the viewport and Show Parametric
Direction to visualize the parametric direction of the surface
to extend.
Define the percentage of u-min, u-max, v-min, and v-max to
change in order to alter the parametric extents of the surface
by using the slidebar or entering a value in the databox.
Valid range is -99 to +100.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the surface to extend either by cursor selecting it or
by entering the ID from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1.
The Surface select menu that appears can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
surface.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran

Extending a Surface With the Percentage Option Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
Extend Surface 1 by 100% in the U direction starting at U-Max = 1 and shrink Surface 1 by 50%
in the V direction starting at V-Max=1.
Action:
Geometry
Geometry
Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
Display
Parametric Direction
Percent Change of U V
-99
100
U-Min
-99
U-Max
-99
V-Min
-99
V-Max
Auto Execute
Surface List
Reset
-Apply-
100
100
100
0.0
100.0
0.0
-50.0
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
1
1

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending Surfaces with the Fixed Length Option
This form is used to extend a surface by a fixed length.
Action:
Geometry Geometry
Geometry
Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
Length
1.0
Auto Execute
Surface to Extend
Surface Edge
-Apply-
Specify the extend option to use:
2 Surface
To a Curve
To a Plane
To a Point
To a Surface
Percentage
Fixed Length
Choose between editing all associated surfaces or editing
only selected surfaces.
Specify the length to extend the surface starting at the
surface edge selected.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the surface to extend either by cursor selecting it or
by entering the ID from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1.
The Surface select menu that appears can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
surface.
Specify the edge of the surface to start the extension from
either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the
keyboard.Example: Surface 1.1. The Edge select menu
that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate edge.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran

Extending a Surface With the Fixed Length Option Example
Extend Surface 1 by a fixed length of 5.0 units in the X direction.
Action:
Geometry
Geometry
Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
Length
5.0
Auto Execute
Surface to Extend
Surface 1
Surface Edge
Surface 1.3
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
1
1
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Refitting Surfaces
The Refit method creates a non-uniformly parameterized network of bicubic patches from
existing surfaces. The Refit Tolerance is input as the refit parameter.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Refit
Surface ID List
2
Surface Type
NURBS
Refit Parameters
Refit Tolerance
0.005
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface
to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic
Functions.
Allows the refit surface, if the toggle is ON, to be created
as a NURB Surface or a Piece Wise Rational Polynomial
Surface. This depends on the Geometry Preferences
(p. 296) toggle, NURBS Accelerator value.
Enter a value to define the Refit Tolerance to use for the
refit process. Enter the value from the keyboard.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the surfaces to refit. Either cursor select the
surfaces or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example:
Surface 1 5, Solid 10.4. The Surface select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate surfaces.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction
to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12)

Reversing Surfaces
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The Reverse method redefines the connectivity of an existing set of surfaces or solid faces by
exchanging the positive ξ1 and ξ2 directions of the surfaces or faces. You can plot the ξ1 and
ξ2 directions for the surfaces by pressing the Show Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric
Attributes form found under the menu Display/Geometry.
When pressed, MSC.Patran draws the positive surface normal vector for each specified surface or
solid face. The positive normal direction is based on its parametrization. The normal vectors can
also be shown using the Show/Surface/Attributes form.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Reverse
Reverse Associated
Elements
Auto Execute
Surface List
Draw Normal Vectors
Reset Graphics
-Apply-
If ON, MSC.Patran will automatically reverse the connectivity
of the finite elements that are associated with the surfaces or
faces that are specified in Surface List. If OFF, MSC.Patran
retains the original connectivity of the elements.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the existing surfaces or faces to reverse either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.
Erases the normal vectors and reverts the model back to
the last display type, such as wireframe, after a MSC.Patran
form was executed, as defined on the Display menu forms.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Connectivity (p. 15)
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
Showing Surface Attributes (p. 588)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Reverse Method Example
ξ 1
Reverses the parametric and ξ2 directions for Surface 1. Notice that the parametric directions
are displayed on the surfaces. Also, notice that Auto Execute is not on so that you can press the
Draw Normal Vectors button without executing the form.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Reverse
Reverse Associated
Elements
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 3 4
Draw Normal Vectors
Reset Graphics
-Apply-
Before:
1
14 2
After:
2
14 1
Y X
Z
Y X
Z
15
15
3
3
10
10
11
11
4
4
2
2
1
12
1
12
13
13

Sewing Surfaces
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The Sew method sequentially combines the actions of the Edit/ Point/ Equivalence method to
equivalence surface vertices and the Edit/ Surface/Edge Match method to merge edges. The
composite action is a "sewing" of the surfaces. Vertices and edges are both equivalenced
according to the restrictions of the previously mentioned methods; however, since the operation
is sequential, vertices will already be equivalenced before doing the edge merging.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Sew
Surface List
-Apply-
Specify the surfaces to sew. The Surface select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate surfaces.
Gap must be less than10 times
the Global Model Tolerance.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Sew Method Example
Edits surfaces 1 and 2 by closing the gap between edges which share common vertices.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Sew
Surface List
Surface 1 2
-Apply-
Before:
2 3
1
1
Y
Z
After:
X
1
2 3
Y
Z
X
1 2
2
6
4 5
6
4 5

Trimming Surfaces to an Edge
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
This form is used to trim a Surface with one of its edges and optionally delete the surface with
the smallest surface area after the trim.
Action:
Geometry
Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Trim
Delete Sliver Surface
Auto Execute
Surface to Trim
Trimming Edge
-Apply-
By Default, Delete Sliver Surface toggle is on which will delete
the surface with the smallest surface area as a result of the trim
operation.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the surface to trim from either by cursor selecting them
or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1.
The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define
how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface.
Specify the edge of the surface to trim the surface with either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: surface 1.1. The Edge select menu that appears can
be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
edge.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Trim Surface To Edge Example
Trim the sliver from surface 5 by selecting the surface edge surface 5.4.
Action:
Geometry
Geometry
Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Trim
Delete Sliver Surface
Auto Execute
Surface to Trim
Surface 5
Trimming Edge
Surface 5.4
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Y
X
After:
Z
Y
X
5
5

Adding a Fillet to a Surface
This form facilitates the creation of a fillet edge between two existing edges sharing a given
vertex. This operation, when successful will replace the input vertex with a new edge.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Add Fillet
Fillet Radius
0.5
Auto Execute
Vertex List
Trimmed Surface
-Apply-
Fillet Radius specifies the real value of the fillet to be created
between edges sharing a given vertex.
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
Trimmed Surface identifies the surface that is to be modified.
Note that only one surface will be processed at a time.
Vertex List identifies the vertices that are to be replaced by
fillet edges.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Removing Edges from Surfaces
Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Option
This form allows the user to remove a given edge of a trimmed surface. This process differs from
the vertex removal function which was topological in nature. This operation is both topological
and geometrical in that the shape of the trimmed surface will be altered as well as the topology.
The edges adjacent to the removed edge will be extended until they intersect. This intersection
must take place within the domain of the parent surface.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Remove Edge
Option: Edge
Auto Execute
Edge List
Trimmed Surface
-Apply-
This option allows the user to identify the specific edges of a
surface that he wishes removed.
Edge List contains the edges to be removed.
Trimmed Surface identifies the surface to be modified. Note
that only a single surface may be processed for each
application.

Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Length Option
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
This form allows the user to automatically remove all edges whose length is less than a specified
value.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Remove Edge
Option: Edge Length
Min Edge Length
Auto Execute
Trimmed Surface
-Apply-
This option allows the user to specify a minimum edge
length. This results in the removal of all edges whose length
is smaller than this value.
Min Edge Length - all edges shorter than this are to be
removed.
Trimmed Surface - identifies the surface to be modified.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Adding a Hole to Surfaces
Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Center Point Option
The Add Hole method using the Center Point option adds a circular hole to a Surface. The
circular hole is defined in the tangent plane of the supplied, manifolded center point.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Add Hole
Option: Center Point
Hole Radius
1.0
Loop Interference Checker
Auto Execute
Center Point List
Surface
-Apply-
Used to express the options available for adding a hole.
Options are Center Point, Project Vector, and Inner Loop.
Specify the Hole Radius.
If ON, the inner loop list will be checked for interference with
each other and existing loops of the surface. Default = ON
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the center point for each circular hole either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Point 1 Curve 10.1. The Point select menu that
appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate points.
Specify the surface or face either by cursor selecting them
or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface
1 or Solid 10.1. The Surface select menu that appears, can
be used to define how you want to cursor select the surface
location.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran

Adding a Hole to a Surface with the Center Point Option Example
This will add nine circular holes to surface 1 using points 52:60. Warning messages will be
generated for the other points due to interference of holes at these points with surface edges.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Add Hole
Option: Center Point
Hole Radius
.0625
Loop Interference Checker
Auto Execute
Center Point List
Point 37:40 46:60
Surface
Surface 1
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
37
X
38 39
48
47
46
37
X
58 59 60
55 56 1 57
52 53 54
38 39
48
47
46
73 74 75
58 59 60
70 71 72
55 56 1 57
67 68 69
52 53 54
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
51
50
49
40
51
50
49
40

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Project Vector Option
The Add Hole method using the Projection Vector option adds a circular hole to a Surface. The
circular hole is defined in the plane of the supplied vector and vector-projected onto the surface.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Add Hole
Option: Project Vector
Hole Radius
1.0
Loop Interference Checker
Auto Execute
Vector List
Center Point List
Surface
-Apply-
Used to express the options available for adding a hole.
Options are Center Point, Project Vector, and Inner Loop.
Specify the Hole Radius.
If ON, the inner loop list will be checked for interference with
each other and existing loops of the surface. Default = ON
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the projection vector for each circular hole either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Vector 1 Coord 0.3. The Vector select
menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate vectors.
Specify the center point for each circular hole either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Point 1 Curve 10.1. The Point select menu that
appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate points.
Specify the surface or face either by cursor selecting them
or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface
1 or Solid 10.1. The Surface select menu that appears, can
be used to define how you want to cursor select the surface
location.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in
the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran

Adding a Hole to a Surface with the Project Vector Option Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
This will add two holes to surface 6 using points 78 and 82 and the projection vector defined by
the x axis of Coordinate Frame 0.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Add Hole
Option: Project Vector
Hole Radius
.0625
Loop Interference Checker
Auto Execute
Vector List
Coord 0.1
Center Point List
Point 78 82
Surface
Surface 6
-Apply-
Z
Z
Before:
Y
Y
76
X
After:
76
X
74
74
78
83 78
82
82
85
84
86
77
77
75
75

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Inner Loop Option
The Add Hole method using the Inner Loop option adds a hole to a Surface. The hole is defined
by the supplied closed, chained curves which will define inner loops for the creation of a
Trimmed Surface.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Add Hole
Option: Inner Loop
Hole Radius
1.0
Loop Interference Checker
Auto Execute
Inner Loop List
Surface
-Apply-
Used to express the options available for adding a hole.
Options are Center Point, Project Vector, and Inner Loop.
The Hole Radius databox is disabled for this option.
If ON, the inner loop list will be checked for interference with
each other and existing loops of the surface. Default = OFF
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify a closed, chained curve (inner loop) for each hole
either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Curve 1. The Curve select menu that
appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate curves.
Note: The Inner Loop List must consist of closed, chained
curves. For curves that are closed, but not circles or chains,
use the Create,Curve,Chain method to define a valid inner
loop.
Specify the surface or face either by cursor selecting them
or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface
1 or Solid 10.1. The Surface select menu that appears, can
be used to define how you want to cursor select the surface
location.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in
the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran

Adding a Hole to a Surface with the Inner Loop Option Example
This will add 5 new holes to surface 6 using curves 14, 15, 16, 29, and 30.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Add Hole
Option: Inner Loop
Hole Radius
1.0
Loop Interference Checker
Auto Execute
Inner Loop List
Curve 14:17 29 30
Surface
Surface 6
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
14
29
6
16 17
6
17
30
15
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Removing a Hole from Trimmed Surfaces
The Remove Hole method removes a hole from a Trimmed Surface. The hole to remove can be
any edge-curves which are inner loops of a Trimmed Surface.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Remove Hole
Auto Execute
Inner Loop List
Trimmed Surface
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the edge-curve (inner loop) for each hole either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Surface 1.1. The Curve select menu that
appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate edge-curves.
Specify the trimmed surface by either by cursor selecting
them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example:
Surface 1 or Solid 1.1. The Surface select menu that
appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the surface location.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in
the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran

Removing a Hole from a Trimmed Surface Example
This will remove all the small inner loops from surface 2.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Remove Hole
Auto Execute
Inner Loop List
Surface 4.15 4.16 4.17 4.18
Trimmed Surface
Surface 4
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
4
4
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Adding a Vertex to Surfaces
The Add Vertex method adds a vertex to a surface. The point used to create a vertex can be any
point which is on the edge of the selected surface. If a hardpoint is converted to a surface vertex
in the process of adding a vertex to a surface, then this point(vertex) cannot be reassociated to
the surface as a hardpoint.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Add Vertex
Auto Execute
Point List
Surface
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the point for each vertex either by cursor selecting
them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example:
Point. The Point select menu that appears, can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points.
Specify the surface by either by cursor selecting them or by
entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or
Solid 1.1. The Surface select menu that appears, can be
used to define how you want to cursor select the surface
location.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in
the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran

Adding a Vertex to a Surface Example
This will add a vertex to surface 2 using point 3. The result is surface 2 becomes a trimmed
surface with five vertices.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Add Vertex
Auto Execute
Point List
Point 3
Surface
Surface 2
-Apply-
Before:
Y Y1
Z
After:
2 3
Y Y1
Z
X
X
1
2 3
1
5 6
4
4
2
5 6
2
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
7
7

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Removing a Vertex from Trimmed Surfaces
The Remove Vertex method removes a vertex from a Trimmed Surface. The vertex to remove
can be any vertex of a Trimmed Surface with the exception that one vertex per loop must remain.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Remove Vertex
Delete Associated Point
Auto Execute
Vertex List
-Apply-
Removing a Vertex from a Trimmed Surface Example
By default, Delete Associated Point is ON which means that
all points associated to a vertex to be removed and that is not
volatile to the trimmed surface will be deleted.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the vertices by either by cursor selecting them or by
entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface
1.1.1. The vertex select menu that appears, can be used to
define how you want to cursor select each vertex location.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in
the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran
This will remove vertex 3.4.2 from trimmed surface 3. The result is a parametric bicubic surface.

Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Remove Vertex
Delete Associated Point
Auto Execute
Vertex List
Surface 3.4.2
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
42 45
43
41
X
41
X
3
42 43
3
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
44
44

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
6.5 Editing Solids
Breaking Solids
Breaking Solids with the Point Option
The Break method with the Point option breaks an existing solid into two or four smaller solids
at a point location. The point location can be on or within the solid.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Break
Solid ID List
1
Option: Point
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Break Point List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Used to express the surface type to create the curve from.
Options are Point, Parametric, Plane and Surface.
If ON, after Break completes, the solids specified in Solid List
will be deleted from the database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify in Solid List the existing solids to break either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Solid 11 3. The Solid select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate solids.
Specify in Break Point List the point break location, either by
cursor selecting the point location or by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. The Point select menu will appear. If the point
location is on the face, four solids will be created. If it is on an
edge, two solids will be created. And if it is inside the solid,
eight solids will be created.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)

Solid Break Method with the Point Option Example
Breaks Solid 1 into eight solids by referencing Point 9. Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is
pressed and Surface 1 is deleted.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Break
Solid ID List
2
Option: Point
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1
Break Point List
Point 9
-Apply-
Before:
2
Z1
After:
2
Z1
Y
27
Y
X
3
4
26 7
18 3
1
8
8
5
9
19
16
3 17
13 2
6
25
9 24
23
8
X
28 4
15
22
9
514
5
21
4
12
11
20
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
7
7
10
6
6

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Break Method with the Point Option Example
This example is similar to the previous example, except that the break point is on a face instead
of inside of Solid 1, and four solids are created instead of eight.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Break
Solid ID List
2
Option: Point
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1
Break Point List
Point 9
-Apply-
Before:
After:
3
2
9
1
Y
8
X4
Z
1
5
3
10
3
15
2
2
9
5
13
Y
8
16
18
X4
Z
11
14
5
1 12
7
7
4
17
6
6

Solid Break Method with the Point Option Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
This example is similar to the previous example, except that the break point is on an edge instead
of on a face of Solid 1, and two solids are created instead of four.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Break
Solid ID List
2
Option: Point
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1
Break Point List
Point 9
-Apply-
Before:
After:
3
2
9
1
Y
8
X4
Z
1
5
3
11
2
2
9
Y
8
X4
Z 12
1 10
5
3
7
7
6
6

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Breaking Solids with the Parametric Option
The Break method with the Parametric option creates two, four or eight solids from an existing
solid. The break location is defined at the solid’s parametric ξ1 , ξ2 , and ξ3 coordinate locations
where ξ1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 , ξ2has a range of 0 ≤ ξ2 ≤1and ξ3has a range of 0 ≤ ξ3 ≤1.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Break
Solid ID List
1
Option: Parametric
Break Point
0.0
u Parametric Value
0.0
1.0
v Parametric Value
0.0
1.0
1.0
w Parametric Value
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
-Apply -
0.5
0.5
0.5
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Used to express the surface type to create the curve from.
Options are Point, Parametric, Plane and Surface.
ξ1( u)
ξ2( v)
ξ3( w)
Specify the solid’s , and coordinate
values of the Break Point, either by using the slide bar or by
entering the value in the databox. If the break point will be
located on the solid’s face, four solids will be created. If it is
on an edge, two solids will be created. And if it is inside the
solid, eight solids will be created.
The directions of ξ1 , ξ2 and ξ3 are defined by the solid’s
connectivity. You can plot the x1 and x2 directions by
pressing the Show Parametric Direction toggle on the
Geometric Attributes form under the menu
Display/Geometry.

Break Point
0.0
u Parametric Value
0.0
1.0
v Parametric Value
0.0
1.0
1.0
w Parametric Value
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
-Apply -
0.5
0.5
0.5
If ON, after Break completes, the solids specified in
Solid List will be deleted from the database.
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means
you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the solids to break either by cursor selecting them or by
entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 10 11. The
Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate solids.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction
to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Connectivity (p. 15)
Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Break Method with the Parametric Option Example
ξ 1
Breaks Solid 1 into eight smaller solids at = 0.5 , ξ2 = 0.5 , and ξ3 = 0.5 . Notice that Delete
Original Surfaces is pressed and Surface 1 is deleted and that the parametric direction is
displayed.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Break
Solid ID List
2
Option: Parametric
Break Point
0.0
u Parametric Value
0.0
1.0
v Parametric Value
0.0
1.0
1.0
w Parametric Value
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1
-Apply -
0.5
0.5
0.5
Before:
10
Y
Z 9
After:
10
23
Y
Z 9
X
24
11
12
3
8
1
2
8
5
217 131
3 8
13 211 1
18
14 5
15
12
3 2 25
1 2
2 3
1 3
21
20
34
2 3
19
2 3
1 5
26
X
1
216 1
28
3 6
2193 1 7
22
27
30
7
7
29
6
6

Solid Break Method with the Parametric Option Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
This example is similar to the previous example, except ξ1 = 0 instead of ξ1 = 0.5 , and Surface
1 is broken into four solids instead of eight.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Break
Solid ID List
2
Option: Parametric
Break Point
0.0
u Parametric Value
0.0
1.0
v Parametric Value
0.0
1.0
1.0
w Parametric Value
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1
-Apply -
0.0
0.5
0.5
Before:
10
Y
Z 9
After:
Z
6
X
17
Y
5 X
15
11
12
2
3
8
1
2
2
31215 7
2
31
2 418
3111
8
2
39
5
1
1
1
3
2
16
13
14
3
7
10
4
6

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Break Method with the Parametric Option Example
This example is similar to the first example, except ξ1 = 0 and ξ2 = 0 instead of ξ1 = 0.5 and
= 0.5 , and Surface 1 is broken into two solids instead of eight.
ξ 2
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Break
Solid ID List
2
Option: Parametric
Break Point
0.0
u Parametric Value
0.0
1.0
v Parametric Value
0.0
1.0
1.0
w Parametric Value
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1
-Apply -
0.0
0.0
0.5
Before:
10
Y
Z 9
After:
Z
Y
6
5
X
X
10
2
39
11
12
1
7
3
8
2
3
8
1
2
2
31
5
1
1
2
11
12
3
7
6
4

Breaking Solids with the Curve Option
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The Break method with the Curve option breaks an existing solid into two solids at a curve break
location. The curve location must completely lie on and bisect a face of the solid.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Break
Solid ID List
4
Option: Curve
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Break Curve List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
If ON, after Break completes, the solids specified in Solid List
will be deleted from the database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify in Solid List, the solids to break either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Solid 11 3. The Solid select menu that appears can
be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate solids.
Specify in Break Curve List, the curve break location, either
by cursor selecting the location or by entering the ID from the
keyboard. The Curve select menu will appear.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Break Method with the Curve Option Example
Breaks Solids 2 and 3 into two solids each at Curve 1. Notice that Delete Original Solids is
pressed and Solid 1 is deleted.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Break
Solid ID List
4
Option: Curve
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 2 3
Break Curve List
Curve 1
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
1
14
1
14
21
3
3
15
18
10
13
15
13
2
20
18
10
4 24
23
5
20
17
17
12
6
12
9
3 1
9
19
122
7
19
16
16
11
11

Breaking Solids with the Plane Option
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The method breaks a solid with a plane. The solid will be broken along its intersection with the
plane.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Break
Solid ID List
2
Option: Plane
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1
Break Plane List
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created.
See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Used to express the surface type to create the curve from.
Options are Point, Parametric, Plane and Surface.
If ON, after Break completes, the solids specified in Solid List will
be deleted from the database.
Specify the solids to be broken.
Point 9 Specify the planes to break the surface. Either cursor select the
planes or enter the IDs or definition from the keyboard.
Example: Plane 1 5, x=10, Coord 0.1. The Plane select menu
-Apply-
that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate planes.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Breaking a Solid with the Plane Option Example
Creates Solids 2 and 3 by breaking Solid 1 along its intersection with Plane 1. Notice that Delete
Original Solids is pressed and Solid 1 is deleted.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Break
Solid ID List
2
Option: Plane
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1
Break Plane List
Plane 1
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Y
After:
Z
Y
6
X
X
6
5
5
2
2
10
7
1
2
10
1
1
13
14
7
8
9
9
3
3
13
12
3
8
12
1
1 11
11
4
4

Breaking Solids with the Surface Option
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The Break method with the Surface option breaks an existing solid into two smaller solids at a
surface break location. The surface break location must completely pass through the solid.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Break
Solid ID List
4
Option: Surface
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Break Surface List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Used to express the surface type to create the curve from.
Options are Point, Parametric, Plane and Surface.
If ON, after Break completes, the solids specified in Solid List
will be deleted from the database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify in Solid List, the solids to break either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Solid 11 3. The Solid select menu that appears can
be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
solids.
Specify in Break Surface List, the surface break location, either
by cursor selecting the location or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. The Surface select menu will appear.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Break Method with the Surface Option Example
Breaks Solid 1 into two solids at Surface 1. Notice that Delete Original Solids is pressed and Solid
1 is deleted.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Break
Solid ID List
2
Option: Surface
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1
Break Surface List
Surface 1
-Apply-
Before:
10
After:
Y
Y
Z
Z
9
7
X
7
X
15
3
3
6
2
6
1
2
4
2
14
3
8
4
16
8
1
1
11
5
13
5
12

Solid Break Method with the Surface Option Between Two Surfaces Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
This example is the same as the previous example, except that the solid is defined by Surfaces 2
and 3 by using the Solid select menu icon listed below.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Break
Solid ID List
2
Option: Surface
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Construct 2SurfaceSolid(Eva
Break Surface List
Surface 1
-Apply-
Solid Select Menu Icon
Before:
10
After:
Y
9
Y
7
Z X
Z
7
X
15
3
3
2
4
6
3
6
1
2
14
2
3
8
4
16
8
1
1
13
5
11
5
12

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Blending Solids
The Blend method creates a set of parametric tri-cubic solids from an existing set of two or more
solids, such that the first derivative continuity is maintained across the surface boundaries
between adjacent solids. The existing solids can have any parametrization, but they must share
common faces.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Blend
Solid ID List
1
Blend Parameters
Weighting Factors
1.0
Delete Original Solids
Solid List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Enter n-1 Weighting Factors of solid i relative to solid i+1. By
default, a value of 1.0 will cause all solids to receive equal
weight. A large value (~1E+6) will cause the first solid of the
solid pair to dominate the slope. A small value (~1E-6) will
cause the second solid of the pair to dominate the slope.
If ON, after Blend completes, the solids specified in Solid
List will be deleted from the database.
Specify the solids to blend either by cursor selecting them or
by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 10 11
13. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define
how you want to cursor select the appropriate solids.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Topology (p. 10)
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

Solid Blend Method Example
Creates Solids 4, 5 and 6 by blending Solids 1, 2 and 3. Notice that Delete Original Solids is
pressed and Solids 1, 2 and 3 are deleted.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Blend
Solid ID List
5
Blend Parameters
Weighting Factors
1.0
Delete Original Solids
Solid List
Solid 1 2 3
-Apply-
Before:
Z
6
6
10
Y
After:
10
Y
Z
X
2
1
11
2
37
1
2
12
4
11
2
37
1
X
12
8
15
2
2
39
1
8
16
15
2
5
39
1
16
13
2
3141 3
13
2
3141 6
18
18
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
17
17

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Blend Method Example
This example is similar to the previous example, except that weighting factors, 1e6 and 1e-6, are
used so that Solids 1 and 3 dominate the slope.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Blend
Solid ID List
5
Blend Parameters
Weighting Factors
1e6 1e-6
Delete Original Solids
Solid List
Solid 1 2 3
-Apply-
Before:
Z
6
10
Y
After:
6
10
Z
Y
X
2
1
11
2
37
1
2
12
4
11
2
37
1
X
12
8
15
2
2
39
1
8
16
15
5
2
39
1
16
13
2
3141 3
13
2
3141 6
18
18
17
17

Disassembling B-rep Solids
The Disassemble method operates on one or more boundary represented (B-rep) solids and
breaks them into the original surfaces that composed each B-rep solid. A B-rep solid can be
created by the Geometry Application’s Create/Solid/B-rep form.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Disassemble
Convert to Simply Trimmed
Delete Original Solids
Solid List
-Apply-
By Default, Convert to Simply Trimmed toggle is on which
will convert all surfaces to Simply Trimmed (green) surfaces
that satisfy the requirements for a “green” surface. These
surfaces can be used for creating TriParametric Solids (blue).
By default, Delete Original Solids toggle is ON which means
that the original B-rep Solid will be deleted after it has been
disassembled.
Specify the solid(s) to disassemble from either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Solid 1. The Solid select menu that appears can be
used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
solid.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus
(p. 41) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Disassemble a B-rep Solid Example
Disassemble solid 1 into its constituent surfaces and convert all possible surfaces into Simply
Trimmed surfaces (green). If “Conver to Simply Trimmed” toggle was OFF, the resulting
surfaces would maintain their original type; (magenta).
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Disassemble
Convert to Simply Trimmed
Delete Original Solids
Solid List
Solid 1
-Apply-
Z
Z
Before:
Y
Y
X
After:
X
45
46
26
47
18
21
20
16
31
33
40
19
2 8
3 1
35
1
44
27
28 15
17
29
14
5
6 4
7
30 13
41 4243
11
32
39 34
37
48
10
25
9
22
12
36
38
2324

Refitting Solids
Refitting Solids with the To TriCubicNet Option
This form is used to refit a solid to alternative mathematical solid representations. The form
provides three Options; To TriCubicNet, To TriParametric, and To Parasolid.
Action:
Geometry
Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Refit
Solid ID List
1
Option: To TriCubicNet
Refit Parameters
u Density
1
v Density
1
w Density
1
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
The To TriCubicNet option creates uniformly
parametrized Piecewise Cubic solids from existing solids.
The u,v, and w Grid Density is input as the Refit
Parameters. The solid must satisfy the requirement of
having 5 or 6 faces and no interior regions on any face.
Enter values to define the u,v,w Grid Density of the new
solids. Enter the value from the keyboard.
If ON, after Refit completes, the solids specified in Solid
List will be deleted from the database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the solids to refit. Either cursor select the solids or
enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 1 5. The
Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate solids.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Solids (p. 24)
Building B-rep Solids (p. 40)
Creating a Boundary Representation
(B-rep) Solid (p. 338)
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Refitting Solids with the To TriParametric Option
This form is used to refit a solid to alternative mathematical solid representations. The form
provides three Options; To TriCubicNet, To TriParametric, and To Parasolid.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Refit
Solid ID List
1
Option: To TriParametric
Refit Parameters
Refit Tolerance
0.005
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
The To TriParametric option creates uniformly
parametrized tri-cubic solids from existing solids. The solid
must satisfy the requirement of having 5 or 6 faces and no
interior regions on any face.
Enter a value specifying the tolerance to use for refitting
the solids.
If ON, after Refit completes, the solids specified in Solid
List will be deleted from the database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the solids to refit. Either cursor select the solids or
enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 1 5. The
Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate solids.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Solids (p. 24)
Building B-rep Solids (p. 40)
Creating a Boundary Representation
(B-rep) Solid (p. 338)

Refitting Solids with the To Parasolid Option
This form is used to refit a solid to alternative mathematical solid representations. The form
provides three Options; To TriCubicNet, To TriParametric, and To Parasolid.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Refit
Solid ID List
1
Option: To Parasolid
Refit Parameters
Refit Tolerance
0.005
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
The To Parasolid option creates Parasolid B-rep solids
from existing non Parasolid solids.
Enter a value specifying the tolerance to use for refitting
the solids.
If ON, after Refit completes, the solids specified in Solid
List will be deleted from the database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the solids to refit. Either cursor select the solids or
enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 1 5. The
Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate solids.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Solids (p. 24)
Building B-rep Solids (p. 40)
Creating a Boundary Representation
(B-rep) Solid (p. 338)
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Reversing Solids
The Reverse method redefines the connectivity of an existing set of solids by exchanging the
positive ξ1 and ξ2 directions of the solids. Then, to maintain a positive parametric frame,
MSC.Patran translates the parametric origin up the original ξ3 axis and then reverses the ξ3 direction. You can plot the ξ1 , ξ2 and ξ3 directions for the solids by pressing the Show
Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Attributes form found under the menu
Display/Geometry.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Reverse
Auto Execute
Solid List
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means
you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the solids to reverse either by cursor selecting them
or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 11
20.
☞ More Help:
Topology (p. 10)
Connectivity (p. 15)
Display Attributes (p. 243) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2:
Basic Functions

Solid Reverse Method Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
Reverses the parametric directions for Solid 1 (only the top half of Solid 1 is shown). Notice that
the parametric origin is relocated.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Reverse
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1
-Apply-
Before:
10
After:
10
1
Z
X Y
2
3
Z
X Y
11
11
1
1
3
6
6
2
1
7
7

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Boolean Operation Add
This form is used to perform a Solid boolean of “Add”.
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Boolean
Solid ID List
1
Solid List
Geometry
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Specify the boolean operation type:
1. Add
2. Subtract
3. Intersect
Specify the solids to perform an Add Boolean operation on
either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate solids.
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON) This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing
mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically
after the boolean operation is completed. If the Geometry
Preference toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off,
then this button will be enabled and the label will be, “Update
Solid Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the boolean
operation is complete will update the existing mesh on the
solid.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran

Solid Boolean Operation Add Example
Add Solids 2 and 3 to Solid 1.
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Boolean
Solid ID List
8
Solid List
Solid 1:3
Geometry
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON)
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Boolean Operation Subtract
This form is used to perform a Solid boolean operation of “Subtract”.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Boolean
Solid ID List
1
Auto Execute
Target Solid
Subtracting Solid List
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON)
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Specify the boolean operation type:
1. Add
2. Subtract
3. Intersect
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the target solid to perform a Subtract Boolean operation
on either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Solid 10. The Solid select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate solid.
Specify the solid(s) to subtract from the Target Solid either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can
be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
solids.
This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing
mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically
after the boolean operation is completed. If the Geometry
Preference toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off,
then this button will be enabled and the label will be, “Update
Solid Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the boolean
operation is complete will update the existing mesh on the
solid.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran

Solid Boolean Operation Subtract Example
Subtract solids 2 and 3 from solid 1.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Boolean
Solid ID List
1
Auto Execute
Target Solid
Solid 1
Subtracting Solid List
Solid 2 3
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON)
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Z
Z
Y
Y
X
X
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Boolean Operation Intersect
This form is used to perform a Solid boolean operation of “Intersect”.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Boolean
Solid ID List
1
Auto Execute
Target Solid
Intersecting Solid List
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON)
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Specify the boolean operation type:
1. Add
2. Subtract
3. Intersect
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the target solid to perform a Intersect Boolean operation
on either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Solid 10. The Solid select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate solid.
Specify the solid(s) to intersect with the Target Solid either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can
be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
solids.
This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing
mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically
after the boolean operation is completed. If the Geometry
Preference toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off,
then this button will be enabled and the label will be, “Update
Solid Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the boolean
operation is complete will update the existing mesh on the
solid.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran

Solid Boolean Operation Intersect Example
Intersect solids 2 and 3 with solid
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Boolean
Solid ID List
1
Auto Execute
Target Solid
solid 1
Intersecting Solid List
solid 2 3
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON)
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Solid Edge Blends
Creating Constant Radius Edge Blends from Solid Edges
This form is used to create a constant radius edge blend on an edge(s) of a solid.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Edge Blend
Blend Parameters
Constant Radius
0.25
Edges to Blend
Auto Execute
Solid Edge List
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON)
-Apply-
Specify which of the two Edge Blend types to create:
1. Constant Radius
2. Chamfer
Specify the constant radius for the blend.
Specify which of the three options to create an edge blend
from:
1. Edge - Create blend on the input edge(s).
2. Face - Create blend on all edges of the input face(s).
3. Solid - Create blend on all edges of the input solid(s).
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the edge(s) of a solid which are to blended, either by
entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Solid 10.1.1),
or cursor define the edge locations using the Edge Select
Menu.
This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing
mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically
after the edge blend is created. If the Geometry Preference
toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this
button will be enabled and the label will be, “Update Solid
Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the edge blend operation
is complete will update the existing mesh on the solid.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran

Creating Constant Radius Edge Blend from Solid Edges Example
Create an Edge Blend of Radius 0.25 on Solid 7 edges Solid 7.1.5 7.3.6 7.11.1 and 7.3.1.
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Edge Blend
Blend Parameters
Constant Radius
0.25
Geometry
Edges to Blend
Auto Execute
Solid Edge List
Solid 7.1.5 7.3.6 7.11.1 7.
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON)
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Y
X
After:
Z
Y
X
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Chamfer Edge Blend from Solid Edges
This form is used to create a constant angle chamfer on an edge(s) of a solid.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Edge Blend
Chamfer Parameters
Offset
0.25
Angle
45.0
Edges to Blend
Auto Execute
Solid Edge List
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON)
-Apply-
Specify which of the two Edge Blend types to create:
1. Constant Radius
2. Chamfer
Specify the chamfer size on the face to offset.
Specify the chamfer angle.
Specify which of the three options to create a chamfer from:
1. Edge - Create chamfer on the input edge(s).
2. Face - Create chamfer on all edges of the input face(s).
3. Solid - Create chamfer on all edges of the input solid(s).
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means
you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the edge(s) of a solid which are to be chamfered, either
by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Solid
10.1.1), or cursor define the edge locations using the Edge
Select Menu.
This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing
mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically
after the edge blend is created. If the Geometry Preference
toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this
button will be enabled and the label will be, “Update Solid
Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the edge blend operation
is complete will update the existing mesh on the solid.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran

Creating Chamfer Edge Blend from Solid Edges Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
Create Chamfers with offset of 0.02 and angle of 45 degrees on Solid 1 edges Solid 1.1.3 1.1.12
1.1.6 1.1.4 1.2.4 and 1.4.4.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Edge Blend
Chamfer Parameters
Offset
0.02
Angle
45.0
Edges to Blend
Auto Execute
Solid Edge List
Solid 1.1.3 1.1.12 1.1.6 1.
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON)
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Y
X
After:
Z
Y
X
Z
1
Z
1
Y
X
Y
X

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Imprinting Solid on Solid
This form is used to imprint solid bodies on solid bodies.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means
you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the solids to imprint onto a solid body either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Solid 1. The Solid select menu that appears can be
used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
solids.
Specify the solids to be imprinted onto either by cursor selecting
them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid
10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solids.
This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing
mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically
after the imprinting is completed. If the Geometry Preference
toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this
button will be enabled and the label will be, “Update Solid
Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the imprinting operation
is complete will update the existing mesh on the solid.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran

Imprint Solid on Solid Example
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
Imprint Solid Cylinders 2 and 3 onto the faces of Solid Block 1. The Cylinders have been deleted
to show the results of the imprint.
Before:
Z
Y
After:
Z
Y
X
X
3
1
1
2

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Shell Operation
This form is used to create a void in a solid by shelling the selected faces.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Shell
Thickness
0.25
Auto Execute
Solid Face List
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON)
-Apply-
Specify the wall thickness of the resulting solid to be edited.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means
you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the face(s) of a solid to be shelled, either by entering
the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Solid 10.1), or cursor
define the face locations using the Face Select Menu.
This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing
mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically
after the shelling is completed. If the Geometry Preference
toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this
button will be enabled and the label will be, “Update Solid
Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the shelling operation is
complete will update the existing mesh on the solid.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
MSC.Patran

Solid Shell Operation Example
Shell solids 1t4 with a wall thickness=0.25 using faces solid 4.1 4.2 3.6 2.1 2.4 2.5 1.4 and 1.2.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Shell
Thickness
0.25
Auto Execute
Solid Face List
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON)
-Apply-
Before:
After:
X
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
X
Y
Y
Z
Z

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
6.6 Editing Features
Suppressing a Feature
The Edit,Feature,Suppress method displays the list of CAD features associated with the
geometry that can be suppressed from the geometric model.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Feature
Method: Suppress
Filter *
Feature List
Geometric Entity List
-Apply-
The “Filter” button and databox widgets are used to filter the
features to be displayed in the Feature List. Enter the filter
string in the databox and then either select the “Filter”
button or press the return key.
Select which features to suppress from the Feature List.
Selecting a feature name will highlight the feature in the
MSC.Patran viewport for easy identification.
When a geometric entity is selected in the MSC.Patran
viewport, the geometric id will be echoed in the
selectdatabox and the feature name that the geometric entity
is associated with will be highlighted in the Feature List.

Unsuppressing a Feature
The Edit,Feature,Unsuppress method displays the list of CAD features associated with the
geometry that can be unsuppressed from the geometric model.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Feature
Method: Unsuppress
Filter *
Feature List
-Apply-
Select which features to unsuppress from the Feature List.
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The “Filter” button and databox widgets are used to filter the
features to be displayed in the Feature List. Enter the filter
string in the databox and then either select the “Filter” button
or press the return key.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Editing Feature Parameters
The Edit,Feature,Parameters method displays the list of CAD features associated with the
geometry whose parameters can be edited to be used to regenerate the geometric model based
on the new parameter values.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Feature
Method: Parameters
Filter *
Feature List
[Unassociated Parameters]
The “Filter” button and databox widgets are used to filter
the features to be displayed in the Feature List. Enter the
filter string in the databox and then either select the “Filter”
button or press the return key.
Select which features to edit from the Feature List. Selecting
a feature name will highlight the feature in the MSC.Patran
viewport for easy identification. Multiple features can be
selected. A parameters subform will be displayed for each
feature selected, showing the features parameters and their
values. The Unassociated Parameters entry is displayed
whenever there are parameters available for editing that are
not directly associated to a feature.
Geometric Entity List When a geometric entity is selected in the MSC.Patran
viewport, the geometric id will be echoed in the
selectdatabox and the feature name that the geometric
entity is associated with will be highlighted in the
Feature List.
-Apply-

Feature Parameter Definition
CHAPTER 6
Edit Actions
The Feature Parameter Definition form allows the parameters of a CAD feature to be displayed
and modified for regeneration of a CAD model.
Input Parameter Definition
Feature
BLOCK(0)
BLOCK(0)
CYLINDER>
When the “Definition” column of a parameter is selected,
the definition is copied to the “Input Parameter
Definition” databox for editing. Once the definition is
modified, press return to update the “Definition” column
with the new parameter definition. When all the desired
parameter definitions are modified, press the OK button
to save the changes.
Feature Parameter Definition
Description Name Definition Value
Size X p8 0.55 0.55000001
SIZE Y p10 p8 * 0.75 0.41249999
Diameter p9 0.25 0.25
OK Reset Cancel
Feature: Identifies which feature a parameter belongs to.
Description: Describes the feature type.
Name: The name of the parameter in the CAD system. This is the left-hand side of the
expression for the feature.
Definition: This is the right-hand side of the expression for the feature which is editable.
Value: The value of the parameter.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
7
Show Actions
■ Overview of the Geometry Show Action Methods
■ The Show Action Information Form
■ Showing Point Locations
■ Showing Point Distance
■ Showing the Nodes on a Point
■ Showing Curve Attributes
■ Showing Curve Arc
■ Showing Curve Angle
■ Showing Curve Length Range
■ Showing the Nodes on a Curve
■ Showing Surface Attributes
■ Showing Surface Area Range
■ Showing the Nodes on a Surface
■ Showing Surface Normals
■ Showing Solid Attributes
■ Showing Coordinate Frame Attributes
■ Showing Plane Attributes
■ Showing Vector Attributes

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
7.1 Overview of the Geometry Show Action Methods
Figure 7-1
Object Method Description
Point ❏ Location Shows the coordinate value locations for a list of specified
points or vertices. You may enter a reference coordinate
system ID to express the coordinate values within.
❏ Distance Shows the distance and the x, y and z offsets between one or
more pairs of points and/or vertices.
❏ Node Lists the IDs of the nodes that are located on a specified
point or vertex that is within the Global Model Tolerance
value.
Curve ❏ Attributes Lists the geometric type, length, and starting and ending
points for a list of specified curves or edges.
❏ Arc Shows the total number of Arcs in the model, total number
of Arcs in the current group and the geometric modeling
tolerance.
❏ Angle Shows the angle between two curves for a list of specified
curves or edges.
❏ Length Range Shows the Start and End Point, Length, and Type for a list of
specified curves or edges which are in the Minimum and
Maximum Curve Length Range specified.
❏ Node Lists the IDs of the nodes that are located on a specified
curve or edge that is within the Global Model Tolerance
value.
Surface ❏ Attributes Lists the number of vertices and edges associated with each
specified surface or solid face, as well as the area and
geometric type.
❏ Area Range Shows the Vertices, Edges, Area, and Type for a list of
specified surfaces or faces which are in the Minimum and
Maximum Surface Area Range specified.
❏ Node Lists the IDs of the nodes that are located on a specified
surface or solid face that is within the Global Model
Tolerance value.
Solid ❏ Attributes Lists the number of vertices, surfaces (or faces) associated
with each specified solid, as well as the solid’s volume and
geometric type.
Coord ❏ Attributes Shows the ID, the xyz coordinate location of the origin and
the type for each specified coordinate frame.
Plane ❏ Attributes
Vector ❏ Attributes

The Show Action Information Form
CHAPTER 7
Show Actions
When a Show action is executed, MSC.Patran will display a spreadsheet form at the bottom of
the screen. This form displays information on the geometric entities that were specified on the
Show action form.
Cells on the form that have a dot (.), means there is additional information associated with that cell.
If a cell with the dot is pressed with the cursor, associated information is displayed in the textbox
at the bottom of the form.
The dot means there is additional information associated with the particular cell. The
additional information can be displayed in the textbox below by pressing the cell with the
cursor.
Show Information
Entity ID Title 1 Title 2 Title 2 Reference CID
7 2. 1. 0. (Global) Recta
8 2. 2. 0.
(Global) Recta
9 3. 2. 0.
(Global) Recta
This is a scrollable textbox. Information associated with a cell
is displayed here. You can copy and paste information from
this textbox into any MSC.Patran form. Copy the information
by pressing the left mouse button and dragging the cursor
over the information. Place the cursor over a databox in
another MSC.Patran form and press the middle mouse button
to paste the information.
Reset Cancel
Reset erases the information stored in
the form. Cancel will make the form
disappear.
☞ More Help:
Show Point Distance Information
Spreadsheet (p. 572)
Show Point/Curve Distance Information
Spreadsheet (p. 574)
Show Point/Surface Distance Information
Spreadsheet (p. 576)
Show Curve Angle Information Spreadsheet
(p. 585)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
7.2 Showing Points
Showing Point Locations
Setting Object to Point and Info to Location will show for a list of specified point locations, the
coordinate value locations that are expressed within a specified reference coordinate frame. Point
locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Action:
Object:
Info:
Geometry
Point Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model:
0
Total in 'default_group' :
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Point List
Show
Point
Location
Apply
The Point Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) point ID used in the database.
The total number of points in the database.
The total number of points in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
You can specify an alternate coordinate frame ID for
the Reference Coordinate Frame. MSC.Patran will
display the point or vertex location within the specified
Reference Coordinate Frame. Default is the global
rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the points, vertices or nodes either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Examples: Point 5 10, Node 10, Surface 5.5.3. The Point
select menu that appears can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the point locations.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)

Showing Point Distance
Showing Point Distance with the Point Option
CHAPTER 7
Show Actions
Show the distance between two points. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the distance,
direction cosine and point location data for each point pair.
The distance may be shown between a point-point pairs, point-curve pairs, or point-surface
pairs. Use the Option menu to specify the type of opposing entity, Showing Point Distance
with the Point Option, Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option, Showing Point
Action:
Object:
Info:
Geometry
Show
Point
Distance
Point Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model:
0
Total in 'default_group' :
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Option: Point
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
First Point List
Point 2
Second Point List
Curve 7.1
Apply
Upon execution, the Show Point Distance
Information Spreadsheet (p. 572) form is launched.
The Point Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) point ID used in the database.
The total number of points in the database.
The total number of points in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
Specify a reference coordinate frame in which the
distance information is to be shown (example Coord 3).
Defaults to the Default Coordinate Frame preference.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the points either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard (examples: Point 5 10 Surface 4.2.1); or by
cursor selecting them by using the Point select menu.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Page 1 of 3
Show Point Distance Information Spreadsheet
Show Point Distance Information
From Point ID To Point ID Distance Delta Reference CID
Page 2 of 3
Reset
Cancel
.2 Curve 7.1 7.34937645 (Global) Rectan>
Page 1 of 3 Distance
Show Point Distance Information
Reset
From Point ID To Point ID Direction Cosines Reference CID
Page 3 of 3
Show Point Distance Information
From Point ID To Point ID From Location To Location Reference CID
Cell Callback Actions
From Point ID Highlights the point using the secondary highlight color; displays general
information about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.
To Point ID Highlights the point using the secondary highlight color; displays general
information about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.
Reference CID Highlights both points using the secondary highlight color; displays
general information about the reference frame (type, origin, etc.) in the
textbox.
Other columns Highlights both points using the secondary highlight color; displays the
long (un-abbreviated) form of the data in the textbox.
Cancel
Reset
Cancel
Reset
Cancel

Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option
CHAPTER 7
Show Actions
Show the distance between point/curve pairs. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the
distance, direction cosine and minimum point location data for each point/curve pair.
The distance may be shown between a point-point pairs, point-curve pairs, or point-surface pairs.
Use the Option menu to specify the type of opposing entity, Showing Point Distance with the Point
Option, Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option, Showing Point Distance with the
Action:
Object:
Info:
Geometry
Show
Point
Distance
Point Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model:
0
Total in 'default_group' :
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Option: Curve
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
First Point List
Point 2
Second Point List
Curve 7
Apply
Upon execution, the Show Point/Curve
Distance Information Spreadsheet (p. 574)
form is launched.
The Point Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) point ID used in the database.
The total number of points in the database.
The total number of points in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
Specify a reference coordinate frame in which the distance
information is to be shown (example Coord 3). Defaults to the
Default Coordinate Frame preference.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the points either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard (examples: Point 5 10 Surface 4.2.1); or by
cursor selecting them by using the Point select menu.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Page 1 of 4
Show Point/Curve Distance Information Spreadsheet
Show Point/Curve Distance Information
To Point ID From Curve ID Minimum Distance Delta Reference CID
Page 2 of 4
Reset
Cancel
.2 7 7.34937645 (Global) Rectan>
Page 1 of 4 Distance
Show Point/Curve Distance Information
Reset
To Point ID From Curve ID Direction Cosines Angle to Curve Reference CID
Page 3 of 4
Show Point /Curve Distance Information
Cancel
To Point ID From Curve ID Point Location Min Point Location Reference CID
Page 4 of 4
Show Point/Curve Distance Information
To Point ID From Curve ID Parametric Loc Reference CID
Cell Callback Actions
From Point ID Highlights the point using the secondary highlight color; displays general
information about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.
From Curve ID Highlights the curve using the secondary highlight color; displays
general information about the curve (type, etc.) in the textbox.
Reference CID Highlights both entities using the secondary highlight color; displays
general information about the reference frame (type, origin, etc.) in the
textbox.
Other Columns Highlights both entities using the secondary highlight color; displays the
long (un-abbreviated) form of the data in the textbox; and displays a
marker on the curve where the minimum distance occurs.
Reset
Cancel
Reset
Cancel
Reset
Cancel

Showing Point Distance with the Surface Option
CHAPTER 7
Show Actions
Show the distance between point/surface pairs. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the
distance, direction cosine and minimum point location data for each point/surface pair.
The distance may be shown between a point-point pairs, point-curve pairs, or point-surface pairs. Use the
Option menu to specify the type of opposing entity, Showing Point Distance with the Point Option,
Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option, Showing Point Distance with the Surface Option,
Action:
Object:
Info:
Geometry
Show
Point
Distance
Point Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model:
0
Total in 'default_group' :
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Option: Surface
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
First Point List
Point 2
Second Point List
Surface 7
Apply
Upon execution, the Show Point/Surface Distance
Information Spreadsheet (p. 576) form is launched.
The Point Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) point ID used in the database.
The total number of points in the database.
The total number of points in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
Specify a reference coordinate frame in which the distance
information is to be shown (example Coord 3). Defaults to the
Default Coordinate Frame preference.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the points either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard (examples: Point 5 10 Surface 4.2.1); or by cursor
selecting them by using the Point select menu.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Page 1 of 4
Show Point/Surface Distance Information Spreadsheet
Show Point/Surface Distance Information
To Point ID From Surface ID Minimum Distance Delta Reference CID
Page 2 of 4
Reset
Cancel
.2 7 7.34937645 (Global) Rectan>
Page 1 of 4 Distance
Show Point/Surface Distance Information
Reset
To Point ID From Surface ID Direction Cosines Angle to Normal Reference CID
Page 3 of 4
Show Point /Surface Distance Information
Cancel
To Point ID From Surface ID Point Location Min Point Location Reference CID
Page 4 of 4
Show Point/Surface Distance Information
To Point ID From Surface ID Parametric Loc Reference CID
Cell Callback Actions
Reset
Cancel
Reset
Cancel
Reset
Cancel
To Point ID Highlights the point using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information
about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.
From Surface ID Highlights the surface using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information
about the surface (type, etc.) in the textbox.
Reference CID Highlights both entities in the secondary Highlight color; displays general information
about the reference frame (type, origin, etc.) in the textbox.
Other columns Highlights both entities in the secondary highlight color; displays the long (unabbreviated)
form of the data in the textbox; and displays a marker on the surface
where the minimum distance occurs.

Showing Point Distance with the Plane Option
CHAPTER 7
Show Actions
Show the distance between point/Plane pairs. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the
distance, direction cosine and minimum point location data for each point/plane pair.
The distance may be shown between a point-point pairs, point-curve pairs, or point-surface pairs.
Use the Option menu to specify the type of opposing entity, Showing Point Distance with the
Point Option, Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option, Showing Point Distance with
Action:
Object:
Info:
Geometry
Show
Point
Distance
Point Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model:
0
Total in 'default_group' :
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Option: Plane
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Point List
Point 2
Plane List
Plane 7
Apply
Upon execution, the Show Point/Surface Distance
Information Spreadsheet (p. 576) form is launched.
The Point Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) point ID used in the database.
The total number of points in the database.
The total number of points in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
Specify a reference coordinate frame in which the distance
information is to be shown (example Coord 3). Defaults to the
Default Coordinate Frame preference.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the points either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard (examples: Point 5 10 Plane 4.2.1); or by cursor
selecting them by using the Point select menu.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Page 1 of 4
Show Point/Curve Vector Information Spreadsheet
Show Point/Vector Distance Information
To Point ID From Vector ID Minimum Distance Delta Reference CID
Page 2 of 4
Reset
Cancel
.2 7 7.34937645 (Global) Rectan>
Page 1 of 4 Distance
Show Point/Vector Distance Information
Reset
To Point ID From Vector ID Direction Cosines Angle to Normal Reference CID
Page 3 of 4
Show Point /Vector Distance Information
Cancel
To Point ID From Vector ID Point Location Min Point Location Reference CID
Page 4 of 4
Show Point/Vector Distance Information
To Point ID From Vector ID Parametric Loc Reference CID
Cell Callback Actions
Reset
Cancel
Reset
Cancel
Reset
Cancel
To Point ID Highlights the point using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information
about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.
From Vector ID Highlights the plane using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information
about the vector (type, etc.) in the textbox.
Reference CID Highlights both entities in the secondary Highlight color; displays general information
about the reference frame (type, origin, etc.) in the textbox.
Other columns Highlights both entities in the secondary highlight color; displays the long
(unabbreviated) form of the data in the textbox; and displays a marker on the surface
where the minimum distance occurs.

Showing Point Distance with the Vector Option
CHAPTER 7
Show Actions
Show the distance between point/vector pairs. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the
distance, direction cosine and minimum point location data for each point/vector pair.
The distance may be shown between a point-point pairs, point-curve pairs, point-surface pairs,
point-plane pairs or point-vector pairs. Use the Option menu to specify the type of opposing entity,
Showing Point Distance with the Point Option, Showing Point Distance with the Curve
Action:
Object:
Info:
Geometry
Show
Point
Distance
Point Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model:
0
Total in 'default_group' :
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Option: Vector
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Point List
Point 2
Vector List
Vector 7
Apply
Upon execution, the Show Point/Surface Distance
Information Spreadsheet (p. 576) form is launched.
The Point Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) point ID used in the database.
The total number of points in the database.
The total number of points in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
Specify a reference coordinate frame in which the distance
information is to be shown (example Coord 3). Defaults to the
Default Coordinate Frame preference.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the points either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard (examples: Point 5 10 Vector 4.2.1); or by cursor
selecting them by using the Point select menu.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Page 1 of 4
Show Point/Curve Distance Information Spreadsheet
Show Point/Plane Distance Information
To Point ID From Plane ID Minimum Distance Delta Reference CID
Page 2 of 4
Reset
Cancel
.2 7 7.34937645 (Global) Rectan>
Page 1 of 4 Distance
Show Point/Plane Distance Information
Reset
To Point ID From Plane ID Direction Cosines Angle to Normal Reference CID
Page 3 of 4
Show Point /Plane Distance Information
Cancel
To Point ID From Plane ID Point Location Min Point Location Reference CID
Page 4 of 4
Show Point/Plane Distance Information
To Point ID From Plane ID Parametric Loc Reference CID
Cell Callback Actions
To Point ID Highlights the point using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information
about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.
From Plane ID Highlights the plane using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information
about the plane (type, etc.) in the textbox.
Reference CID Highlights both entities in the secondary Highlight color; displays general information
about the reference frame (type, origin, etc.) in the textbox.
Other columns Highlights both entities in the secondary highlight color; displays the long
(unabbreviated) form of the data in the textbox; and displays a marker on the surface
where the minimum distance occurs.
Reset
Cancel
Reset
Cancel
Reset
Cancel

Showing the Nodes on a Point
CHAPTER 7
Show Actions
Setting Object to Point and Info to Node will show the IDs of the nodes that lie on at specified
point locations that are within the Global Model Tolerance. Point locations can be points, vertices,
nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Action:
Object:
Info:
Geometry
Point Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model:
0
Total in 'default_group' :
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Point List
Show
Point
Node
Apply
The Point Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) point ID used in the database.
The total number of points in the database.
The total number of points in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
Not used for this form.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the points, vertices or nodes either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Examples: Point 5 10, Node 10, Solid 4.5.3.1. The Point
select menu that appears can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the point locations.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Topology (p. 10)
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
7.3 Showing Curves
Showing Curve Attributes
Setting Object to Curve and Info to Attributes will show the geometric type, length, and the
starting and ending points for a list of specified curves or edges.
Action:
Object:
Info:
Geometry
Curve Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model:
0
Total in 'default_group' :
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Auto Execute
Curve List
Show
Curve
Attributes
Apply
The Curve Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) curve ID used in the database.
The total number of curves in the database.
The total number of curves in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the curves or edges either by entering the IDs from
the keyboard (examples: Curve 5 10 Surface 4.2); or by
cursor selecting them by using the Curve select menu.
☞ More Help:
Topology (p. 10)
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran (p. 19)
The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)

Showing Curve Arc
CHAPTER 7
Show Actions
Setting Object to Curve and Info to Arc will show the total number of Arcs in the model, total
number of Arcs in the current group and the geometric modeling tolerance.
Action:
Object:
Info:
Geometry
Arc Summary
Total in Model:
0
Total in 'default_group' :
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Auto Execute
Curve List
Show
Curve
Arc
Apply
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the curves or edges either by entering the IDs
from the keyboard (examples: Curve 5 10 Surface 4.2);
or by cursor selecting them by using the Curve select
menu.
☞ More Help:
Topology (p. 10)
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran (p. 19)
The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Showing Curve Angle
Setting Object to Curve and Info to Angle will show the angle between pairs of curves. The point
on each curve where the angle is calculated from is shown via a primary graphics marker in the
graphics marker color. This is useful if the two curves do not intersect.
Action:
Object:
Info:
Geometry
Curve Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model:
0
Total in 'default_group' :
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Auto Execute
First Curve List
Surface 1.2
Second Curve List
Curve 7
Show
Curve
Angle
Apply
Upon execution, the Show Curve Angle Information
Spreadsheet (p. 585) form is launched.
The Curve Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) curve ID used in the database.
The total number of curves in the database.
The total number of curves in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the curves or edges either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard (examples: Curve 5 10 Surface 4.2); or by cursor
selecting them by using the Curve select menu.
☞ More Help:
Topology (p. 10)
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran (p. 19)

Page 1 of 2
Show Curve Angle Information Spreadsheet
Show Curve Angle Information
First Curve ID Second Curve ID Angle Minimum Distance Minimum Location 1
Page 2 of 2
Reset
Cancel
Surface 1.2 7 90.0 0. [1.23.3.45.2.13] >
Page 1 of 2 Angle
Show Curve Angle Information
Reset
Cancel
First Curve ID SecondCurve ID Minimum Loc 2 Minimum Param1 Minimum Param2
Cell Callback Actions
Reset
Cancel
First Curve ID Highlights the curve using the secondary highlight color; displays general information
about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.
Second Curve ID Highlights the curve using the secondary highlight color; displays general information
about the curve (type, etc.) in the textbox.
Other Columns Highlights both curves in the secondary highlight color; displays the long (unabbreviated)
form of the data in the textbox; and displays a marker on each curve at the
respective locations where the minimum distance occurs.
CHAPTER 7
Show Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Showing Curve Length Range
Setting Object to Curve and Info to Length Range will show the Start and End Point, Length, and
Type for a list of specified curves or edges which are in the Minimum and Maximum Curve
Length Range specified.
Action:
Geometry
Show
Object: Curve
Info: Length Range
Curve Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model:
0
Total in 'default_group' :
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Curve Length Range
Minimum Curve Length
0.005
Maximum Curve Length
5.0
Auto Execute
Curve List
Apply
The Curve Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) curve ID used in the database.
The total number of curves in the database.
The total number of curves in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
Specify the Minimum and Maximum Curve Length to define
the Curve Length Range for filtering curves.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the curves or edges either by entering the IDs from
the keyboard (examples: Curve 5 10 Surface 4.2); or by
cursor selecting them by using the Curve select menu.
☞ More Help:
Topology (p. 10)
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran (p. 19)
The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)

Showing the Nodes on a Curve
Setting the Object to Curve and Info to Node will show the IDs of the nodes that lie on the
specified curves or edges that are within the Global Model Tolerance.
Action:
Object:
Info:
Geometry
Curve Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model:
0
Total in 'default_group' :
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Auto Execute
Curve List
Show
Curve
Node
Apply
The Curve Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) curve ID used in the database.
The total number of curves in the database.
The total number of curves in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
☞ More Help:
Topology (p. 10)
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran (p. 19)
The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)
CHAPTER 7
Show Actions
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the curves or edges either by entering the IDs from
the keyboard (examples: Curve 5 10 Surface 4.2); or by
cursor selecting them by using the Curve select menu.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
7.4 Showing Surfaces
Showing Surface Attributes
Setting the Object to Surface and Info to Attributes will list the number of vertices and edges
associated with each specified surface or solid face, as well as the its area and geometry type.
Action:
Object:
Info:
Geometry
Surface Summary
Last ID:
1
Total in Model:
7
Total in 'default_group' :
1
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Auto Execute
Surface List
Solid 1.6
Show
Surface
Attributes
Draw Normal Vectors
Reset Graphics
Apply
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON
which means you do not need to press the Apply
button to execute the form.
The Surface Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) surface ID used in the database.
The total number of surfaces in the database.
The total number of surfaces in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
Specify the surfaces or solid faces, either by entering the IDs
from the keyboard (examples: Surface 5 10 Solid 4.2); or by
cursor selecting them by using the Surface select menu.
If pressed, MSC.Patran draws the positive surface normal
vector for each specified surface or solid face. The positive
normal direction is based on the surface’s or solid face’s
parametrization.
If pressed, MSC.Patran erases the normal vectors and
reverts the model back to the last display type, such as
wireframe, after a MSC.Patran form was executed. (This
includes the Display menu forms.)
☞ More Help:
Parameterization (p. 5)
Topology (p. 10)
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran (p. 19)
The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)

Showing Surface Area Range
CHAPTER 7
Show Actions
Setting Object to Surface and Info to Area Range will show the Vertices, Edges, Area, and Type for
a list of specified surfaces or faces which are in the Minimum and Maximum Surface Area Range
specified.
Action:
Object:
Info:
Geometry
Surface Summary
Last ID:
1
Total in Model:
1
Total in 'default_group' :
1
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Surface Area Range
Minimum Surface Area
0.005
Maximum Surface Area
5.0
Auto Execute
Surface List
Show
Surface
Area Range
Apply
The Surface Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) surface ID used in the database.
The total number of surfaces in the database.
The total number of surfaces in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
Specify the Minimum and Maximum Surface Area to define
the Surface Area Range for filtering surfaces.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the surfaces or faces either by entering the IDs from
the keyboard (examples: Surface 5 10 Solid 4.2); or by
cursor selecting them by using the Surface select menu.
☞ More Help:
Parameterization (p. 5)
Topology (p. 10)
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran (p. 19)
The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Showing the Nodes on a Surface
Setting the Object to Surface and Info to Node will show the IDs of the nodes that lie on the
specified surfaces or solid faces that are within the Global Model Tolerance.
Action:
Object:
Info:
Geometry
Surface Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model:
0
Total in 'default_group' :
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1 2
Show
Surface
Node
Apply
The Surface Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) surface ID used in the database.
The total number of surfaces in the database.
The total number of surfaces in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the surfaces or solid faces, either by entering the IDs
from the keyboard (examples: Surface 5 10 Solid 4.2); or by
cursor selecting them by using the Surface select menu.
☞ More Help:
Topology (p. 10)
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran (p. 19)
The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)

Showing Surface Normals
CHAPTER 7
Show Actions
Setting the Object to Surface and Info to Normals enables the user to display surface normals of
varying densities on the surface.
Action:
Object:
Info:
Geometry
Show
Surface
Normal
Surface Summary
Last ID:
1
Total in Model:
1
Total in 'default_group' :
1
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Normal Vector Display
◆
Surface Interior
◆ Surface Boundary
Normal Vector Density
1
21
1
The Surface Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) surface ID used in the database.
The total number of surfaces in the database.
The total number of surfaces in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
Defines whether the normals are to be displayed on the interior
and boundary of a surface or only on the boundary edges of
the surface.
Allows the user to input the density of normals on a surface.
For the density n the normals are displayed as an n by n set of
normals unless the surface is trimmed. If the surface is
trimmed, the normals which do not lie on the surface are
displayed on the nearest edge.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Normal Vector Display
◆
Surface Interior
◆
Surface Boundary
Normal Vector Density
1
21
Set Normal Vector Length
Normal Vector Length
1.0
Auto Execute
Surface List
Reset Graphics
Apply
1
Allows the user to define the length of the surface normal
vectors. By default, the normal vectors are proportional to
the surface area. The vector length is set in the Normal
Vector Length databox.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
If pressed, MSC.Patran erases the normal vectors and
reverts the model back to the last display type, such as
wireframe, after a MSC.Patran form was executed. (This
includes the Display menu forms.)
Specify the surfaces or solid faces, either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard (examples: Surface 5 10 Solid 4.2); or by cursor selecting them by
using the Surface select menu.
☞ More Help:
Topology (p. 10)
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran (p. 19)
The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)

7.5 Showing Solids
Showing Solid Attributes
CHAPTER 7
Show Actions
Setting the Object to Solid and Info to Attributes will list the number of vertices and faces associated
with each specified solid, as well as the volume and the geometry type.
Action:
Object:
Info:
Geometry
Solid Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model:
0
Total in 'default_group' :
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Auto Execute
Solid List
Show
Solid
Attributes
Apply
The Solid Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) solid ID used in the database.
The total number of solids in the database.
The total number of solids in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the solids either by cursor selecting them or by
entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 4 11.
☞ More Help:
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Solids (p. 24)
The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
7.6 Showing Coordinate Frames
Showing Coordinate Frame Attributes
Setting the Object to Coord and Info to Attributes will list the ID, the coordinate value location of
the coordinate frame’s origin and the coordinate frame type for each specified coordinate frame.
Action:
Object:
Info:
Geometry
Coordinate Frame Summary
Last ID:
0
Show
Coord
Attributes
Total in Model:
1
Total in 'default_group' :
1
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Auto Execute
Coordinate Frame List
Apply
The Coordinate Frame Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) coordinate frame ID used in the database.
The total number of coordinate frames in the database.
The total number of coordinate frames in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the coordinate frames either by cursor selecting them
or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Coord 10
13.
☞ More Help:
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)

7.7 Showing Planes
Showing Plane Attributes
CHAPTER 7
Show Actions
Setting Object to Plane and Info to Attributes will show for a list of specified plane, displaying
the plane origins and the plane normal that are expressed within a specified reference coordinate
frame.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Plane
Info: Attributes
Vector Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model:
0
Total in 'default_group' :
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Plane List
Apply
Choices are Attributes, Angle and Distance.
The Plane Summary table shows:
The Last (or highest) plane 1D used in the database.
The total number of planes in the database.
The total number of planes in the current group.
The current value of the global model tolerance.
See Showing Point Locations.
Specify the planes either by cursor or by entering the ID’s
from the keyboard. Example: Plane 1 4:7 9.
☞ More Help:
Showing Point Locations (p. 570)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Showing Plane Angle
Setting Object to Plane and Info to Angle will show the angle between pairs of planes.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Plane
Info: Angle
Plane Summary
Last ID:
2
Total in Model:
2
Total in 'default_group' :
2
Global Model Tolerance
0.0049999999
Auto Execute
First Plane List
Second Plane List
Apply
The Plane Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) plane ID used in the database.
The total number of planes in the database.
The total number of planes in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the planes either by entering the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Plane 1); or by cursor selecting them by using the
Plane select menu.
Upon execution, the Show Plane Angle/Distance Information
Spreadsheet (pg ) form is launched.

Show Plane Angle/Distance Information Spreadsheet
Show Plane Show Angle/Distance Curve Angle Information
First Plane ID Second Plane ID Angle
1 2 * 90.0 0.
Cell Callback Actions
Minimum Distance
Reset
Cancel
First Plane ID Highlights the plane using the secondary highlight color.
Second Plane ID Highlights the plane using the secondary highlight color.
Other Columns Highlights both planes in the secondary highlight color; displays
the long (unabbreviated) form of the data in the textbox.
CHAPTER 7
Show Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Showing Plane Distance
Setting Object to Plane and Info to Distance will show the distance between pairs of planes.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Plane
Info: Distance
Plane Summary
Last ID:
2
Total in Model:
2
Total in 'default_group' :
2
Global Model Tolerance
0.0049999999
Auto Execute
First Plane List
Second Plane List
Apply
The Plane Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) plane ID used in the database.
The total number of planes in the database.
The total number of planes in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the planes either by entering the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Plane 1); or by cursor selecting them by using the
Plane select menu.
Upon execution, the Show Plane Angle/Distance Information
Spreadsheet (pg ) form is launched.

7.8 Showing Vectors
Showing Vector Attributes
CHAPTER 7
Show Actions
Setting Object to Vector and Info to Attributes will show a list for a specified vector displaying
the vector origins and the vector directions that are expressed within a specified reference
coordinate frame.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Vector
Info: Attributes
Vector Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model:
0
Total in 'default_group' :
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Vector List
Apply
The Vector Summary table shows:
The Last (or highest) plane 1D used in the database.
The total number of planes in the database.
The total number of planes in the current group.
The current value of the global model tolerance.
See Showing Point Locations.
Specify the vectors either by cursor or by entering the ID’s from
the keyboard. Example: Vector 1 4:7.
☞ More Help:
Showing Point Locations (p. 570)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
8
Transform Actions
■ Overview of the Transform Methods
■ Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors
■ Transforming Coordinate Frames

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
8.1 Overview of the Transform Methods
Object Method Description
Point ❏ Translate Create points by successively offsetting them through a translation vector
from an existing set of points, nodes or vertices.
❏ Rotate Create points by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined axis from
an existing set of points, nodes or vertices.
❏ Scale Create points by scaling an existing set of points, nodes or vertices.
❏ Mirror Create points by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of points, nodes or
vertices.
❏ MCoord Creates points by translating and rotating them from an existing set of
points, nodes, or vertices by referencing coordinate frames.
❏ Pivot Creates points from existing points, nodes or vertices by using a planar
rotation defined by three point locations.
❏ Position Creates points by translating and rotating existing points, nodes or vertices,
using a transformation defined by three original and three destination point
locations.
❏ Vsum Creates points by performing a vector sum of the coordinate locations of
two sets of existing points, nodes or vertices.
❏ MScale Creates points by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating and/or warping
an existing set of points, nodes or vertices.
Curve ❏ Translate Create curves by successively offsetting them through a translation vector
from an existing set of curves or edges.
❏ Rotate Create curves by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined axis from
an existing set of curves or edges.
❏ Scale Create curves by scaling an existing set of curves or edges.
❏ Mirror Create curves by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of curves or edges.
❏ MCoord Creates curves by translating and rotating them from an existing set of
curves or edges by referencing coordinate frames.
❏ Pivot Creates curves from existing curves or edges by using a planar rotation
defined by three point locations.
❏ Position Creates curves by translating and rotating existing curves or edges, using a
transformation defined by three original and three destination point
locations.
❏ Vsum Creates curves by performing a vector sum of the coordinate locations of
two sets of existing curves or edges.
❏ MScale Creates curves by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating and/or warping
an existing set of curves or edges.

Object Method Description
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Surface ❏ Translate Create surfaces by successively offsetting them through a translation vector
from an existing set of surfaces or solid faces.
❏ Rotate Create surfaces by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined axis
from an existing set of surfaces or solid faces.
❏ Scale Create a set of curves by scaling an existing set of curves or edges.
❏ Mirror Create surfaces by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of surfaces or
solid faces.
❏ MCoord Creates surfaces by translating and rotating them from an existing set of
surfaces or solid faces by referencing coordinate frames.
❏ Pivot Creates surfaces from existing surfaces or solid faces by using a planar
rotation defined by three point locations.
❏ Position Creates surfaces by translating and rotating existing surfaces or solid faces,
using a transformation defined by three original and three destination point
locations.
❏ Vsum Creates surfaces by performing a vector sum of the coordinate locations of
two sets of existing surfaces or solid faces.
❏ MScale Creates surfaces by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating and/or
warping an existing set of surfaces or solid faces.
Solid ❏ Translate Create solids by successively offsetting them through a translation vector
from an existing set of solids.
❏ Rotate Create solids by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined axis from
an existing set of solids.
❏ Scale Create solids by scaling an existing set of solids.
❏ Mirror Create solids by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of solids.
❏ MCoord Creates solids by translating and rotating them from an existing set of solids
by referencing coordinate frames.
❏ Pivot Creates solids from existing solids by using a planar rotation defined by
three point locations.
❏ Position Creates solids by translating and rotating existing solids, using a
transformation defined by three original and three destination point
locations.
❏ Vsum Creates solids by performing a vector sum of the coordinate locations of two
sets of existing solids.
❏ MScale Creates solids by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating and/or warping
an existing set of solids.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Object Method Description
Coord ❏ Translate Create rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frames by
successively offsetting them through a translation vector from an existing
set of coordinate frames.
❏ Rotate Create rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frames by
performing a rigid body rotation about a defined axis from an existing set of
coordinate frames.
Plane ❏ Translate Create solids by successively offsetting them through a translation vector
from an existing set of solids.
❏ Rotate Create solids by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined axis from
an existing set of solids.
❏ Mirror Create solids by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of solids.
❏ MCoord Creates solids by translating and rotating them from an existing set of solids
by referencing coordinate frames.
❏ Pivot Creates solids from existing solids by using a planar rotation defined by
three point locations.
❏ Position Creates solids by translating and rotating existing solids, using a
transformation defined by three original and three destination point
locations.
Vector ❏ Translate Create solids by successively offsetting them through a translation vector
from an existing set of solids.
❏ Rotate Create solids by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined axis from
an existing set of solids.
❏ Mirror Create solids by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of solids.
❏ MCoord Creates solids by translating and rotating them from an existing set of solids
by referencing coordinate frames.
❏ Pivot Creates solids from existing solids by using a planar rotation defined by
three point locations.
❏ Position Creates solids by translating and rotating existing solids, using a
transformation defined by three original and three destination point
locations.
❏ Scale Create solids by scaling an existing set of solids.

CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
8.2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and
Vectors
Translating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors
The Translate method creates a set of points, curves, surfaces, solids planes or vectors which are
successively offset from each other by a defined Translation Vector . Points can be
translated from points, vertices or nodes. Curves can be translated from curves or edges. Surfaces
can be translated from surfaces or solid faces. Solids are translated from solids.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object:
Method: Translate
Point ID List
1
Type of Transformation
◆
◆
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Set to either: Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or
Vector.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point, curve,
surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in
the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Cartesian in Refer. CF means the Translation Vector
coordinates will be applied along the Refer. Coordinate Frame’s
principal axes.
Curvilinear in Refer. CF means the Translation Vector
coordinates will be interpreted as R,θ,Z if the Refer. Coordinate
Frame is cylindrical, and R,θ,Φ if the Refer. Coordinate Frame is
spherical.
Used by the Translation Vector to express the direction and distance of the translation. Specify a
cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame if you chose the Curvilinear in Refer. CF toggle.
Example: Coord 5. Default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Translation Vector
Translation Parameters
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Points
Auto Execute
Point List
[0 0 0]
-Apply-
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
The distance and direction to translate the new set of
points, curves, surfaces or solids from the existing set. The
coordinate values will be defined within the Refer.
Coordinate Frame. Example: . If Cartesian in
Refer. CF is selected, then the Vector select menu will
appear to allow you alternate ways to cursor define the
vector.
The number of times to translate the existing set of entities
and create new points, curves, surfaces or solids.
If ON, after Translate completes, the existing points, curves,
surfaces or solids specified in List will be deleted
from the MSC.Patran database.
Specify the existing entities either by cursor selecting them
or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5
10 Surface 5.5.1 Solid 12. The select menu that appears at
the bottom can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate points, vertices, curves, edges, faces
or solids.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
Translating or Scaling Geometry Using
Curvilinear Coordinate Frames (p. 66)

Translating Points Radially
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates Points 8 through 14 by translating Points 1 through 7, three units radially outward
within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is
pressed.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Point
Method:
Point ID List
8
Type of Transformation
◆
◆
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 100
Translation Vector
Translation Parameters
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Points
Auto Execute
Point List
Point 1:7
Translate
-Apply-
Before:
6
5
T
Y
7 Z100R
Z X
After:
13
12
4
11
5 4 3
6 T
Y
2
14 7 Z100R
1
8
Z X
3
10
2
9
1

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Translating Points
This example is the same as the previous example, except Cartesian in Refer. CF is pressed
instead of Curvilinear in Refer. CF.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Point
Method:
◆
Point ID List
8
◆
Type of Transformation
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 100
Translation Vector
Translation Parameters
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Points
Auto Execute
Point List
Point 1:7
Translate
-Apply-
Before:
6
5
T
Y
7 Z100R
Z X
After:
4
5
4
3
12
11
10
6 T 2 13
9
7 Z100R
1 14
8
Y
Z
X
3
2
1

Translating Curves
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates Curves 2 through 6 by translating Curves 1 three times - two units in the X direction and
one unit in the Y direction within the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method:
◆
Curve ID List
2
◆
Type of Transformation
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Translation Vector
Translation Parameters
Repeat Count
5
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1
Translate
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Y
After:
1
X
Y1
Z
3
X
2
2
5
4
1
3
7
6
4
1
9
8
5
11
10
6
2
12

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Translating Curves Radially
Translates Curve 1 three times and radially one unit outward within the cylindrical coordinate
frame, Coord 100. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is pressed.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method:
Curve ID List
2
◆
◆
Type of Transformation
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 100
Translation Vector
Translation Parameters
Repeat Count
3
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
curve 1
Translate
-Apply-
Before:
2
8
Z
After:
Y
X
Y
6
Z X
4
2
1
T
Z100R
4
3
2
1
T
Z100R
1
3
5
1
7

Translating Edges
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates Curve 2 by translating the outside edge of Surface 1, two units radially outward within
cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method:
Curve ID List
2
◆
◆
Type of Transformation
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 100
Translation Vector
Translation Parameters
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
surface 1.3
Translate
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Z
Z
Y
Y
6
4
4
3
3
X
T
X
Z100
R
1
1 1 2
1
1 2
2
5

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Translating Surfaces
Creates Surfaces 2 and 3 by translating Surface 1 two times - one unit in the X direction and two
units in the Y direction within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 10.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Surface
Method:
◆
Surface ID List
2
◆
Type of Transformation
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 10
Translation Vector
Translation Parameters
Repeat Count
2
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
surface 1
Translate
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Y
After:
Z
Y
X
X
Y
2
Z10
X
3
10
9
6
5
2
1
11
12
7
1
2
Y X1
10 Z
8
3
1
4
3
4

Translating Surfaces Radially
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates Surfaces 2 through 4 by translating Surface 1 three times and one unit radially outward
within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Surface
Method:
Surface ID List
2
◆
◆
Type of Transformation
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 100
Translation Vector
Translation Parameters
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
surface 1
Translate
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Z
Y
Z
Y
9
7
5
4
4
3
X
3
T
X
Z100
R
1
1
2
2
3
1
1 2
4
6
8
10

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Translating Solid Faces
Creates Surfaces 1 through 4 by translating the top faces of Solids 1 through 4, 0.5 units radially
outward within the spherical coordinate frame, Coord 20. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is
pressed.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Surface
Method:
Surface ID List
1
◆
◆
Type of Transformation
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 20
Translation Vector
Translation Parameters
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Translate
solid 4.6 3.6 2.6 1.6
-Apply-
Before:
5
10
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
5
X
2
3
41
3 4
T
120
R
Z
6
8
3 4
2
3
1
2 11 1
3 4 4
P
120 R 2
T
6
7
9
2

Translating Solids
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Translates Solids 1 through 4, 1.5 units in the X direction and 1.5 units in the Y direction, within
the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Solids is pressed
and Solids 1:4 are deleted.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Solid
Method:
◆
Solid ID List
5
◆
Type of Transformation
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Translation Vector
Translation Parameters
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
solid 1:4
Translate
-Apply-
Before:
5
Y
Z
After:
X
Y
P
X
Z
20 R
T
11
2
3
41
3 4
T
120
R
Z
6
9
6 105
7 8
12
7 8
2

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Translating Solids
Creates Solid 2 by translating Solid 1, 90 degrees within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord
1. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is pressed.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Solid
Method:
Solid ID List
2
◆
◆
Type of Transformation
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 1
Translation Vector
Translation Parameters
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1
Translate
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Y
7
8
X
2
11
10
Y
12
Z X
6
5
T
Z1
R
9
7
8
4
6
5
T
1
Z1
R
1 2
3
4
1
1 2
3

Translating Planes
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Translates Plane 1 2 units in the Z direction with the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord
0. Note that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept.
Plane ID List
1
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Plane
Method:
◆
◆
Type of Transformation
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Translation Vector
Translation Parameters
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Plane
Auto Execute
Plane List
plane 1
Translate
-Apply-
Before:
After:
X
X
Y
Y
Z
Z

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Translating Vectors
Translates Vector 1 2 units in the X direction with the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord
0. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept.
Vector ID List
1
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Vector
Method:
◆
◆
Type of Transformation
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Translation Vector
Translation Parameters
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Vector
Auto Execute
Vector List
Vector 1
Translate
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z X Z
Y
Z X Z

Rotating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates a set of points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes or vectors by a rigid body rotation about
a defined axis from an existing set of entities. Points can be rotated from other points, vertices or
nodes. Curves can be rotated from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be rotated from other
surfaces or solid faces. Solids are rotated from other solids.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object:
Method:
ID List
5
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle
90.0
Offset Angle
0.0
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original
Auto Execute
Point List
Rotate
-Apply-
Set to either Point, Curve Surface, Solid, Plane or
Vector.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point, curve,
surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in
the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Used by the defined rotation Axis to express the axis’
beginning and ending coordinates values. Example: Coord
5. Default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0.
This is the rotation axis that the new points, curves,
surfaces or solids will be rotated about from the existing set
of entities. If coordinate values are entered, they will be
defined within the Refer. Coordinate Frame. Example: {[0
0 0][0 0 1]} . An Axis select menu appears to allow you
alternate methods to cursor define the rotation axis. When
an axis is specified using a non-default coordinate frame,
e.g., Coord 5.2, the Reference Coordinate Frame should
be set to the default Coordinate Frame, Coord 0.
Axis
Point 3
θ r
Point 2
θ r
θ o
Repeat Count = 2
Point 1

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
The Rotation Angle (θ r ) defines how many
degrees to rotate the existing set of entities
about the axis.
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle
90.0
Offset Angle
0.0
If Repeat ON, after Count Rotate completes, the
points, 1 curves, surfaces or solids
specified in List will be
deleted from the database.
Delete Original
Auto Execute
Point List
[0 0 0]
-Apply-
If ON, after Rotate completes, the points,
curves, surfaces or solids specified in
List will be deleted from the MSC.Patran
database.
Axis
Point 3
θ r
Point 2
The Offset Angle (θ o ) defines how many degrees to
offset from the starting point of rotation.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the entities to rotate, either by cursor selecting
them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example:
Point 5 10 Curve 10.1 Surface 5.5 Solid 10. The select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want
to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, curves,
edges, faces or solids.
θ r
θ o
Repeat Count = 2
Point 1
The Repeat Count defines the number of times to rotate
the existing set of entities within θ r to create new ones.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

Rotating Points and Nodes
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates Points 7 through 14 from Point 1 and Node 10 by rotating them six times, 30 degrees
about the global rectangular coordinate frame’s Z axis, Coord 0.3, with an offset angle of 60
degrees. (Coord 0.3 can be cursor defined by using the Axis select menu icon listed below and
cursor selecting Coord 0.)
Axis Select Menu Icon
3
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Point
Method:
Point ID List
7
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis
coord 0.3
Rotation Parameters
30.0
Offset Angle
60.0
Repeat Count
6
Delete Original Points
Auto Execute
Point List
Rotate
Point 1 Node 10
-Apply-
Before:
Z
14
Z
Y
After:
Y
12
X
X
10
13
11
9
8
7
1 10
1 10

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Rotating Curves
Creates Curves 2 through 7 by rotating Curve 1 six times, 30 degrees about the axis defined by
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}. Notice that the axis definition is equivalent to Coord 0.3 from the previous
example.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method:
Curve ID List
2
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle
30.0
Offset Angle
0.0
Repeat Count
6
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
curve 1
Rotate
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
12
X
6
Y
14 7
Z X
10
13
5
11
9
8
4
7
1 1 2
5
3
3
6
2
4
1 1 2

Rotating From An Edge
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curves 1 through 6 are rotated
from an edge of Surface 1.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle
30.0
Offset Angle
0.0
Repeat Count
6
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Rotate
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
surface 1.4
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
14
X
5
16 6
Y
Z X
12
15
4
13
11
10
3
9
1 2
1
3 4
7
2
5
8
1
6
1 2
1
3 4

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Rotating Surfaces
Creates Surfaces 4 through 18 by rotating from Surfaces 1, 2 and 3, five times, 30 degrees each
about the axis defined by Points 4 and 1. The axis is defined by cursor selecting the points using
the Axis select menu icon listed below.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Surface
Method:
Surface ID List
4
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle
30.0
Offset Angle
0.0
Repeat Count
5
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Rotate
Construct 2PointAxis(Ev
surface 1 2 3
-Apply-
Axis Select Menu Icon
Before:
4
After:
16
14
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
5
3
2 3
6
1
1 2
10
12 128
9
9
15 11
7
5
6
11 8
14 5
13 10 7 3
1718 2 13 43
4
6
16 1
15
1 2
X

Rotating From Solid Faces
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
This example is the same as the previous example, except that Surfaces 1 through 16 are rotated
from the outside faces of Solid 1.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Surface
Method:
Surface ID List
1
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle
30.0
Offset Angle
0.0
Repeat Count
5
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Rotate
Construct 2PointAxis(Eva
surface 1.5 1.2 1.6
-Apply-
Axis Select Menu Icon
Before:
4
After:
Y
Z
X
5
61
3
1 2
14
16
8
10
12 11
138
9 6
12
14
153
15
Y 1
9
11
5
7
2
4
10
13
3
1 4
2
Z X
1
7
5
6

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Rotating Solids
Creates Solids 2 through 4 by rotating from Solid 1, three times, 90 degrees each about the global
Z axis, Coord 0.3. Coord 0.3 is cursor defined by using the Axis select menu icon listed below.
Axis Select Menu Icon
3
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Solid
Method:
Solid ID List
2
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0.3
Axis
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle
90.0
Offset Angle
0.0
Repeat Count
3
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Solid List
solid 1
Rotate
Construct 2PointAxis(Eval
-Apply-
Before:
4
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
12
11
X
14
X
13
7
3
9
5
61
8
2
4
16
3
1 2
10
1
4
18
1
15
17
5
6
3
2

Rotating Planes
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Rotates Plane 1 90 degrees around the Y Axis in the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord
0. Notice that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept.
Plane ID List
1
Axis Select Menu Icon
3
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Plane
Method:
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis
Coord
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle
90.0
Offset Angle
0.0
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Planes
Auto Execute
Plane List
plane 1
Rotate
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
X
Z
Y X
Z

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Rotating Vectors
Rotates Vector 1 90 degrees around the Z Axis in the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord
0. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept.
Vector ID List
1
Axis Select Menu Icon
3
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Vector
Method:
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis
Coord
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle
90.0
Offset Angle
0.0
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Vector
Auto Execute
Vector List
vector 1
Rotate
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
X
Y
Z X

Scaling Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids and Vectors
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
The Scale method creates a set of points, curves, surfaces, solids or vectors by scaling an existing
set of entities. Points can be scaled from other points, vertices or nodes. Curves can be scaled from
other curves or edges. Surfaces can be scaled from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are scaled
from other solids.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object:
Method:
ID List
5
Type of Transformation
◆
◆
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Scale
Used by the Origin of Scaling and Scale Factor to express
the scale origin’s coordinate values and the scale factors.
Example: Coord 5. Specify a cylindrical or spherical
coordinate frame if you chose the Curvilinear in Refer. CF
toggle.
Set to either Point, Curve Surface, Solid or Vector.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point, curve,
surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in
the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Cartesian in Refer. CF means the Scale Factor values
will be applied along the Refer. Coordinate Frame’s
principal axes.
Curvilinear in Refer. CF means the Scale Factor values will
be interpreted as R,θ,Z if the Refer. Coordinate Frame is
cylindrical, and R,θ,Φ if the Refer. Coordinate Frame is
spherical.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Enter the coordinate location of the origin to scale the existing entities from. The coordinate values
are expressed in the Refer. Coordinate Frame. Example: [10 0 0] . If Cartesian in Refer. CF is
selected, the Point select menu appears to allow you alternate ways to cursor define the point
location.
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
Scale Parameters
Scale Factor
1.0 1.0 1.0
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original
Auto Execute
Point List
[0 0 0]
-Apply-
The Scale Factor are three scaling factor values to be
applied along the three principal axes of the Refer.
Coordinate Frame. A scale factor of one means no scaling
will take place along the specific coordinate frame axis.
Example: 10 20 1. The Repeat Count defines the number of
times to scale the existing set of entities to create the new
ones.
If ON, after Scale completes, the points, curves, surfaces or
solids specified in List will be deleted from the
MSC.Patran database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the entities to scale, either by cursor selecting them
or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5
10 Surface 5.5 Solid 11. The select menu that appears can
be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate points, nodes, vertices, curves, edges, faces or
solids.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
Translating or Scaling Geometry Using
Curvilinear Coordinate Frames (p. 66)

Scaling Points and Nodes
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates Points 6 through 9 by scaling them from Points 1, 2, 5 and Node 100 two times along the
global X and Y axes, with Point 4 as the origin of scaling.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Point
Method:
Point ID List
6
Type of Transformation
◆
◆
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Origin of Scaling
Point 4
Scale Parameters
Scale Factor
2 2 1
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Points
Auto Execute
Point List
Scale
Point 5 1 2 Node 100
-Apply-
Before:
7
Y
Z
Y
Z
After:
X
X
1
1
6
5
4
5
4
2
8
2
100
100
9

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Scaling Points Radially
Creates Points 25 through 44 by scaling them from the points on the outside edge of Surfaces 1
through 4, two times radially within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100. Notice that
Curvilinear in Refer. CF and Delete Original Points are pressed.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Point
Method:
Point ID List
25
Type of Transformation
◆
◆
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 100
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
Scale Parameters
Scale Factor
2 1 1
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Points
Auto Execute
Point List
Scale
Point 2 4 6 8 9:24
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
6
Y
Z
16
17
X
40
39
38
15
18
X
41
37
14
2
5
13
4
3
12
1
3 7 4
19
42
6
36
T
100 Z R
20 8 21
43 44
2
5
4
3
1
100 1 2
3 7 4
35
8
34
28
33
11
10
9
1 2
27
32
22
26
29
23
25
24
30
31

Scaling Curves
Creates Curve 2 by scaling them from Curve 1, 1.5 times along the X axis of rectangular
coordinate frame, Coord 20. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curve 1 is
deleted.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method:
Curve ID List
2
Type of Transformation
◆
◆
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 20
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
Scale Parameters
Scale Factor
1.5 1 1
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Point List
curve 1
Scale
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
1
2
X
X
Y
Y
X
20 Z
X
20 Z
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
1
2

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Scaling From An Edge
Creates Curves 1 through 4 by scaling them from the outside edges of Surfaces 1 through 4, 1.5
times radially outward within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 20. Notice that
Curvilinear in Refer. CF is pressed.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Type of Transformation
◆
◆
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 20
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
Scale Parameters
Scale Factor
1.5 1 1
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Scale
surface 3.3 4.3 1.3 2.3
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
6
12
X
X
3
4
6
2
5
4
3
T
20 Z R
1
3 7 4
2
5
8
11
4
3
T
1
20 Z R1
2
3 7 4
8
9
1 2
2
1
10

Scaling Surfaces
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates Surfaces 5 through 8 by scaling Surfaces 1 through 4 1.5 times along the radial axis of
cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 20. Notice that Cartesian in Refer. CF and Delete Original
Surfaces are pressed.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Surface
Method:
Surface ID List
5
Type of Transformation
◆
◆
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 20
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
Scale Parameters
Scale Factor
1.5 1 1
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Scale
surface 1:4
-Apply-
Before:
After:
12
Y
Z
Y
Z
6
X
X
6
11
2
5
4
3
T
20 Z R
1
3 7 4
4
8
3T
20 Z R
7 7 8
8
1 2
5
9 10

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Scaling Surfaces Radially
This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is selected
instead of Cartesian in Refer. CF.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Surface
Method:
Surface ID List
5
Type of Transformation
◆
◆
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 20
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
Scale Parameters
Scale Factor
1.5 1 1
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Scale
surface 1:4
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
14
6
X
X
6
2
5
4
3
T
20 Z R
1
3 7 4
13
8
11
10
T
20 Z R
1 2
5
9
7 15 8
16
12

Scaling From Solid Faces
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates Surface 1 by scaling it from the top face of Solid 1, 1.5 times in the X, Y and Z directions
of the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Surface
Method:
Surface ID List
1
Type of Transformation
◆
◆
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
Scale Parameters
Scale Factor
1.5 1.5 1.5
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
solid 1.3
Scale
-Apply-
Before:
1
6
Z
After:
12
Z
Y
Y
X
X
8
9
15
1
6
8 9
1
1
1
5
7
11
10
5
7
13
11
10
14

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Scaling From Solids
Creates Solids 5 through 8 by scaling them from Solids 1 through 4, two times in the X and Y
directions of the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Solid
Method:
Solid ID List
5
Type of Transformation
◆
◆
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
Scale Parameters
Scale Factor
2 2 1
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Curve List
solid 1:4
Scale
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
7
3
3
2
4
6
2
4
8
1
1
5

Scaling From Vectors
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Scales Vector 1 with a scale factor of 2 in the X direction in the global rectangular coordinate
frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept.
Vector ID List
1
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Vector
Method:
Type of Transformation
◆
◆
Cartesian in Refer. CF
Curvilinear in Refer. CF
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
Scale Parameters
Scale Factor
2 0 0
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Vector
Auto Execute
Vector List
vector 1
Scale
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z X
Y
Z X Z

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Mirroring Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors
Creates a set of points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes or vectors by a defined mirror plane of an
existing set of entities. Points can be mirrored from other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be
mirrored from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be mirrored from other surfaces or solid faces.
Solids are mirrored from other solids.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object:
Method:
ID List
1
Define Mirror Plane Normal
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Offset Parameters
Offset
0.0
Delete Original
Auto Execute
Point List
[0 0 0]
Mirror
-Apply-
Set to either Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane
or Vector.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point, curve,
surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405)
in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic
Functions.
These are the three global x,y,z coordinates that define
the location and direction of the mirror plane’s normal
vector. The new entities will be mirrored on the opposite
side of the mirror plane. An Axis select menu appears to
allow you alternate methods to cursor define the normal
vector.
The number of units to offset the Mirror Plane in the
direction defined by Define Mirror Normal, and from the
starting point of that normal vector. Default is zero.
If ON, after Mirror completes, the points, curves, surfaces or
solids specified in List will be deleted from the
MSC.Patran database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the entities to mirror, either by cursor selecting them or by
entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5 10 Surface
5.5 Solid 11. The select menu that appears can be used to define
how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices,
nodes, curves, edges, faces or solids.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

Mirroring Points and Nodes
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates Points 7 through 12 by mirroring them from Points 1 through 6 and Node 100, about the
mirror plane whose normal is the global X axis, Coord 0.1. Coord 0.1 can be cursor defined by
using the Axis select menu icon listed below.
Axis Select Menu Icon
1
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Point
Method:
Point ID List
7
Define Mirror Plane Normal
Coord 0.1
Offset Parameters
Offset
0.0
Delete Original Points
Auto Execute
Point List
Mirror
Point 1 2 3 5 6 Node 100
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
12
Y
Z
8
9
X
X
10
7
11
1
2
3
5
6 100
1
2
3
5
6 100

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Mirroring Curves
Creates Curves 3 and 4 by mirroring them from Curves 1 and 2 about the plane whose normal
is the global Y axis, Coord 0.2, and with an offset of Y=-1.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method:
Curve ID List
3
Define Mirror Plane Normal
Coord 0.2
Offset Parameters
Offset
-1
Reverse Curve
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1 2
Mirror
-Apply-
Before:
3
After:
Y
Z
2
2 1
Y
Z
X
X
3
6
2
2 1
4
5
3
1
4
1

Mirroring From Edges
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates Curves 1 through 8 by mirroring them from the inner and outer edges of Surfaces 5
through 8 about the plane whose normal is rectangular coordinate frame 1’s Y axis, Coord 1.2.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method:
Curve ID List
1
Define Mirror Plane Normal
Coord 1.2
Offset Parameters
Offset
0.0
Reverse Curve
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Mirror
Surface8.47.46.45.45.26.27.2
-Apply-
Before:
After:
7
7
9 10
Y
Z
8
11
X
7
7
9 10
Y
Z
8
11
X
8
6
12
8
6
12
8
Y
Y
5
6
Z1
5
6
1Z
1 13 2
18
X
X
5
5
4
3
3
4 5
4
15 16
3
14 6
7
17

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Mirroring Surfaces
This example is similar to the previous example, except that Surfaces 9 through 12 are mirrored
from Surfaces 5 through 8.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Surface
Method:
Surface ID List
1
Define Mirror Plane Normal
Coord 1.2
Offset Parameters
Offset
0.0
Reverse Surface
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Mirror
Surface 5:8
-Apply-
Before:
After:
7
7
9 10
Y
Z
8
11
X
7
7
9 10
Y
Z
8
11
X
8
8
6
12
6
12
12
Y
Y
5
6
1Z
5
6
18
17
Z1
X
X
5
4
11
5
16
4
14
3
9
10
15
3
13

Mirroring Solids
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates Solid 2 by mirroring Solid 1 about the plane whose normal is defined by {[0 0 0][1 0 0]}.
Notice that the mirror plane normal definition is the same as entering the global X axis, Coord
0.1.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Solid
Method:
Solid ID List
2
Define Mirror Plane Normal
{[0 0 0][1 0 0]}
Offset Parameters
Offset
0.0
Reverse Solid
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1
Mirror
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
2
X
1
1

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Mirroring Planes
Mirrors Plane 1 against the X-Y plane and with an offset of 1 unit in the Z direction in the global
rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and
Plane 1 is kept. Also, the Reverse Plane is not pressed and Plane 2 is not reversed.
Plane ID List
1
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Plane
Method:
Define Mirror Plane Normal
Coord 0
Offset Parameters
Offset
1
Reverse Plane
Delete Original Planes
Auto Execute
Plane List
Plane 1
Mirror
-Apply-
Before:
Y
After:
Z
X
Z
Y
Z X

Mirroring Vectors
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Mirrors Vector 1 against the X-Y plane and with an offset of 1 unit in the Z direction in the global
rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and
Vector 1 is kept. Also, the Reverse Vector is not pressed and Vector 2 is not reversed.
Vector ID List
1
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Vector
Method:
Define Mirror Plane Normal
Coord 0
Offset Parameters
Offset
1
Reverse Vector
Delete Original Vectors
Auto Execute
Vector List
Vector 1
Mirror
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Y
Z X Z
Z X Z

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Moving Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors by
Coordinate Frame Reference (MCoord Method)
Translates and rotates a new set of points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes or vectors from an
existing set of entities by referencing coordinate frames. The new entities’ local position with
respect to the To Coordinate Frame is the same as the local position of the original entities with
respect to the From Coordinate Frame. Points can be moved from other points, nodes or vertices.
Curves can be moved from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be moved from other surfaces or
solid faces. Solids are moved from other solids.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object:
Method:
ID List
1
From Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
To Coordinate Frame
Delete Original
Auto Execute
Point List
[0 0 0]
MCoord
-Apply-
Set to either Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or
Vector.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point, curve,
surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
From Coordinate Frame is the coordinate frame ID defining
the orientation of the existing entities. Default is the global
rectangular frame, Coord 0.
To Coordinate Frame is the coordinate frame ID defining the
orientation of the new entities. Example: Coord 5.
If ON, after MCoord completes, the points, curves, surfaces or
solids specified in List are deleted from the MSC.Patran
database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the entities to move, either by cursor selecting them or
by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5 10
Surface 5.5 Solid 11. The select menu that appears can be used
to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points,
nodes, vertices, curves, edges, faces or solids.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

Moving Points and Nodes
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates Points 7 through 12 from Points 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 and Node 100 by moving them from the
global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0, to the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Point
Method:
Point ID List
7
From Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
To Coordinate Frame
Coord 100
MCoord
Delete Original Points
Auto Execute
Point List
Point 1 3:6 Node 100
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
1 3 4 5 6 100
X
Y
Z X
1 3 4 5 6 100
Y
11
10
Y 9X
Z7
100
X
100 Z
12
8

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Moving Curves
Creates Curves 7 through 12 by moving Curves 1 through 6 from cylindrical coordinate frame,
Coord 200 to cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 300.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method:
Curve ID List
7
From Coordinate Frame
Coord 200
To Coordinate Frame
Coord 300
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1:6
MCoord
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
1
Y
T
a R
X
T
Z 200 Y
R
1
Z X
4
5
4
5
3
6
3
6
8
2
10
11
2
9
300 R
T
Z
12
300
7
R
T
Z

Moving From Edges
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
This example is similar to the previous example, except that Curves 1 through 8 are moved from
the outside edges of Surfaces 1 through 4, from Coord 200 to Coord 300.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method:
Curve ID List
1
From Coordinate Frame
Coord 200
To Coordinate Frame
Coord 300
MCoord
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Surface 1:4
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Z
After:
T
200
R
Y
X
T
Z Y200
R
Z X
7
1
1
2
4
2
6
8
4
3
3
5
2
300R T
Z
1
4
300R T
Z
3

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Moving Surfaces
Creates Surfaces 5 through 8 by moving from Surfaces 1 through 4 from cylindrical coordinate
frame, Coord 200, to cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 300.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Surface
Method:
Surface ID List
5
From Coordinate Frame
Coord 200
To Coordinate Frame
Coord 300
MCoord
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1:4
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Z
After:
T
200
R
Y
T
X
Z Y200
R
Z X
1
1
4
2
4
2
3
3
5
8
6
7
300R T
Z
300 R
T
Z

Moving Solids
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates Solids 5 through 8 by moving Solids 1 through 4 from the global coordinate frame,
Coord 0, to the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 1.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Solid
Method:
Solid ID List
5
From Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
To Coordinate Frame
Coord 1
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1:4
MCoord
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
2
3
2
3
1
4
8
1
4
X
7
5
1
Z
1
X
Y
Z
Y
6

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Moving Planes
Moves Plane 1 from the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0, to the rectangular coordinate
frame, Coord 1. Notice that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept.
Plane ID List
2
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Plane
Method:
From Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
To Coordinate Frame
Coord 1
Delete Original Planes
Auto Execute
Plane List
Plane 1
MCoord
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
Y
Y
Z1
X
Z1
X
X
Z
Y
Z
2
Y
X
2

Moving Vectors
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Moves Vector 1 from the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0, to the rectangular coordinate
frame, Coord 1. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept.
Vector ID List
1
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Vector
Method:
From Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
To Coordinate Frame
Coord 1
Delete Original Vectors
Auto Execute
Vector List
Vector 1
MCoord
-Apply-
Before:
X
After:
X
Z
Z
Y
Y
Y Z
Y Z
1
X
1
X

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Pivoting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors
Creates points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes and vectors by using a planar rotation defined by
a specified Pivot Point about which the entity will be rotated, and a Starting Point and Ending
Point for the rotation. Points can be pivoted from other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be
pivoted from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be pivoted from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids
are pivoted from other solids.
ID List
1
Pivot Point
[0 0 0]
Starting Point
[0 0 0]
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object:
Method:
Pivot
Ending Point
[0 0 0]
Set to either Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or Vector.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point, curve,
surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Pivot Point defines the location about which the specified entities
will be rotated. (Example: [10 0 0] ).
Starting Point defines the location that the rotation will begin from.
(Example: Surface 1.1.2).
Ending Point defines the location that the rotation will end at.
(Example: Point 12). A Point select menu will appear that allows
you to define how you want to cursor define these point locations.

Delete Original
Auto Execute
Point List
-Apply-
If ON, after Pivot completes, the points, curves, surfaces or
solids specified in List are deleted from the
MSC.Patran database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means
you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Specify the entities to pivot, either by cursor selecting them or by
entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5 10 Surface
5.5 Solid 11.
The select menu that appears can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate points, nodes, vertices,
curves, edges, faces or solids.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Pivoting Points
Creates Point 4 from Point 3 by pivoting at the global origin, [0 0 0], from Node 100 to Point 2.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Point ID List
4
Pivot Point
[0 0 0]
Starting Point
Node 100
Ending Point
Point 2
Geometry
Delete Original Points
Auto Execute
Point List
Point 3
Transform
Point
Pivot
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
X
X
2
2
100
100
4
3
3

Pivoting Curves
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates Curves 9 through 15 from Curves 1 through 6 by pivoting them at Point 12, from Point
14 to Point 13. (Curves 7 and 8 are for illustration and are not used for the pivot.)
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
9
Pivot Point
Point 12
Starting Point
Point 14
Ending Point
Point 13
Geometry
Delete Original Points
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1:6
Transform
Curve
Pivot
-Apply-
Before:
After:
6
Y
6
17
14
X
Z 8
6
Y
6
17
14
X
Z 8
3
3
1
1
2 3
4
5
2 3
4
5
7
7
4
4
5
5
2
2
12
12
8
18
16
10 22
20
8
11
12
14
13
13
17
15
13
921
19

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Pivoting From Edges
Creates Curves 9 through 16 by pivoting from the outside edges of Surfaces 1 through 4, at Point
12, from Point 14 to Point 13. Curves 7 and 8 are for illustration and are not used for the pivot.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
9
Pivot Point
Point 12
Starting Point
Point 14
Ending Point
Point 13
Geometry
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Transform
Curve
-Apply-
Pivot
Surface1.3 2.33.34.3 2.1 1.1 3.1
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
4
14
4
14
1
1
3
3
7
7
2
2
12
12
8
18
17
10
15
16
9
8
11
12
13
16
22
15 13
2114
19

Pivoting Surfaces
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
This example is similar to the previous example, except that Surfaces 1 through 4 are pivoted to
create Surfaces 5 through 8. Curves 7 and 8 are for illustration and are not used for the pivot.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Surface ID List
5
Pivot Point
Point 12
Starting Point
Point 14
Ending Point
Point 13
Geometry
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1:4
Transform
Surface
Pivot
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
4
14
4
14
X
1
1
3
3
7
7
2
2
12
12
8
22
20
18
17
8
8
5
7
6
13
21
19
13
15
16

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Pivoting Solids
Creates Solid 2 by pivoting from Solid 1 at Point 1, from Point 2 to Point 3. Curves 1 and 2 are for
illustration and are not used for the pivot.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Solid ID List
2
Pivot Point
Point 1
Starting Point
Point 2
Ending Point
Point 3
Geometry
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1
Transform
Solid
Pivot
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Z
Z
Y
Y
X
X
1
1
2
9
8
5
4 1 110
11
14
18
15
19
2
13
17
12
16
9
8
3
5
4 1 110
11
6
7
6
7
2
2

Pivoting Planes
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Pivots Plane 1 using the 3 pivoting point, Point 1 through 3. Notice that Delete Original Plane is
not pressed and Plane 1 is kept.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Plane ID List
1
Pivot Point
Point 1
Starting Point
Point 2
Ending Point
Point 3
Geometry
Delete Original Planes
Auto Execute
Plane List
Plane 1
Transform
Plane
Pivot
-Apply-
Before:
Y
After:
Z X
1
Y
Z
X 1
1
2 3
2 3

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Pivoting Vectors
Pivots Vector 1 using the 3 pivoting point, Point 1 through 3. Notice that Delete Original Vector
is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Vector ID List
1
Pivot Point
Point 1
Starting Point
Point 2
Ending Point
Point 3
Geometry
Delete Original Vector
Auto Execute
Vector List
Vector 1
Transform
Vector
Pivot
-Apply-
Before:
Y
After:
Y
Z X
1
Z
X 1
1
2 3
2 3

CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Positioning Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors
Creates points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes and vectors by translating and rotating an existing
set of entities using a transformation defined by three original point locations to three destination
point locations.
The original points and destination points need not match exactly; however, if either the original
point locations or the destination point locations lie in a straight line, the transformation cannot
be performed. Points can be repositioned from other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be
repositioned from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be repositioned from other surfaces or solid
faces. Solids are repositioned from other solids.
ID List
5
Action:
Object:
Method:
Geometry
Original Position Point 1
[0 0 0]
Original Position Point 2
[0 0 0]
Original Position Point 3
[0 0 0]
Destination Position Point 1
[0 0 0]
Destination Position Point 2
[0 0 0]
Destination Position Point 3
[0 0 0]
Transform
Position
Set to either Point, Curve, Surface, Solid,
Plane or Vector.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point, curve,
surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in
the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
The Original Position Points 1, 2 and 3 define the original
position and orientation. (Examples: [0 10 0], Surface 5.3.1,
Point 10.) A Point select menu appears which allows you to
define how you want to cursor select each point location.
The Destination Position Points 1,2 and 3 define the three point
locations onto which the original group of entities are to be
transformed. (Examples: [10 0 0], Surface 4.3.1, Point 20.) A
Point select menu appears which allows you to define how you
want to cursor select each point location.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Destination Position Point 2
[0 0 0]
Destination Position Point 3
[0 0 0]
Delete Original
Auto Execute
Point List
[0 0 0]
-Apply-
If ON, after Position completes, the points, curves, surfaces
or solids specified in List are deleted from the
MSC.Patran database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the entities to reposition, either by cursor selecting them
or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5 10
Surface 5.5 Solid 11. The select menu that appears can be used
to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points,
nodes, vertices, curves, edges, faces or solids.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

Positioning Points
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates Points 9 through 12 from Points 1through 4 by repositioning them based on the original
and destination point locations listed on the form.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Point ID List
9
Geometry
Original Position Point 1
Point 1
Original Position Point 2
Point 2
Original Position Point 3
Point 3
Destination Position Point 1
[0 1 0]
Destination Position Point 2
[0 1 1]
Destination Position Point 3
[-1 1 1]
Delete Original Points
Auto Execute
Point List
Point 1:4
Transform
Point
Position
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Y
After:
Z
8
Y
X
11
8
X
5
12
5
1
1
7
10
7
6
9
6
4
1
4
1
3
2
3
2

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Positioning Curves
Creates Curves 25 through 32 by repositioning Curves 13 through 24 from Points 9, 13 and 12,
to destination Points 2, 6 and 3. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curves 13
through 24 are deleted.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
25
Geometry
Original Position Point 1
Point 9
Original Position Point 2
Point 13
Original Position Point 3
Point 12
Destination Position Point 1
Point 2
Destination Position Point 2
Point 6
Destination Position Point 3
Point 3
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 13:24
Transform
Curve
Position
-Apply-
Before:
After:
Z
2 11
3 3
6 7
12
4 7
Y
8
2
1 6
Z
X 9
1 4
5 5
10 8
Y
X
18
26
17 32
25
6
2
5
3
1
27
2
12
4
1
10
10 23
15 11
14 19
24 15
14
16
9
13
13 22
31 20
29
19
28
11
7
7
6
9
8
5
18
30
20
21 12
17
16
3
8
4

Positioning From Edges
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
This example is similar to the previous example, except that the edges of Solid 1 are repositioned
to the new location to create Curves 13 through 20.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
13
Geometry
Original Position Point 1
Point 12
Original Position Point 2
Point 9
Original Position Point 3
Point 13
Destination Position Point 1
Point 3
Destination Position Point 2
Point 2
Destination Position Point 3
Point 6
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Transform
Curve
Position
Solid1.2.31.2.41.2.21.4.111.4
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
6
3
2
12
4
11
7
7
3
8
2
X
5
1
1
10
6
9
8
5
4
17
18
6
3
2
12
4
11
7
7
3
8
2
5
1
1
10
6
9
8
5
4
13
19
20
16
14
15
17 18
20
19
X
13
10 11
14 15
9
9
1
16
12
10 11
14 15
13
1
16
12

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Positioning Surfaces
Creates Surface 5 from Surface 4 by positioning it from Points 8, 9 and 11 to the destination
Points 7, 2 and 3.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Surface ID List
5
Geometry
Original Position Point 1
Point 8
Original Position Point 2
Point 9
Original Position Point 3
Point 11
Destination Position Point 1
Point 7
Destination Position Point 2
Point 2
Destination Position Point 3
Point 3
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 4
Transform
Surface
Position
-Apply -
Before:
Z
Y
After:
Z
9
8
9
8
Y
4
X
4
X
10
11
10
11
7
5
7
5
3
13
3
5
2
1
2
1
2
2
6
12
6
1
1
3
4
3
4

Positioning Solids
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates Solid 3 by repositioning it from Solid 2, based on the original and destination points
listed on the form. Notice that Delete Original Solids is pressed and Solid 2 is deleted.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Solid ID List
3
Geometry
Original Position Point 1
Point 13
Original Position Point 2
Point 16
Original Position Point 3
Point 9
Destination Position Point 1
Point 2
Destination Position Point 2
Point 6
Destination Position Point 3
Point 3
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 2
Transform
Solid
Position
-Apply-
Before:
After:
6
Y
5
Z X
Z
2
7
1
1
8
21
18
22 2
193
17
6
20
1
1
7
5Y
X
8
3
4
3
4
10
14
9
13
2
11
15
12
16

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Positioning Planes
Positions Plane 1 from where defined by the position Point 1 through 3, to where defined by the
position Point 4 through 6. Notice that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Plane ID List
2
Geometry
Original Position Point 1
Point 1
Original Position Point 2
Point 2
Original Position Point 3
Point 3
Destination Position Point 1
Point 4
Destination Position Point 2
Point 5
Destination Position Point 3
Point 6
Delete Original Plane
Auto Execute
Plane List
Plane 1
Transform
Plane
Position
-Apply-
Before:
Y
After:
Z X
1
Y
Z
X
1 1
2 3
2 3
6
4 5
6
4 5

Positioning Vectors
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Positions Vector 1 from where defined by the position Point 1 through 3, to where defined by the
position Point 4 through 6. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Vector ID List
2
Geometry
Original Position Point 1
Point 1
Original Position Point 2
Point 2
Original Position Point 3
Point 3
Destination Position Point 1
Point 4
Destination Position Point 2
Point 5
Destination Position Point 3
Point 6
Delete Original Vector
Auto Execute
Vector List
Vector 1
Transform
Vector
Position
-Apply-
Before:
Y
After:
Z X
1
Y
Z
X
1 1
2 3
2 3
6
4 5
6
4 5

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Vector Summing (VSum) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids
Creates points, curves, surfaces or solids by performing a vector sum of the coordinate locations
of two sets of existing entities to form one set of new entities. Points can be created from the
summation of other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be created from the summation of other
curves or edges. Surfaces can be created from the summation of other surfaces or solid faces. Solids
are created from the summation of other solids.
Action:
Object:
Method:
ID List
1
Geometry
Origin of Vector 1
[0 0 0]
Origin of Vector 2
[0 0 0]
Vsum Parameters
Multiplication Factor 1
1.0 1.0 1.0
Multiplication Factor 2
1.0 1.0 1.0
Transform
Vsum
Set to either Point, Curve, Surface or Solid.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point, curve,
surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405)
in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic
Functions.
Origin of Vector 1 is a point location for the base of the
vectors to the entities specified in 1 List.
Origin of Vector 2 is a point location for the base of the
vectors to the entities specified in 2 List.
A Point select menu appears that allows you alternate
methods to cursor define the vector point locations.
Multiplication Factors 1 and 2 are multiplying factors on
the global X, Y and Z components of the entities
specified in 1 List and 2 List,
respectively.

Vsum Parameters
Multiplication Factor 1
1.0 1.0 1.0
Multiplication Factor 2
1.0 1.0 1.0
Auto Execute
Point 1 List
[0 0 0]
Point 2 List
[0 0 0]
-Apply-
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
1 List is a list of entities which MSC.Patran will sum with
the specified entities in 2 List to form the new points,
curves, surfaces or solids.
The select menu that appears can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate points, nodes, vertices,
curves, edges, faces or solids for both listboxes.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Vector Summing Points
Creates Points 7, 8 and 9 by summing the vectors drawn from the origin, [0 0 0], to Points 1 and
4, 2 and 5 and 3 and 6. The “After” picture below has the vectors drawn to Points 2 and 5 to show
how Point 8 was created.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Point ID List
7
Origin of Vector 1
[0 0 0]
Origin of Vector 2
[0 0 0]
Vsum Parameters
Geometry
Multiplication Factor 1
1.0 1.0 1.0
Multiplication Factor 2
1.0 1.0 1.0
Auto Execute
Point 1 List
Point 1 2 3
Point 2 List
Point 4 5 6
Transform
Point
Vsum
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
4
1
4
1
5
2
7
6
3
5
2
6
3
8
9

Vector Summing Points
This example is the same as the previous example, except that a Multiplication Factor 2 is
increased from “1 1 1” to “2 2 2”.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Point ID List
7
Origin of Vector 1
[0 0 0]
Origin of Vector 2
[0 0 0]
Vsum Parameters
Geometry
Multiplication Factor 1
1.0 1.0 1.0
Multiplication Factor 2
2 2 2
Auto Execute
Point 1 List
Point 1 2 3
Point 2 List
Point 4 5 6
Transform
Point
Vsum
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
Y
Z
X
X
4
1
5
2
4
1
6
3
5
2
7
6
3
8
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
9

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Vector Summing Curves
Creates Curves 20 through 27 which are summed between Curves 12 through 19 and Curves 1
through 4. Notice that in order to create the spiral, Curve 1:4 must be entered twice in the Curve
2 List to match the eight curves listed in the Curve 1 List.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
20
Curve Type
Geometry
PATRAN 2 Convention
Origin of Vector 1
[0 0 0]
Origin of Vector 2
[0 0 0]
Vsum Parameters
Multiplication Factor 1
1.0 1.0 1.0
Multiplication Factor 2
1.0 1.0 1.0
Auto Execute
Curve 1 List
Curve 12:19
Curve 2 List
Transform
Curve
Vsum
Curve 1:4 1:4
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
3
26
22
3
2
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
4
19
25
1827
17
16
15
21
1423
2 13
12
4
1
24
20
1

Vector Summing Curves
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates Curve 3 by summing Curves 1 and 2. Notice that the multiplication factors of “.5 .5 .5”
are entered for both Multiplication Factors 1 and 2 and Curve 3 becomes the “average” of Curves
1 and 2 in length and in curvature.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
3
Curve Type
Geometry
PATRAN 2 Convention
Origin of Vector 1
[0 0 0]
Origin of Vector 2
[0 0 0]
Vsum Parameters
Multiplication Factor 1
.5 .5 .5
Multiplication Factor 2
.5 .5 .5
Auto Execute
Curve 1 List
Curve 1
Curve 2 List
Curve 2
Transform
Curve
Vsum
-Apply-
Before:
7
After:
7
Y
Z
9
Y
Z
X
1
X
1
2
2
1
3
1
6
6
10
8
8

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Vector Summing Surfaces
This example creates Surface 4 from vector summing the coordinate locations of Surfaces 1 and 3.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Surface ID List
4
Surface Type
Geometry
PATRAN 2 Convention
Origin of Vector 1
[0 0 0]
Origin of Vector 2
[0 0 0]
Vsum Parameters
Multiplication Factor 1
1 1 1
Multiplication Factor 2
1 1 1
Auto Execute
Surface 1 List
Surface 1
Surface 2 List
Surface 3
Transform
Surface
Vsum
-Apply-
Before:
4
Z
Y
After:
4
13
Y
Z
2
2
X
9
X
9
14
10
1
3
10
1
3
1
3
1
8
4
7
3
8
12
7
11

Vector Summing With Solid Faces
This example is similar to the previous example, except that Surface 4 is created by vector
summing the coordinate locations of the outside face of Solid 1 and Surface 3.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Surface ID List
4
Surface Type
Geometry
PATRAN 2 Convention
Origin of Vector 1
[0 0 0]
Origin of Vector 2
[0 0 0]
Vsum Parameters
Multiplication Factor 1
1 1 1
Multiplication Factor 2
1 1 1
Auto Execute
Surface 1 List
Solid 1.5
Surface 2 List
Surface 3
Transform
Surface
Vsum
-Apply-
Before:
4
Z
12
After:
4
Y
15
2
9
2
Y 1
Z 11 X
12
9
11
X
1
16
10
3
10
1
3
3
1
8
4
7
3
8
14
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
7
13

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Vector Summing Solids
Creates Solid 3 by vector summing the coordinate locations of Solids 1 and 2.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Solid ID List
3
Solid Type
Geometry
PATRAN 2 Convention
Origin of Vector 1
[0 0 0]
Origin of Vector 2
[0 0 0]
Vsum Parameters
Multiplication Factor 1
1 1 1
Multiplication Factor 2
1 1 1
Auto Execute
Solid1 List
Solid 1
Solid 2 List
Solid 2
Transform
Solid
Vsum
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
17
16
17
16
13
13
18
2
12
18
2
12
19
19
14
15
14
15
33
32
25
24
25
24
29
21
21
20 126
20 126
34
28
3
35
27
27
22
23
22
23
30
31

CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Moving and Scaling (MScale) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids
Creates a set of points, curves, surfaces and solids by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating
and/or warping an existing set of entities. Points can be moved and scaled from other points,
nodes or vertices. Curves can be moved and scaled from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be
moved and scaled from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are moved and scaled from other solids.
Action:
Object:
Method:
ID List
1
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
Translation Vector
Rotation Matrix
Column 1
1.0 0.0 0.0
Column 2
0.0 1.0 0.0
Column 3
0.0 0.0 1.0
Delete Original
Auto Execute
Point List
[0 0 0]
Transform
MScale
-Apply-
Set to either Point, Curve, Surface or Solid.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point, curve,
surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405)
in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic
Functions.
Used by the Origin of Scaling and Translation Vector to express
the coordinate location of the scale origin and the orientation of
the translation vector. (Example: Coord 5.)
Enter the point location of the origin to scale the existing entities
from. If coordinate values are entered, they will be expressed in
the Refer. Coordinate Frame. (Example: [10 0 0].) The Point
select menu appears that allows you alternate methods to cursor
define the point location.
The distance and direction to move the new set of points, curves,
surfaces or solids from the existing set. If coordinate values are
entered, they will be expressed in the Refer. Coordinate Frame.
(Example: .) An Axis select menu appears that allows
you alternate methods to cursor define the translation vector.
Rotation Matrix is a 3 by 3 transformation matrix in column sort.
See next page for more information.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Rotation Matrix
Column 1
1.0 0.0 0.0
Column 2
0.0 1.0 0.0
Column 3
0.0 0.0 1.0
The suggested values for the Rotation Matrix, Q, and their results are
the following (do not enter all zeros):
Translation Only (No Effect) - Enter values of +1 on the positive
diagonal to produce a translation of the entities only. That is, “1 0 0” for
Column 1, “0 1 0” for Column 2 and “0 0 1” for Column 3. This is the
default for the Q matrix.
Scale - Enter positive non-zero values less than or greater than 1.0
which are the scale factors for the diagonal and zero’s for the
remaining positions. That is, “Sx 0 0” for Column 1, “0 Sy 0” for Column
2 and “0 0 Sz ” for Column 3.
Mirror - Enter +1 on the diagonal, with a -1 for the axis that is normal
to the mirror plane, which is either the Reference Coordinate Frame’s
XY, YZ or XZ mirror plane. For example, “-1 0 0” in Column 1, “0 1 0”
for Column 2 and “0 0 1” for Column 3 will mirror across the YZ plane.
Rotation About an angle, θ - The table below shows the appropriate
values for Columns 1, 2 and 3 to rotate the entities about the
Reference Coordinate Frame’s X, Y or Z axis.
Axis Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
X [1 0 0] [0 cosθ sinθ] [0 -sinθ cosθ]
Y [cosθ 0 sinθ] [0 1 0] [-sinθ 0 cosθ]
Z [cosθ sinθ 0] [-sinθ cosθ 0] [0 0 1]
Simultaneous Scale, Mirror and Rotation - Calculate a
resulting Q matrix which is the matrix product of each
action: Q = [qscale ] [qmirror ] [qrotate ]
Warp - A non-orthogonal Q matrix will warp the entities as
a function of position. Use with caution.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

Translating and Mirroring Points
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates Points 8 through 13 by simultaneously translating and mirroring Points 1 though 7, two
units in the global X direction and mirroring about the global YZ plane.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Point ID List
8
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
Translation Vector
Rotation Matrix
Column 1
-1.0 0.0 0.0
Column 2
0.0 1.0 0.0
Column 3
0.0 0.0 1.0
Delete Original Points
Auto Execute
Point List
Point 1:7
Transform
Point
MScale
-Apply-
Before:
Y
Z
After:
7
X
Y
Z
6
X
5
4
3
7
2 8
1
9
6
10
5
11
4
3
2
1
12 13

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Mirroring and Scaling Curves
Creates Curves 7 through 12 by simultaneously scaling and mirroring Curves 1 through 6. The
curves are scaled two times in the global Y direction and they are mirrored about the global XZ
plane.
Action:
Object:
Curve ID List
7
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
Translation Vector
Rotation Matrix
Column 1
1.0 0.0 0.0
Column 2
0.0 -1.5 0.0
Column 3
0.0 0.0 1.0
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1:6
Transform
Curve
Method: MScale
-Apply-
Before:
9
After:
6
Y
8
Z X
Y
Z
X
5
7
9
4
6
8
12
5
7
11
4
10
6
4
2
6
4
2
10
11
12
1
7
1
2
1
8
3
1
3
9
2
5
3
3
5

Mirroring and Scaling Curves
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
This example is similar to the previous example, except that the curves are mirrored and scaled
within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Curve ID List
4
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 100
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
Translation Vector
Rotation Matrix
Column 1
1.0 0.0 0.0
Column 2
0.0 -1.5 0.0
Column 3
0.0 0.0 1.0
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1:3
Transform
Curve
MScale
-Apply-
Before:
6
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
4
X
X
2
12 108
6
4
Y
Z 100 X
2
3
2
1
4
5
6
7
Z 100 X
3
2
1
1
9
3
1
11
5
3
5

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Translating and Rotating Surfaces
Creates Surfaces 5 through 8 from Surfaces 1 through 4 by translating them 10 units in the global
Z direction and rotating them -120 degrees about the global X axis.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Surface ID List
5
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
Translation Vector
Rotation Matrix
Column 1
1.0 0.0 0.0
Column 2
0.0 -.5 -.87
Column 3
0.0 .87 -.5
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1:4
Transform
Surface
MScale
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
7
Z
Y
X
8
9 5
11
10
7
8
6
Y
X
3
4
5
3
4
5
22
4
22
4
1
1
3
1
1
1
3
1

Translating, Mirroring and Scaling Solids
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
This example simultaneously translates, mirrors and scales Solids 5 through 8 from Solids 1
through 4, by translating them 1.57 units in the global X direction and 1.0 unit in the global Y
direction; mirroring them about the global XZ plane; and scaling them .5 in the X direction and
.5 in the Y direction.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Solid ID List
5
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
Translation Vector
Rotation Matrix
Column 1
.5 0.0 0.0
Column 2
0.0 -.5 0.0
Column 3
0.0 0.0 1.0
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1:4
Transform
Solid
MScale
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
1
X
1
X
5
2
2
6
7
3
3
8
4
4

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
8.3 Transforming Coordinate Frames
Translating Coordinate Frames
Creates coordinate frames which are successively offset from each other by the Translation Vector
, starting from an existing set of specified coordinate frames.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Coord ID List
1
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Translation Vector
Translation Parameters
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Coords
Auto Execute
Coordinate Frame List
Coord 0
Transform
Coord
Translate
-Apply-
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate
frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Used by the Translation Vector to express the direction and
distance of the translation.
This is the distance and direction to translate the new set of
coordinate frames from the existing set. If coordinate values
are entered, they will be defined within the Refer. Coordinate
Frame. Example: . An Axis select menu will appear
to allow you alternate methods to cursor define the vector.
Defines the number of times to translate the existing
coordinate frames to create ones.
If ON, after Translate completes, the coordinate frames
specified in Coordinate List will be deleted from the
MSC.Patran database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the coordinate frames either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Coord 5.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

Translating Coordinate Frames
Creates the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2, from coordinate frame, Coord 1, by
translating it two units in the global X direction.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Coord ID List
2
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Translation Vector
Translation Parameters
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Coords
Auto Execute
Coordinate Frame List
Coord 1
Transform
Coord
Translate
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Y
1
X
Z
Y
Z
1 X
Z
Y
Y
X
X
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Y
Z
2 X

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Translating Coordinate Frames
Creates the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2, from coordinate frame, Coord 1, by
translating it through a translation vector defined by Points 1 and 2, using the Vector select menu
icon listed below.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Coord ID List
2
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Translation Vector
Construct 2PointVector(Ev
Translation Parameters
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Coords
Auto Execute
Coordinate Frame List
Coord 1
Transform
Coord
MScale
-Apply-
Vector Select Menu Icon
Before:
Y
Z
1
X
After:
Z
Y
Z
1 X
Z
Y
Y
X
X
1
1
5
Y
Z
2 X

Rotating Coordinate Frames
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates a set of coordinate frames which are formed from a specified set of existing coordinate
frames by a rigid body rotation about a defined axis.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Coord ID List
1
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle
90.0
Offset Angle
0.0
Repeat Count
1
Transform
Coord
Rotate
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate
frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Used by the defined rotation Axis to express the axis’
beginning and ending coordinates. Example: Coord 5.
This is the rotation axis that the new coordinate frames will be
rotated about from the existing set. If coordinate values are
entered, they will be defined within the Refer. Coordinate
Frame. Example: {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}. An Axis select menu
appears to allow you alternate methods to cursor define the
rotation axis.
Rotation Angle (θr ) defines how many degrees to rotate the
existing set of coordinate frames about the axis.
Offset Angle (θo ) defines how many degrees to offset from
the starting point of rotation.
Repeat Count defines the number of times to rotate the
existing set of coordinate frames to create the new coordinate
frames.
Coord 3
Axis
θ r
θ r
θ o
Repeat Count = 2
Coord 2
Coord 1

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle
90.0
Offset Angle
0.0
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Coords
Auto Execute
Coordinate Frame List
Coord 0
-Apply-
If ON, after Rotate completes, the coordinate frames
specified in Coordinate List will be deleted from the
MSC.Patran database.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the coordinate frames either by cursor selecting them or
by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Coord 5.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Introduction to MSC.Patran
Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

Rotating Coordinate Frames
CHAPTER 8
Transform Actions
Creates the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2, from coordinate frame, Coord 1, by rotating
it 45 degrees about the axis listed on the form.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Coord ID List
2
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis
{[0 0 0][1 1 1]}
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle
45.0
Offset Angle
0.0
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Coords
Auto Execute
Coordinate Frame List
Coord 1
Transform
Coord
Rotate
-Apply-
Before:
Z
After:
Z
Y
Y
X
X
Z
Y
Z
Y
1
Y
1
Z
X
X
X

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Rotating Coordinate Frames
Creates the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 200, from cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord
100, by rotating it 90 degrees about Coord 100’s Z axis, Coord 100.3, using the Axis select menu
icon listed below. Notice that Delete Original Coords is pressed and Coord 100 is deleted.
Action:
Object:
Method:
Coord ID List
200
Axis Select Menu Icon
3
Geometry
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Axis
Coord 100.3
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle
90.0
Offset Angle
0.0
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Coords
Auto Execute
Transform
Coord
Rotate
Coordinate Frame List
Coord 100
-Apply-
Before:
Z
Y
After:
Z
Y
X
X
T
1 100 Z R
1 200
R
T
Z
1
1
2
2
1
1

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
9
Verify Actions
■ Verify Action

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
9.1 Verify Action
Verifying Surface Boundaries
The Boundary method for surfaces will allow you to plot the free or non-manifold edges for a
list of specified surfaces or solid faces. A free edge is any edge that is not shared by at least one
other surface or solid face. A non-manifold edge is shared by more than two surfaces or solid
faces. Non-manifold often indicates a geometry which is not manufacturable; it may be alright
for surface models or on shared solid faces, but is illegal in a B-rep solid.This method is
recommended for verifying cracks in the model, or more specifically in a surface set to be used
in creating a B-rep solid.
Geometry
Action: Verify
Object: Surface
Method: Boundary
Verification Criteria
◆ Topology
◆ Geometry
Tolerance
0.005
The free edges are highlighted in the primary color.
Primary markers mark free edges and secondary
markers indicate non-manifold edges. Both the
primary color choice and the marker sizes are
controlled by the Graphics Preferences form under the
menu Preferences/Graphics.
The Topology Verification Criteria will not plot a free
edge if two adjacent surfaces or solid faces are
topologically congruent. The topology of the geometric
model is created and stored in the MSC.Patran
database at the time the geometry is created and
therefore, the tolerance is only dependent on the
geometric tolerance at that time. Thus, the tolerance is
not applicable.
The Geometry Verification Criteria will compare an edge to an adjacent surface or solid
face and see if they are coincident within a specified tolerance. If two edges are not coincident
then a free edge is displayed. The geometry toggle allows the user to run the verification
process in a more complete manner. Any existing topological gaps can be checked at various
tolerances to determine at which tolerance the edges may be equivalenced.

◆ Topology
◆
Geometry
Tolerance
0.005
Update Graphics...
Surface List
Apply
Should be set to a value that is smaller than the smallest
dimension in the model. The default is the current global
geometric tolerance.
Brings up a smaller Update Graphics subordinate form
that is described on page 701.
Specify the surfaces or solid faces either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Surface 4 10 Solid 5.4. The Surface select
menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the surfaces or solid faces.
☞ More Help:
Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran
Graphics Preferences (p. 291) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions
Topology (p. 10)
Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12)
CHAPTER 9
Verify Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Verifying Surfaces for B-reps
The B-rep method for surfaces will allow you to plot the free or non-manifold edges for a list of
specified surfaces or solid faces. A free edge is any edge that is not shared by at least one other
surface or solid face. A non-manifold edge is shared by more than two surfaces or solid faces.
Non-manifold often indicates a geometry which is not manufacturable; it may be alright for
surface models or on shared solid faces, but is illegal in a B-rep solid.This method is
recommended for verifying cracks in the model, or more specifically in a surface set to be used
in creating a B-rep solid.
Geometry
Action: Verify
Object: Solid
Method: B-rep
Verification Criteria
Tolerance
0.005
Surface List
- Apply -
The free edges are highlighted in the primary color. Primary
markers mark free edges and secondary markers indicate nonmanifold
edges. Both the primary color choice and the marker
sizes are controlled by the Graphics Preferences form under the
menu Preferences/Graphics.
The Verification Criteria will not plot a free edge if two adjacent
surfaces or solid faces are topologically congruent. The topology of
the geometric model is created and stored in the MSC.Patran
database at the time the geometry is created and therefore, the
tolerance is only dependent on the geometric tolerance at that time.
Thus, the tolerance is not applicable.
Specify the surfaces or solid faces either by cursor selecting them or
by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 4 10 Solid
5.4. The Surface select menu that appears, can be used to define
how you want to cursor select the surfaces or solid faces. (Note:
similar functionality to the Verify/Surface/Boundary option.)
Should be set to a value that is smaller than the smallest dimension in the model. The
default is the current global geometric tolerance.

Update Graphics Subordinate Form
CHAPTER 9
Verify Actions
The Update Graphics subordinate form is displayed when the Update Graphics button is pressed
on the Verify/Surface/Boundaries form. This subordinate form allows you to erase or plot in the
current viewport, groups of congruent or incongruent surfaces.
This form is useful for checking for surface cracks, topologically incongruent surfaces, or nonmanifold
edges shared by more than two surfaces. MSC.Software Corporation suggests you use
either the Edit/Surface/Edge Match form (see Matching Surface Edges (p. 481)) or the
Create/Surface/Match form (see Matching Adjacent Surfaces (p. 270)) to correct any incongruent
surfaces that have a gap between them.
Update Graphics
Plot Incongruent Surfaces
Plot All Geometry
Erase Markers
Erase Congruent Surfaces
OK
Plots only the surfaces that are incongruent or nonmanifold.
All other surfaces are erased from the viewport.
MSC.Patran will plot markers along the edges of the
incongruent surfaces.
Plots all geometry that are associated with the
current viewport’s posted groups.
If ON, MSC.Patran will automatically erase any surface that becomes
congruent in the model. You do not need to select the Plot Incongruent
Surfaces button to update the display of the viewport.
Erases the markers that were plotted along the edges of
the incongruent surfaces.
Press OK to erase the form.
☞ More Help:
Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12)
Building a Congruent Model (p. 31)
Group Create (p. 159) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Verify - Surface (Duplicates)
Surfaces in the entire model are checked for being duplicate.
Action:
Object:
Test:
Test Control
◆
◆
Geometry
Verify
Surface
Duplicates
Display Only
Delete Higher ID
Delete Lower ID
Reset Graphics
Apply
MSC.Patran gives the option to highlight any duplicate
surfaces found, or, if you select the icon, you may
choose to have MSC.Patran automatically eliminate
any duplicates found. When delete duplicates is
selected you may choose which surface ID of the two
to remove from the database.
Returns your graphic display back to the way it was
when the form was opened.This will unhighlight
duplicate elements. Exiting this form will also reset
graphics.

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
10
Associate Actions
■ Overview of the Associate Action

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
10.1 Overview of the Associate Action
The Associate action causes a geometric entity to become embedded on another geometric
entity. Surfaces with associated geometry will not get trimmed (i.e., a four sided iso parametric
patch will remain so even after associations are made to the patch).
Associations allow the mesher to create nodes on or along the associated geometry.
Loads or boundary conditions may be applied to associated geometries.
Mesh seeds can be placed on the associated geometry.
The nodes lying on the associated geometry have the associated geometry as topological
associations (i.e., nodes that lie on a curve associated to a surface will have their topological
associations to the curve rather than with the surface).
Associations are marked by filled blue triangles for points and filled yellow triangles for curves.
Table 10-1 Geometry Associate Action Objects and Descriptions
Object Method Description
❏ Point Curve Associate point to a curve.
Surface Associate point to a surface.
❏ Curve Curve Associate curve to a curve.
Surface Associate curve to a surface.
Important: The iso-mesher will not generate meshes that conform to hard geometries, if the
hard geometries lie interior to the surface. The iso-mesher ignores the interior
hard geometries to mesh the surface.

Associating Point Object
Geometry
Action: Associate
Object:
Method:
Point
Auto Execute
Point List
List
-Apply-
Figure 10-1
Set to either Curve or Surface.
List of points to be associated to curves or
surfaces.
List of curves or surfaces to which the points must be
associated. Points not within global geometric tolerance
will not be associated.
CHAPTER 10
Associate Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Geometry
Action: Associate
Object:
Method:
Point
Auto Execute
Point List
List
-Apply-
Figure 10-2
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
2 5 6 3
X1
10 1
2 5 6 3
X1
10 1
7
8
9
4
7
8
9
4

Associating Curve Object
Geometry
Action: Associate
Object:
Method:
Curve
Auto Execute
Curve List
List
-Apply-
Figure 10-3
Set to either Curve or Surface.
List of curves to be associated to curves or
surfaces.
CHAPTER 10
Associate Actions
List of curves or surfaces to which curves in the first list must
be associated. Curves not within global geometric tolerance
will not be associated.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Geometry
Action: Associate
Object:
Method:
Curve
Auto Execute
Curve List
List
-Apply-
Figure 10-4
Before:
After:
Y
Z
Y
Z
2 11
3
1
X
1
X
2
6
5
10
2 11
3
2
6
5
4
10
4

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
11
Disassociate Actions
■ Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
11.1 Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods
The disassociate action causes the association records to be deleted. All other information such
as mesh seed and loads and boundary conditions will be preserved on the disassociated entity,
if there are any.
The disassociate action causes the filled blue triangles and yellow triangles that mark the
association of points and curves respectively, to be removed.
Object Description
❏ Point Remove all point associations.
❏ Curve Remove all curve associations.
❏ Surface Remove all surface associations.

Disassociating Points
Geometry
Action: Disassociate
Object: Point
Auto Execute
Point List
-Apply-
Figure 11-1
List of points whose associations must be removed. No
action will be taken if the point(s) are not associated.
CHAPTER 11
Disassociate Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Disassociating Curves
Geometry
Action: Disassociate
Object: Curve
Auto Execute
Curve List
-Apply-
List of curves whose associations must be removed. No
action will be taken if the curve(s) are not associated.

Disassociating Surfaces
Geometry
Action: Disassociate
Object: Surface
Auto Execute
Surface List
-Apply-
Figure 11-2
List of surfaces in which all associations must be
removed.
CHAPTER 11
Disassociate Actions

PART 2
Geometry Modeling

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
12
The Renumber Action...
Renumbering Geometry
■ Renumber Forms

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
12.1 Introduction
Most often, ID numbers (IDs) for geometric entities are chosen and assigned automatically. The
Renumber Action permits the IDs of points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes, or vectors to be
changed. This capability is useful to:
Offset the IDs of a specific list of entities.
Renumber the IDs of all existing entities within a specified range.
Compact the IDs of an entity type sequentially from 1 to N.
IDs must be positive integers. Duplicate IDs are not permitted in the List of New IDs, or in the
selected Entity List (old IDs). A Starting ID or a List of New IDs may be entered in the input
databox. If a geometric entity outside the list of entities being renumbered is using the new ID,
the renumber process will print a warning message stating which ID is already in use and
proceed to use the next highest avaliable ID since each entity must have a unique ID. The default
is to renumber all the existing entities beginning with the minimum ID through the maximum
ID consecutively starting with 1.
If only one ID is entered, it is assumed to be the starting ID. The entities will be renumbered
consecutively beginning with the starting ID.
If more than one ID is entered and there are fewer IDs in the List of New IDs than there are valid
entities in the selected Entity List, renumbering will use the IDs provided and when the list is
exhausted, the next highest available ID will be used thereafter to complete the renumbering.
The List of New IDs may contain a # signifying to use the maximum ID + 1 as the Starting ID.
However, the list may have more IDs than needed.
The IDs in the selected Entity List may contain a #. The value of the maximum existing ID is
automatically substituted for the #. There may be gaps of nonexisting entities in the list but there
must be at least one valid entity ID in order for renumbering to take place.
A percent complete form shows the status of the renumber process. When renumbering is
complete, a report appears in the command line indicating the number of entities renumbered
and their new IDs. The renumber process may be halted at any time by pressing the Abort button
and the old IDs will be restored.

12.2 Renumber Forms
When Renumber is the selected Action the following options are available.
Object Description
CHAPTER 12
The Renumber Action... Renumbering Geometry
❏ Point The point menu selection provides the capability to renumber
or change the IDS of points.
❏ Curve The curve menu selection provides the capability to renumber
or change the IDs of curves.
❏ Surface The surface menu selection provides the capability to renumber
or change the IDs of surfaces.
❏ Solid The solid menu selection provides the capability to renumber or
change the IDs of solids.
❏ Plane The plane menu selection provides the capability to renumber
or change the IDs of planes.
❏ Vector The vector menu selection provides the capability to renumber
or change the IDs of vectors.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Renumber Geometry
Geometry
Action: Renumber
Object:
Summary
Total in Model:
2713
Minimum ID
21
Maximum ID
2733
Numbering Option
Starting ID(s) 1
List
21:2733
Node List
-Apply-
Use this option to renumber points, curves, surfaces, solids,
planes, or vectors. See Introduction (p. 716).
Set to either: Point, Curve, Surface,Solid, Plane, or
Vector.
Shows how many exist in the model and
minimum⁄ maximum values of IDs. Note: All
are numbered sequentially when the Maximum ID is equal to
Total in Model.
Specifies the option to use for renumbering Starting
ID(s) is used to input the new ID(s) for the existing
and Offset ID is used to offset the existing ID(s) by the
specified value ( inputting a value of 10 for Offset ID will
change an ID of 1 to 11 ).
Specifies the starting ID, or a list of new IDs to
assign. IDs must be positive integers. The # is a
valid entry here. If the number of IDs is less than the number
of valid , renumbering will not take place.
Specifies which old are to be renumbered. A list of
can be entered here or an active group of can
be selected from the viewport.
The default is to renumber all ( minimum ID to
maximum ID) consecutively beginning with the Start ID. The
entry, 1:#, is also valid to indicate all . There
may be gaps of nonexisting in the list, but there must be
at least one valid in order for renumbering to take place.
Duplicate IDs are not permitted.
If a outside the list of being renumbered is
using the new ID, the renumber process will use the next
highest available ID since each must have a unique ID.

I N D E X
MSC.Patran
Reference
Manual
Part 2:
Geometry
Modeling
I N D E X
MSC.Patran Reference Manual
Part 2: Geometry Modeling
Numerics
3 point method
overview, 63
A
accuracy, 2
any geometry entity
delete action, 409
arc center
point, 79
arc3point method
curve, 128
axis method
overview, 64
B
bi-parametric surface, 19, 20
blend method
curve, 426
solid, 538
surface, 475
body, 10
break method
curve, 418, 422, 425
example, 31
solid, 522, 526, 531, 533, 534, 535
surface, 457, 461, 465, 469, 471
B-rep method, 40
B-rep solid, 8, 19, 24, 40
exterior shell, 40
shell, 24
building a B-rep solid, 40
building a congruent model, 31
example, 31
building a degenerate solid, 41
building a degenerate surface, 41
building optimal surfaces, 33
C
CAD access modules, 47
CAD user file, 2, 20, 46, 47
CADDS 5, 2, 47
capabilities, 2
Cartesian in Refer. CF button, 66
CATIA, 2, 47
chain method
curve, 131
chained curve, 20, 21
Computervision, 2, 47
conic method
curve, 133
connectivity
curve, 15
definition, 15
modifying, 16
solid, 16
surface, 15
coordinate frame
angles, 60
attributes
show action, 594
create method overview, 63
definitions, 60
delete action, 411
rotate method, 693
translate method, 690
create action, 27
overview, 70

INDEX
curve
arc3point method, 128
blend method, 426
break method, 418, 422, 425
chain method, 131
conic method, 133
delete action, 410
disasemble method, 429
extend method, 431, 436, 438, 440
extract method, 137, 142
fillet method, 144
fit method, 148
intersect method, 150, 154
manifold method, 160
mcoord method, 648
merge method, 443
mirror method, 640
mscale method, 683
offset method constant, 171
offset method variable, 173
pivot method, 656
point method, 117, 119, 123
position method, 665
refit method, 447
reverse method, 448
rotate method, 619
scale method, 629
translate method, 605
trim method, 451, 454
vsum method, 674
XYZ method, 199
curve 4 point parametric positions
subordinate form, 127
curve angle
show action, 584
curve arc
show action, 583
curve attributes
show action, 582
curve length range
show action, 586
curve method, 41
curvilinear coordinate frame, 66
examples using translate and scale, 66
scale method, 66
translate method, 66
Curvilinear in Refer. CF button, 66
cylindrical coordinate frame
definition, 61
D
Dassault Systemes, 2, 47
Decompose method, 37
decomposing trimmed surfaces, 37
example, 37
default colors, 19, 20, 21, 24
degenerate surfaces and solids, 41
delete action
any geometry entity, 409
coordinate frame, 411
curve, 410
overview, 408
plane, 410
point, 410
solid, 410
surface, 410
vector, 410
DGA, 2, 47
Direct Geometry Access, 2, 47
disasemble method
curve, 429
surface, 478
disassemble method
solid, 541
display lines, 33, 39
E
edge, 10
edge match method, 31
closing gaps, 13
surface, 481, 484
edge method, 41
edge refit method
surface, 500
edit action, 27
overview, 414
EDS/Unigraphics, 2, 47
element connectivity, 34
element properties, 2
equivalence method
point, 416
EUCLID 3, 2, 47
euler method
overview, 64

examples
arc3point curve, 129, 130
ArcCenter point, 80
blend
curve, 427, 428
solid, 539, 540
surface, 476, 477
break
curve, 419, 420, 421, 423, 424
solid, 523, 524, 525, 528, 529, 530, 532,
536, 537
surface, 458, 459, 460, 462, 466, 467,
468, 470, 472, 473, 474
chain curve, 132
conic curve, 135, 136
disassemble
curve, 430
surface, 479, 480
edge match surface, 482, 483, 485
equivalencene point, 417
extend curve, 433, 434, 435, 437, 439, 441,
442
extend surface, 487, 489, 491, 493, 495,
497, 499
extract
curve, 139, 140, 141, 143
point, 82, 83
point from surface, 85
point from surface diagonal, 87
point from surface parametric, 89
fillet curve, 146, 147
fit curve, 149
interpolate point, 92, 93, 95, 96
interpolate vector, 392
intersect
curve, 151, 152, 153, 155, 156
point at edge, 98
point with curve and plane, 102
point with two curves, 99, 100, 101
point with vector and curve, 103, 104
point with vector and plane, 106
point with vector and surface, 105
manifold curve, 162, 163
mcoord
curve, 650, 651
plane, 654
point, 649
solid, 653
surface, 652
vector, 655
merge curve, 444, 445, 446, 450, 453, 455,
456
mirror
curve, 642, 643
plane, 646
point, 641
solid, 645, 647
surface, 644
mscale
curve, 686, 687
point, 685
solid, 689
surface, 688
offset curve, 172, 175
offset point, 108
offset surface, 273
pierce point, 110, 111
pivot
curve, 659, 660
plane, 663
point, 658
solid, 662
surface, 661
vector, 664
point curve, 118, 121, 122, 125, 126
position
curve, 668, 669
point, 667
solid, 671, 672, 673
surface, 670
project point, 114, 115, 116
reverse
curve, 449
solid, 547
surface, 502
rotate
coordinate frame, 695, 696
curve, 622, 623
plane, 627
point, 621
solid, 626
surface, 624, 625
vectors, 628
scale
curve, 633, 634
point, 631, 632
solid, 638
surface, 635, 636, 637
vector, 639
sew surface, 504
translate
coordinate frame, 691, 692
curve, 609, 610, 611
INDEX

INDEX
plane, 617
point, 607, 608
solid, 615, 616
surface, 612, 613, 614
vector, 618
trim curve, 452
vsum
curve, 678, 679
point, 676, 677
solid, 682
surface, 680, 681
XYZ
curve, 200
point, 75, 76, 77, 78
solid, 202
surface, 201
extend method
curve, 431, 436, 438, 440
surface, 486, 488, 490, 492, 494, 496, 498
extract method
curve, 137, 142
multiple points, 86, 88
point, 81
single point, 84
F
face, 10
face method, 42
field function, 4, 17
fillet method
curve, 144
fit method
curve, 148
G
general trimmed surface, 20
geometry types, 19
global coordinate frame, 60
global model tolerance, 18
surface gaps, 13
grid, 25
H
hyperpatch, 25
I
IGES, 2, 20, 25, 46
interpolate method
point, 91, 94
vector, 391
intersect method
curve, 150, 154
intersect parameters subordinate form,
157
point, 97
intersect parameters subordinate form, 157
IsoMesh, 17, 24, 37
L
line, 25
load/BC, 2
loads/BC, 2
M
manifold method
curve, 160
match method
closing gaps, 13
mathematical representation, 2
Matra Datavision, 2, 47
mcoord method
curve, 648
plane, 648
point, 648
solid, 648
surface, 648
vector, 648
merge method
curve, 443
refit, 447
meshing, 12
mirror method
curve, 640
plane, 640
point, 640
solid, 640
surface, 640
vector, 640
MSC.Patran CADDS 5, 47
MSC.Patran CATIA, 47
MSC.Patran EUCLID 3, 47

MSC.Patran ProENGINEER, 47, 55
.geo intermediate file, 56
executing from MSC.Patran, 55
executing from Pro/ENGINEER, 55
MSC.Patran Unigraphics, 47
features, 47
global model tolerance, 48
user tips, 48
mscale method
curve, 683
point, 683
solid, 683
surface, 683
multiple points
extract method, 86, 88
N
native geometry, 3
neutral file, 3, 25, 46, 57
nodes, 718
renumber, 718
nodes on curve
show action, 587
nodes on point
show action, 581
nodes on surface
show action, 590
normal method
overview, 65
O
offset method
constant curve, 171
point, 107
surface, 272
variable curve, 173
P
p3_proe, 55
parameterization
B-rep solid, 8
curve, 5
definition, 5
point, 5
solid, 8
surface, 7
trimmed surface, 7
parameterized geometry, 3
parametric axes, 15
plotting, 16
parametric cubic equation, 25
parametric cubic geometry, 57
definition, 25
limitations, 25, 26
recommendations, 25, 26
subtended arcs, 26
parametric curve, 19
Parametric Technology, 2, 47
Parasolid
tips for accessing, 49
patch, 25
PATRAN 2 Convention, 27, 28, 29
PATRAN 2 Convention button, 25, 27
Paver, 37
pentahedron, 41
pierce method
point, 109
pivot method
curve, 656
plane, 656
point, 656
solid, 656
surface, 656
vector, 656
plane
mcoord method, 648
mirror method, 640
pivot method, 656
position method, 665
rotate method, 619
translate method, 605
plane angle
show action, 596
plane distance
show action, 598
INDEX

INDEX
point, 19
delete action, 410
equivalence method, 416
extract method, 81
interpolate method, 91, 94
intersect method, 97
mcoord method, 648
mirror method, 640
mscale method, 683
offset method, 107
pierce method, 109
pivot method, 656
position method, 665
project method, 112
rotate method, 619
scale method, 629
translate method, 605
vsum method, 674
XYZ method, 74
point distance
show action, 571
point location
show action, 570
point method
curve, 117, 119, 123
curve 4 point parametric positions
subordinate form, 127
position method
curve, 665
plane, 665
point, 665
solid, 665
surface, 665
vector, 665
pressure load, 4, 17, 34
Pro/ENGINEER, 2, 47
project method
point, 112
R
rectangular coordinate frame
definition, 60
refit method
solid, 543
renumber
action, 717
reverse method, 16, 34
curve, 448
solid, 546
surface, 501
rotate method
coordinate frame, 693
curve, 619
point, 619
solid, 619
surface, 619
S
scale method
curve, 629
point, 629
solid, 629
surface, 629
vector, 629
sew method
surface, 503
show action
coordinate frame attributes, 594
curve angle, 584
curve arc, 583
curve attributes, 582
length range, 586
nodes on curve, 587
nodes on point, 581
nodes on surface, 590
overview, 568
plane angle, 596
plane distance, 598
point distance, 571
point location, 570
showing plane attributes, 595
showing vector attributes, 599
solid attributes, 593
surface area range, 589
surface attributes, 588
surface normals, 591
show action information form, 569
simply trimmed surface, 21
single point
extract method, 84

solid
blend method, 538
break method, 522, 526, 531, 533, 534, 535
delete action, 410
disassemble method, 541
mcoord method, 648
mirror method, 640
mscale method, 683
pivot method, 656
position method, 665
refit method, 543
reverse method, 546
rotate method, 619
scale method, 629
translate method, 605
vsum method, 674
XYZ method, 199
solid attributes
show action, 593
solids
type of, 24
spherical coordinate frame
definition, 61
suface normals
show action, 591
surface
blend method, 475
break method, 457, 461, 465, 469, 471
delete action, 410
disassemble method, 478
edge match method, 481, 484
extend method, 486, 488, 490, 492, 494,
496, 498
mcoord method, 648
mirror method, 640
mscale method, 683
offset method, 272
pivot method, 656
position method, 665
refit method, 500
reverse method, 501
rotate method, 619
scale method, 629
sew method, 503
sharp corners, 33
top and bottom locations, 34
translate method, 605
vsum method, 674
XYZ method, 199
surface area range
show action, 589
surface attributes
show action, 588
surface boundaries
verify action, 698
surface method, 42
surface normals, 17, 34, 40
example of aligning, 35
T
TetMesh, 24, 40
tetrahedron, 41
topologic entities
edge, 10
face, 10
vertex, 10
topological congruency, 31
definition, 12
gaps, 13
topology
definition, 10
ID assignment, 11, 17
transform action
overview, 602
translate method
coordinate frame, 690
curve, 605
plane, 605
point, 605
solid, 605
surface, 605
vector, 605
trim method
curve, 451, 454
trimmed surface, 19
decomposing, 37
default colors, 20
definition, 20
general trimmed, 20
parent surface, 20
simply trimmed, 21
tri-parametric solid, 8, 19, 24
types of geometry, 27
curves, 27
solids, 29
surfaces, 28
U
update graphics subordinate form, 701
INDEX

INDEX
V
vector
interpolate method, 391
mcoord method, 648
mirror method, 640
pivot method, 656
position method, 665
rotate method, 619
scale method, 629
translate method, 605
verify action
surface boundaries, 698
update graphics subordinate form, 701
vertex, 10
volume solid, 19
vsum method
curve, 674
point, 674
solid, 674
surface, 674
W
wedge solid, 42
X
XYZ method
curve, 199
point, 74
solid, 199
surface, 199